Anatoli A. Kharlampiev’s SAMBO WRESTLING — Published by Physical Culture and Sports, 1949. — 182 pages. Editor B.M. Chesnokov Technical Editor B.G. Tyapkin 2nd printing house «The Printed Court Yard » A.M. Glavpoligrafizadata at the Ministerial Council of the USSR. Leningrad, Gatchinsdaya, 26. Chapter 1 The Basic Techniques of SAMBO Wrestling* 1 The ploys used in SAMBO wrestling are techniques proven by science. In one case, it is expedient to use the body’s leverage while in another case it is more expedient to use the laws of motion dictated by the various parts of the human body. In a third case, achieving lightning quick motions by means of additive speed, etc, is used while in all cases of SAMBO wrestling, success depends not upon casually finding a successful ploy, but from the correct analysis of the movements of the human body. In this given effort, let us dwell on only the most essential bases and features for the techniques for throwing, hold downs, and submission ploys that are known to allow the wrestler to realize improvement through the effort of studying these ploys. In SAMBO, each throw must end with a fall. Naturally, the samboist who is thrown must soften his fall to the mat. If not, SAMBO wrestling would be painful, and the samboist would be discouraged from mastering the techniques in each ploy. Therefore, in SAMBO wrestling, the samboist must learn self -protection when falling to mitigate the basic energy of the throw. This mitigation when falling consists of: a) A rolling motion by means of which the falling body instead of striking the mat directly makes a softer landing by somersaulting; b) As consecutive parts of the body contact the mat, instead of an immediate lump sum impact of the body onto the mat from the fall, the samboist pushes against the mat by striking to mitigate the impact of the fall. All of the opponent’s throwing ability is based on the principles of unbalancing the samboist’s body. Stability depends upon retaining a firm base to support the wrestler (up to his known limit); after that, this base cannot support the wrestler who then becomes less stable and steady in his balance. By analyzing a samboist’s stance, it is easy to determine at what times that he is stable on two legs while moving on the mat, which also means by necessarily that he must share this two-legged stability with slight instances when he is only balanced on one leg due to his movement. The area of his support during such instants sharply decreases, and thus, creates the most favorable moment s to carry out a throw. If when in standing wrestling, a samboist senses his opponent’s lines of force, the samboist can lead his opponent into a position of false stability. For example, if the opponent is pressing into the samboist, then he has forced his body’s center of gravity into the forward portion of his base. If the opponent pulls the samboist, then his body’s center of gravity shifts toward the rear portion of his base. 1 The word “SAMBO” is an acronym derived from the initial letters of the three Russian words for “self-defense without weapons”.
Transcript
Anatoli A. Kharlampiev’s
SAMBO WRESTLING— Published by Physical Culture and Sports, 1949. — 182 pages.
2nd printing house «The Printed Court Yard » A.M. Glavpoligrafizadata at the Ministerial Council of theUSSR. Leningrad, Gatchinsdaya, 26.
Chapter 1The Basic Techniques of SAMBO Wrestling*1
The ploys used in SAMBO wrestling are techniques proven by science. In one case, it isexpedient to use the body’s leverage while in another case it is more expedient to use the laws of motion
dictated by the various parts of the human body. In a third case,achieving lightning quick motions by means of additive speed, etc, isused while in all cases of SAMBO wrestling, success depends not uponcasually finding a successful ploy, but from the correct analysis of themovements of the human body.
In this given effort, let us dwell on only the most essential basesand features for the techniques for throwing, hold downs, andsubmission ploys that are known to allow the wrestler to realizeimprovement through the effort of studying these ploys.
In SAMBO, each throw must end with a fall. Naturally, thesamboist who is thrown must soften his fall to the mat. If not, SAMBOwrestling would be painful, and the samboist would be discouraged frommastering the techniques in each ploy. Therefore, in SAMBO wrestling,the samboist must learn self-protection when falling to mitigate the basicenergy of the throw. This mitigation when falling consists of:
a) A rolling motion by means of which the falling body instead ofstriking the mat directly makes a softer landing by somersaulting;
b) As consecutive parts of the body contact the mat, instead of animmediate lump sum impact of the body onto the mat from the fall, the
samboist pushes against the mat by striking to mitigate the impact of the fall.
All of the opponent’s throwing ability is based on the principles of unbalancing the samboist’sbody. Stability depends upon retaining a firm base to support the wrestler (up to his known limit); afterthat, this base cannot support the wrestler who then becomes less stable and steady in his balance.
By analyzing a samboist’s stance, it is easy to determine at what times that he is stable on twolegs while moving on the mat, which also means by necessarily that he must share this two-leggedstability with slight instances when he is only balanced on one leg due to his movement. The area of hissupport during such instants sharply decreases, and thus, creates the most favorable moments to carryout a throw.
If when in standing wrestling, a samboist senses his opponent’s lines of force, the samboist canlead his opponent into a position of false stability. For example, if the opponent is pressing into thesamboist, then he has forced his body’s center of gravity into the forward portion of his base. If theopponent pulls the samboist, then his body’s center of gravity shifts toward the rear portion of his base.
1The word “SAMBO” is an acronym derived from the initial letters of the three Russian words for “self-defense without weapons”.
In another case, the samboist’s resistance will cause the opponent to actively preserve his ownstability. From here, it is clear, that in both cases the samboist must apply his throw in the direction thathis opponent’s attack has shifted the opponent’s body weight.
Hence, the samboist can impact both his own and his opponent’s stability by:
1) Reducing the time required to find the smallest area for a base,2) Moving the base area toward a specific direction through jerking and pushing the opponent.
The samboist must whenever possible be in an upright stance with a good sense of bodyposition.
The bent stance has three simultaneous deficiencies:
1) Due to the significant forward leaning of the upper part of the samboist’s body, the base ofthe samboist is also shifted forward;
2) To preserve balance from this position, the samboist is forced to keep the lower part of hisbody toward the rear edge of his base;
3) The pelvis and belt areas of the opponent are removed from easy access which practicallyends the opportunity to attack with the legs or the opponent’s legs.
Tactically, the conclusion from this is that the bent stance is almost defenseless against throws indifferent directions (especially forward throws) and very unprofitable for offense as it virtually eliminatesthe various throws that would use the attacker’s legs against his opponent’s legs.
To substantiate any throw, it is necessary to reveal first of all that principle on which a throw isbased. For example, all stepping throws are constructed on the discrepancy between the opponent’ssupporting base with the displacement of his body’s center of gravity. While his body may not move inany direction, the shift in his center of gravity over his base (in this case, his legs) is blocked, so that hecannot correct his discrepancy, and the opponent falls.
The samboist must always be able to exploit the principle of additive speed of motion to variousbody parts made in any one direction.
For example, in the front sweeping throw, the samboist must very quickly jerk upon hisopponent’s sleeves. The required jerking motion must be made in the direction:
1) Toward the arms bent at the elbow joint;2) Into the straighten shoulder joint (set to the rear of the arm);3) With the body rotating to the side of the jerking motion.
If all three motions are executed simultaneously, the speed of motion for the gripping hand willconsist of the sum of speeds of motions of the body, the shoulder, and the forearm. In standing wrestling,strong execution of any pull can be increased by adding the samboist’s power to that of his opponent sothat they are both applied in one direction.
So, if the opponent strongly pushes the samboist away from him, it is possible for the samboist topull simultaneously with his opponent’s push so that his opponent is drawn toward and to the samboist’sside. If the samboist quickly increases his pull that increases his opponent’s push, so that the samboist’seffort is added to his opponent’s effort increasing the effectiveness beyond only the power that thesamboist could have generated on his own.
Correctly exploiting body leverage provides the standing wrestler a huge advantage inovercoming his opponent’s strength and power.
Let's imagine two samboists who are standing in relation to each other in the characteristicposition for beginning the rear stepping throw. Both of their forces are counterbalanced, and neitherwrestler can knock the other to the mat. This occurs not only because their power is equal, butadditionally the leverage at their shoulders is defined by the distance between such items as the legpositions and arm grips for both samboists.
If the first samboist sharply increases his shoulder leverage by dropping to the knee of hissupporting leg (leaving his left grip at the same height), the second samboist is immediately dumped ontothe ground.
In standing wrestling, the samboist must use body weight to increase the power in his ploys. So,if the sweeping throw does not take the opponent from the mat, the samboist can augment the power ofthe throw by falling and turning into the mat. This "injection" of his body weight into the throwing ploy hasonly one deficiency – when applying the same throw using body weight, it will be very difficult for thesamboist to remain on his feet.
If his opponent possesses greater power, but reacts slower than the samboist, the samboist mustovercome his opponent’s strength in parts. Practically, this is accomplished in standing wrestling byapplying two consecutive throws in one direction. If the opponent reacts faster than the samboist, thesamboist must exploit his opponent’s reflexive movements and apply combinations of at least two throwsin various directions.
If the samboist is on top in par terre wrestling, he must always exploit his body weight. By thesame token, if he finds himself on bottom, he must work to disrupt his opponent’s balance, so that whenthe opponent leans on the samboist, he is led into a false sense of stability from which he can be actedagainst.
Hold downs occur when the opponent’s back is pressed to the ground, and this requires that thesamboist’s body weight be correctly applied. The drawn out opponent can be held, firstly, by correctlysetting part of the samboist’s body weight on him, and secondly, by the direct application of strength.
In par terre wrestling, strength that is applied during a submission ploy can rapidly increase theapplication of the samboist’s various levers. Hyper extending the elbow joint is accomplished by turningthe opponent’s arm either inward or outward. When the attacked arm is rotated outward, the lever of thefirst type is first applied to bring the lever fulcrum under the attacked elbow.
The Achilles tendon crush when applied also uses a lever of the first sort with the fulcrum setunder the Achilles tendon.
When the arm is turned inward for the elbow lever to hyper extend the elbow joint, a lever of thesecond type is applied. The influence on the elbow joint is applied with any part of the samboist’s bodythat is above the joint.
All knot submission holds are applied using levers of the third sort.In addition to applied levers to strengthen submission ploys that act on the opponent’s arms or
legs where the influence is immediate, the samboist must use his arms and legs in combinations such astwo hands and a leg, a hand and two legs, hands and legs, etc.
Wrestling with quicker motions is really the sambists’ quickness being defined in relation to thespeed of his motions as they relate to the speed of his opponent’s motions. If the samboist manages tocontrol the opponent’s movements, so that the opponent’s motions become “slower” because thesamboist gets there first, then the samboist has gained the advantage in speed.
This is relatively easy to apply in par terre wrestling. Parts of the human body that are arrangedfar from the body (forearm and hand, shin and foot), possess their own degrees of freedom, and alsodegrees of freedom in relation to those body parts that are closer to the body (shoulder or hip), and alsothe closer parts have lesser degrees of freedom than do those parts that are further from the body.
Practically speaking, the hand and foot have sufficient degrees of freedom to move in their space.To catch such freely moving body parts with a ploy is very difficult. In this case, the samboist
must by increments restrict his opponent’s degrees of freedom for the parts that he wished to attack untilthey are manageable.
First, the samboist should limit the mobility of his opponent’s body (retention), then the shoulderand only after this occurs should he begin to easily grip the intended forearm that in this position has verylimited amplitude in its motion and entirely insignificant speed.
When applying submission ploys, the samboist must choose a direction to apply his force thatdepends on what force and resistance is provided by opponent, so that the samboist can intercept to theinside as his opponent resists by turning inside, i.e. if his opponent’s arm is straight, it will be easier toturn that arm outside against a relatively weak muscle group. On the contrary, for the same reasons, ifthe arm is bent at the elbow, it is easier to rotate the opponent’s forearm outward while to the inside ismore difficult.
In practice, we quite often see what only the best wrestlers who have perfectly grasped theprinciples of the techniques within the ploys understand —that even one’s favorite ploys will be hard toobtain against certain wrestlers. This says that in sambo-wrestling there is a style suited to each person’sconstitution because a certain constitution may facilitate or even bar certain ploys from the wrestler’srepertoire. For example, when the samboist has a short torso but long legs, his most favorable fighting
range is likely to be the longer range. His best ploys in this case (based on strong legs) will be the throwacross the head from standing, and from par terre, any possible series of levers to the arms that areassisted by his legs.
But to such a wrestler most often when wrestling from standing, he should be very careful with leggrips. On the other hand, if the samboist has a long body with short legs, he should prefer the nearerranges and would find that his most convenient ploys would be the throws across the hip or back.
Sweeping throws, depending on the wrestler’s height, must be adjusted to be applied higher orlower to contact the area around the knee joint.
In both cases, attention must be paid to analyzing what is more favorable to adapt the positioningto obtain the best leverage in relationship to the length of the samboist’s legs to his opponent’s legs.
Chapter IITECHNIQUES OF SAMBO WRESTLING
SAFETY AND SELF-PROTECTION
In order to prevent painful bruises, strains, sprains, or any injuries in sambo-wrestling, special means for thesafety of the partner and the samboist are applied: self-protection. Those tasked to train in sambo-wrestling do so byobserving the training methodology and the rules for competitions serves this purpose as well.
The means for self-protection in par terre wrestling consist in the appropriate manipulation of the opponent’smuscles in his arms and legs as the samboist grips his opponent to apply pain. Such resistance in this case dependson the power orientation of the partner. However, categorically, the ploy is applied unexpectedly against theopponent’s weakened limb. In this case, when the opponent finds himself in a submission hold that he cannotescape, he signals his submission verbally or slaps his opponent’s body to signal his submission. Upon receiving thissignal, his attacker must immediately release his hold. At the same time, self-protection in applying his submissionholds correctly with calculated technical and power opportunities to address the level of resistance in applying hisploys on another wrestler.
When throwing from standing is executed, so that the attacker also falls onto the mat, self-protectionfor the partners consists in falling in a direction where the body can turn to dissipate the impact fromlanding.
When throwing so that the attacker remains standing, the samboist mitigates the impact of hisopponent’s landing by pulling upward on his opponent’s uniform, and sometimes by moving the opponentin a direction where he may roll with the landing.
Self-protection consists also of lessening the height of the fall from standing and the skills to do sorequired specialized study to develop.
At falling, it is first necessary to take care to not fall onto the opponent, "or" that your opponent doesnot fall onto you. Further, it is necessary to begin to learn to fall on the mat by receiving only a halfhearted push, and the falling partner must be coached to not tray to brace his hands on the mat to breakhis body’s fall.
To study and develop a skill in falling follows a path of deliberate and specialized exercises to learn tofall in sambo-wrestling using the following defined processes.
Grouping
a) Sit on the mat, in a position with the legs enwrapped by the arms and the chintucked into the chest. Bend the knees and shift to the back, so as to roll from the buttocks to theshoulders and back to the starting position. If the body grouping is performed correctly the roll is doneslowly and without great effort.
b) Take up a half squatting position and wrap the arms around the legs and sit back to performthe same roll. When performing this exercise, sit down on the mat as closely as possible to the heels.
c) Assume a basic stance and from a full squat wrap the arms around the legs and in time withthis motion roll onto the shoulders and back up to sit on the mat.
Arm Position when Falling onto the Back
Start with the back on the mat, and the chin is tucked into the chest. Extend the arms upwardand drop them to strongly strike the mat. In the moment of striking, the arms must be set, so that thepalms are facing downward into the mat. The body and the arms should form an angle of 45-50 degrees.
Falling On the Back with a Half Roll
a) From a sitt ing position . Sit on the mat with the arms extended forward, and the chin istucked into the chest. Roll onto the rounded back and without changing the position of the grouping, assoon as the shoulder blades contact the mat, as described above, strike the mat with the arms andhands (Figure 1).
b ) F r o m a h a l f s q u a t t i n g p o s i t i o n r i s e t o a h a l f s q u a t w i t h t h e
a r m s h e l d s t r a i g h t a n d c h i n t u c k e d i n t o t h e c h e s t .sit on the mat as close as possible to the heefinish the fall with the arms striking the mat
c ) F r o m a b a s i c s t a n c e ,s t r a i g h t a n d t h e c h i n p r e s s e d i n t o t h e c h e s tto a half squat, and then, sit down onto them without stopping the motionmat with the arms.
Limb Posit
Reclining on the right sidebraced on the mat near the right kneeThe left knee is raised as high as possible, and the right knee is on the matright arm is positioned on the mat with the palm downwardarms must be set at an angle of
To learn to adopt this final positionside.
Sit on the mat. Draw the legs in and press thethe arms forward. Shift the body’s weight over thebuttock up to the shoulder and return to the sitting position
Repeat the same roll but to the left
a r m s h e l d s t r a i g h t a n d c h i n t u c k e d i n t o t h e c h e s t .sit on the mat as close as possible to the heels and without stopping the motion, roll onto the back andfinish the fall with the arms striking the mat.
c ) F r o m a b a s i c s t a n c e , r i s e i n t o a b a s i c s t a n c e w i t h t h e a r m ss t r a i g h t a n d t h e c h i n p r e s s e d i n t o t h e c h e s t ". From this positionto a half squat, and then, sit down onto them without stopping the motion. Complete the fall by striking the
Limb Position when Falling on the Side
Reclining on the right side. The right leg, bent at the knee, is drawn to the chestbraced on the mat near the right knee. The body is bent forward, and the chin is pressed into the chest
raised as high as possible, and the right knee is on the matright arm is positioned on the mat with the palm downward. The relat ion of the body to thearms must be set at an angle of 45 - 5О°. The left arm is raised upward (Figure 2).
Figure 1 Completion of Falling onto the Back
Figure 2 Completion of Falling onto the Side
final position when falling sideways, it is necessary to train for both the
Rolling on the Side
the legs in and press the chin to the chest, round the back, and extendthe arms forward. Shift the body’s weight over the right buttock and roll onto the right
the shoulder and return to the sitting position.the same roll but to the left side.
Falling on the Side
a r m s h e l d s t r a i g h t a n d c h i n t u c k e d i n t o t h e c h e s t . From this position,ion, roll onto the back and
r i s e i n t o a b a s i c s t a n c e w i t h t h e a r m sFrom this position, transition
Complete the fall by striking the
The right leg, bent at the knee, is drawn to the chest. The left leg isThe body is bent forward, and the chin is pressed into the chest.
raised as high as possible, and the right knee is on the mat. The straightenedhe relat ion of the body to the
The left arm is raised upward (Figure 2).
to train for both the right and left a
the chest, round the back, and extendroll onto the right side from the
a) From the sitting position.the right buttock and roll onto theedge of the right shoulder contacts the mat, strongly strike the mat with straightened edge of theright hand and complete the fall onto the right side to end in the same position
b ) F r o m a s e m i - s q u a t t i n g p o s i t i o ninto the chest and the arms extended forwardrightbuttock as close as possibleside. Finish falling onto the right a
c ) F r o m t h e b a s i c s t a n d i n g p o s i t i o n .extended forward, and the chin tucked into the chestsquat, and then, sit onto the mat onfall onto the right side as was done in the previous exercise
The analogous exercises to “a”, “b”, and “c” would be executing the same to the leftside.
Rolling from One Side to
Lie on the right side (see Figurefrom the mat as the body rolls to its back into a position that reclines on the left side
Ensure the correctness ofand right leg to roll onto the right sidespeed.
Fal l ing over a Stick onto the Side
A partner holds a stick with both hands as shcontact his collar bone. Back up to the stick,remains on the mat. The left knee crook bends over the stick as the right hand grips the stick clright thigh.
The left arm is extended forward, the chin is tucked into the chestis rounded, the right hand firmly grasps the stick, as the body sits to theheel, so that the body falls around the stick at the left knee crookleft arm must within the falling motion be prepared to slap the mat as the back contacts theground. The left hand strikes the mat with the arm straightened and the palm facing the mat
In last moment before hitt ing the mat,stick to soften the fall.
To fall to on the mat, it is necessary
. Sit on the mat was previously specified. Shift the body weight ontoto the right in the direction of the right shoulder. As soon as the bottom
shoulder contacts the mat, strongly strike the mat with straightened edge of theright hand and complete the fall onto the right side to end in the same position
s q u a t t i n g p o s i t i o n . Adopt a full squat with the chin tuckedinto the chest and the arms extended forward. From this position, sit on the mat with the
possible to the right heel, and without stopping this motion, roll onto theright as was specified above.
c ) F r o m t h e b a s i c s t a n d i n g p o s i t i o n . Rise up in the basic stance with eh armsextended forward, and the chin tucked into the chest. From this position, correctly transition to the halfsquat, and then, sit onto the mat on the right buttock, and without stopping this sitting motion, end with afall onto the right side as was done in the previous exercise.
The analogous exercises to “a”, “b”, and “c” would be executing the same to the left
Rolling from One Side to Another
see Figure 2). From this position, the right arm and left legfrom the mat as the body rolls to its back into a position that reclines on the left side
correctness of the position on left side, and push off of the mat to roll with the left armand right leg to roll onto the right side. These rolls onto each side must gradually increase in execution
Fal l ing over a Stick onto the Side
A partner holds a stick with both hands as shown in Figure 3. Ensure that theBack up to the stick, so that right side of the body can raise up while the left side
knee crook bends over the stick as the right hand grips the stick cl
Figure 3 Starting Position for the Fall over the Stick
The left arm is extended forward, the chin is tucked into the chest (is rounded, the right hand firmly grasps the stick, as the body sits to the other side of the stick close to theheel, so that the body falls around the stick at the left knee crook. As soon as the fall is defined, theleft arm must within the falling motion be prepared to slap the mat as the back contacts the
hand strikes the mat with the arm straightened and the palm facing the matmoment before hitt ing the mat, it is necessary for the right hand to draw on the
it is necessary to adopt the final position for falling onto the
Shift the body weight onto. As soon as the bottom
shoulder contacts the mat, strongly strike the mat with straightened edge of theright hand and complete the fall onto the right side to end in the same position (see Figure 2).
dopt a full squat with the chin tucked, sit on the mat with the
this motion, roll onto the
Rise up in the basic stance with eh armsFrom this position, correctly transition to the half
the right buttock, and without stopping this sitting motion, end with a
The analogous exercises to “a”, “b”, and “c” would be executing the same to the left
From this position, the right arm and left leg strongly drivefrom the mat as the body rolls to its back into a position that reclines on the left side.
and push off of the mat to roll with the left armmust gradually increase in execution
Fal l ing over a Stick onto the Side
Ensure that the stick does notside of the body can raise up while the left side
knee crook bends over the stick as the right hand grips the stick close to the
(see Figure 3), the backother side of the stick close to the
As soon as the fall is defined, theleft arm must within the falling motion be prepared to slap the mat as the back contacts the
hand strikes the mat with the arm straightened and the palm facing the mat.for the right hand to draw on the
for falling onto the left
side (see Figure 6). To fall over the
Sit down without p lant ing the knees, and set the pa lms on the hands onto the mat with
the chin pressed into the chest wi th the back strong ly bentpush of f on the legs and leans the back of the head
mat. Having began the rol l us ing the toes to push, ro l l forward and over the back ensur ing that
the back is not s tra ightened. Dur ing
dur ing the ro l l , to stand up requ ires grasp ing the shins with the hands while the heels are
pressed into the buttocks.
Rise up on the right knee and set thea palm along the mat, so that the right handmat. The head moves toward the left shoulder.leg to begin to roll onto the back with the right shoulder directed toward the left buttock. Complete thesomersault with a strong strike on the ma
over the stick on the left side, the fall must be over the right
Somersaulting
Sit down without p lant ing the knees, and set the palms on the hands onto the mat wi th
chest with the back strong ly bent . W ithout st ra ighteningpush of f on the legs and leans the back of the head st rong ly lean ing downward
began the rol l us ing the toes to push, ro l l forward and over the back ensur ing that
not s tra ightened. Dur ing , the somersau lt on the mat , the legs remain bent; however,
dur ing the ro l l , to stand up requ ires grasp ing the sh ins with the hands while the heels are
Somersaulting on the Diagonal
Figure 4 Somersaulting on the Diagonal
knee and set the palms on the mat as shown in Figure 4. From this position, slidingright hand and arm moves between the legs and set the
the left shoulder. The chin tucks into the chest. Use the left leg toto begin to roll onto the back with the right shoulder directed toward the left buttock. Complete the
somersault with a strong strike on the mat by the left hand and adopt the position for falling onto the left side
Somersaulting over a Stick onto the Side
Figure 5
, the fall must be over the right side.
Sit down without p lant ing the knees, and set the palms on the hands onto the mat with
W ithout st ra ighten ing the back,downward to contact the
began the rol l us ing the toes to push, ro l l forward and over the back ensur ing that
, the somersau lt on the mat, the legs remain bent ; however,
dur ing the ro l l , to stand up requires grasp ing the sh ins with the hands whi le the heels are
as shown in Figure 4. From this position, slidingset the right shoulder on the
Use the left leg to start the roll leftto begin to roll onto the back with the right shoulder directed toward the left buttock. Complete the
t by the left hand and adopt the position for falling onto the left side.
Somersaulting over a Stick onto the Side
The partner holds the stick with both hands as shown in Figurebone.
Stand facing the stick so that the upper facing side of the stick is to the left of the body to permit a right side fallThe upper part of the right thigh contacts the stick, and the right hand grips the stick close to where the stick contactsthe left thigh. The left arm is extended forward and the chin is tucked into the chest
Bend the back, and retain a strong grip on the stick with theboth legs, so that the head is followed by theon the left side, so that the left hand must strike the mat. During the slap, the left arm is straightened with the palmturned downward. The right arm continues to draw on the stick asside (Figure 6).
Similarly, somersaulting over the stick to the left side is accomplished in equal numbers to falling over the rightside.
When falling in place with the opponthis technique, the samboist must ensure that only his hands, stomach, and toes contact the mat, and most certainlynot his face. He does so by assuming a position where he brace
a) F r o m a p o s i t i o n o n t h e k n e e s .with the palms down. Without bending the arms or the body, fall forward. As soon as thepalms contact the mat, brace the bent elbowsallowing the body to contact the ground
b) From the bas ic s tance, r ise up in the stance with the arms extendedpalms fac ing downward. Without bending theabove.
c ) F r o m t h e b a s i c s t a n c e w i t h a t u r nlower on the body. Holding the body erect,angle in relation to the mat, sharply pivot the body to the left to complete the fall with the arms mitigating the impact.
Execute the same fall with the pivoting being executed to the right
Assume the half squatting position withthe palms facing downward. Slightly throwmat. The hands should contact the matsoftened before the body continues the rotation onto the backchin pressed into the chest. The legs remain in place with being strongly bent
The right hand grips a comrade’s on the inside of the wrist, the comrade returns the same grip for the samboist.rise up together facing in the same direction. The left arm is extended forward with the palm facing downward. Jumpingover the locked hands, the same jump is executed as in the somersault over the stick (see Figure
Figure 6
The partner holds the stick with both hands as shown in Figure 5, so that the stick does not touch his collar
Stand facing the stick so that the upper facing side of the stick is to the left of the body to permit a right side fallThe upper part of the right thigh contacts the stick, and the right hand grips the stick close to where the stick contacts
arm is extended forward and the chin is tucked into the chest (see Figure 5).the back, and retain a strong grip on the stick with the right hand, make a start to push off of the mat with
is followed by the heels over the stick. Ensure that the falling body is positioned to landon the left side, so that the left hand must strike the mat. During the slap, the left arm is straightened with the palmturned downward. The right arm continues to draw on the stick as it did in the final position for falling onto the left
, somersaulting over the stick to the left side is accomplished in equal numbers to falling over the right
Falling onto the Hands
When falling in place with the opponent, samboist may have to use his hands to mitigate his fall. When applyingist must ensure that only his hands, stomach, and toes contact the mat, and most certainly
not his face. He does so by assuming a position where he braces on his arms or hands on the mat
F r o m a p o s i t i o n o n t h e k n e e s . Rise up onto the knees to move the arms forwardwith the palms down. Without bending the arms or the body, fall forward. As soon as thepalms contact the mat, brace the bent elbows softening the fall, and let the body fall withallowing the body to contact the ground.
From the bas ic s tance, r ise up in the stance with the arms extendedbending the body, fall forward and mitigate the fall using the hands as described
F r o m t h e b a s i c s t a n c e w i t h a t u r n . Rise up in the basic stance with the arms heldbody erect, begin falling toward the back, and as soon as the body attains a 60 degree
relation to the mat, sharply pivot the body to the left to complete the fall with the arms mitigating the impact.Execute the same fall with the pivoting being executed to the right.
Jumping Fall onto the Shoulders
Assume the half squatting position with the chin tucked into the chest, and the arms extended forward withSlightly throw the legs upwards and quickly make a strong strike with the hands
tact the mat first, and then, the shoulders should contact the mat with the fall alreadysoftened before the body continues the rotation onto the back. The head during the entire fallchin pressed into the chest. The legs remain in place with being strongly bent.
Aerial Somersault
grips a comrade’s on the inside of the wrist, the comrade returns the same grip for the samboist.up together facing in the same direction. The left arm is extended forward with the palm facing downward. Jumpingthe locked hands, the same jump is executed as in the somersault over the stick (see Figure
so that the stick does not touch his collar
Stand facing the stick so that the upper facing side of the stick is to the left of the body to permit a right side fall.The upper part of the right thigh contacts the stick, and the right hand grips the stick close to where the stick contacts
(see Figure 5).to push off of the mat with
over the stick. Ensure that the falling body is positioned to landon the left side, so that the left hand must strike the mat. During the slap, the left arm is straightened with the palm
it did in the final position for falling onto the left
, somersaulting over the stick to the left side is accomplished in equal numbers to falling over the right
ist may have to use his hands to mitigate his fall. When applyingist must ensure that only his hands, stomach, and toes contact the mat, and most certainly
s on his arms or hands on the mat.
Rise up onto the knees to move the arms forwardwith the palms down. Without bending the arms or the body, fall forward. As soon as the
softening the fall, and let the body fall with
From the basic s tance, r ise up in the stance with the arms extended forward and theusing the hands as described
Rise up in the basic stance with the arms heldtoward the back, and as soon as the body attains a 60 degree
relation to the mat, sharply pivot the body to the left to complete the fall with the arms mitigating the impact.
the chin tucked into the chest, and the arms extended forward witha strong strike with the hands on the
d contact the mat with the fall alreadyfall leans forward with the
grips a comrade’s on the inside of the wrist, the comrade returns the same grip for the samboist. Bothup together facing in the same direction. The left arm is extended forward with the palm facing downward. Jumpingthe locked hands, the same jump is executed as in the somersault over the stick (see Figure 5) for a fall onto the left
side. The comrade during the fall should support
STANCE, RANGE, GRIPPING, AND MOTION
The samboist’s stance must beimportance in stance is found in the correctlegs provide an important conditiona match. The usual concept that themechanically transferred to the samboist’s stance
The greater the distance betweenmaneuverability. The required area of a support,depends on the wrestler’s specific featuresdistance between his feet, it is necessary to takethe distance between his feet can be increased wtimes the length of his foot.
The samboist’s feet are shown to be in the proper distancing in several situations in Figure 7.However, the greater role in stance is played in the mid range and by the direction of the stance indetermining the area of support
If the legs are set very wide (Figurethe front and rear. A better stance can be maintained by simultaneously stepping in both length and width(Figure 7, б).
The best direction for the foot will be parallelangle of 35 - 45 ° (fig. 7,c).
The knees should remain aligned and not moved in a manner that disrupts a straight line with the feet.considered a right stance when the right leg leads the left legwrestle from with a right or left stanceconvenient supporting base for his legs while preventing his legs from being attacked while his own legs are available foroffense. The samboist does not want to fall into his opponent
Besides the fact the leaning the bodyprojection of his body's center of gravity which must beunder his feet—or at least behind the most forward leg (which is the that is most often attmost mobile (Figure 8). Certainly, in the course of wrestling, the legs must bend, and so must the body, but the goodsamboist must return to an erect stance as soon as practical because that is his best position for both defoffense. Some wrestlers, without being bad wrestlers, use a “low” stance that naturally does lead to the application ofseveral ploys, but most wrestlers will be better served using the erect stance the opportunities that it provides
omrade during the fall should support the samboist’s arm to soften the fall.
STANCE, RANGE, GRIPPING, AND MOTION
ist’s stance must be stable, mobile, and simultaneously convenient for defense and offensecorrect placement and positioning for the legs and body. The arrangements of the
important condition for wrestling - the foundation for safely maneuvering on. The usual concept that the larger the supporting area, the greater the stability
to the samboist’s stance.
istance between a wrestler’s feet, the more sharply reducearea of a support, and the width of the feet in wrestling is an art the
specific features—in particular, the length of his legs. To determine the proit is necessary to take the width of his shoulders, and depending on
the distance between his feet can be increased within the limits of the distance measured
samboist’s feet are shown to be in the proper distancing in several situations in Figure 7.However, the greater role in stance is played in the mid range and by the direction of the stance indetermining the area of support.
Figure 7 Foot Arrangement in Various Stances
Figure 7, а), such a stance is steady in a lateral direction but less so toA better stance can be maintained by simultaneously stepping in both length and width
foot will be parallel to the other to cover all 8 standing directions with the leg forming an
The knees should remain aligned and not moved in a manner that disrupts a straight line with the feet.considered a right stance when the right leg leads the left leg. For the samboist to wrestle freely, he must be able towrestle from with a right or left stance. His body should be held erect without permitting the upper body to move beyond aonvenient supporting base for his legs while preventing his legs from being attacked while his own legs are available for
offense. The samboist does not want to fall into his opponent.
the fact the leaning the body complicates preserving balance, and erect and correct stance allows for theof gravity which must be found close to the samboist’s center of gravity which should be
or at least behind the most forward leg (which is the that is most often attacked, and thus, should be thein the course of wrestling, the legs must bend, and so must the body, but the good
samboist must return to an erect stance as soon as practical because that is his best position for both defwrestlers, without being bad wrestlers, use a “low” stance that naturally does lead to the application of
several ploys, but most wrestlers will be better served using the erect stance the opportunities that it provides
STANCE, RANGE, GRIPPING, AND MOTION
defense and offense. Crucialbody. The arrangements of the
maneuvering on the mat within, the greater the stability cannot be
sharply reduced is hisand the width of the feet in wrestling is an art the
To determine the properand depending on his height,
ithin the limits of the distance measured to be 2 ½ to 3
samboist’s feet are shown to be in the proper distancing in several situations in Figure 7.However, the greater role in stance is played in the mid range and by the direction of the stance in
direction but less so toA better stance can be maintained by simultaneously stepping in both length and width
with the leg forming an
The knees should remain aligned and not moved in a manner that disrupts a straight line with the feet. A stance isthe samboist to wrestle freely, he must be able to
erect without permitting the upper body to move beyond aonvenient supporting base for his legs while preventing his legs from being attacked while his own legs are available for
and erect and correct stance allows for theclose to the samboist’s center of gravity which should be
acked, and thus, should be thein the course of wrestling, the legs must bend, and so must the body, but the good
samboist must return to an erect stance as soon as practical because that is his best position for both defense andwrestlers, without being bad wrestlers, use a “low” stance that naturally does lead to the application of
several ploys, but most wrestlers will be better served using the erect stance the opportunities that it provides.
Figure 8- A Correct Arrangement of Two Standing Samboists
When two wrestlers are in standing wrestling, their distance from each other is called their rangewhich is defined as the distance between two samboists. All ranges in sambo-wrestling are covered inone of five ranges.1. The range where there can be no gripping where the wrestlers cannot touch each other,and they are seeking a convenient moment to come to grips . To do so, they may use feintingmotions with the arms in their attempt to move on the mat in a way to close with theiropponents.
2. “Far” range where the samboist’s can grip each other on one arm or use both hands to grip asleeve.
3. “Mid” range where the wrestlers are able to grip each others’ arms, or the front part ofthe jacket or body (see Figure 8).
4. “Near” range where the wrestlers can grip each other on the back of the uniform.5. “Close” range where the wrestlers can wrap their arms around each other and press their bodies
into each other.
Wrestling from a convenient grip and range is very important because very seldom will bothwrestlers favor the same range and grip.
Obtaining the desiredgrip and exploiting it for applying ploys is a very important part of standingwrestling.Gripping has a basic and reciprocal role if one wrestler grips the sleeve of his opponent at a
certain range because then he enables his opponent to capture his sleeves to move into the secondrange.
The second wrestler’s grip becomes the reciprocal grip the is the proper response to this hold,and if the samboist was not prepared to move into this new range, then his own grip may be turnedagainst him if his opponent is able to exploit the new range.
There are 10 basic grips in standing wrestling.1. Suppression gripping that consists of gripping the opponent’s uniform under his opposite side elbowt.
2. Gripping the uniform on the shoulder that consists of gripping the opponent on the shoulder part of theopponent’s jacket from above.
З. Gripping the clavicle that consists of a suppression grip on one arm while the second hand grips the opponent’suniform on the same side clavicle.
4. Gripping the shoulder cuff or armpit consists of a suppression grip on one of the opponent’s armsand his uniform under his opposite side armpit.
5. Chest grip to the opponent’s uniform consists of a suppression grip to one of the opponent’s arms and a grip to his jacketcollar from the front.
6. Cross grip on the front of the opponent’s jacket that consists of a grip around the same side lapel, over the arm to theside that where the throw is applied. This grip must be set below the other hand.
7. Grip belt from the front that consists of a suppression grip to one arm as the other hand grips the opponent’sbelt from the front and may be over hand or under handed.
8. Rear belt grip that consists of a suppression grip by one arm while the second hand grips the back of theopponent’s belt from under his opposite side arm, or over that arm, or over the same side shoulder.
9. Outside leg grip that consists of grip to the outside of the opposite side leg at the opponent’s knee crook.10. Cross grip to the leg that consists of a grip to the inside of the same side leg at the opponent’s knee crook.
A good grip is designed to be applied, so that the grip can be varied while denying the opponent his ownpreferred holds. This must comply with the rules of sambo-wrestling yet facilitate applying ploys.
Reciprocalor retaliatorygripping isapplied insambo-wrestling in thefollowingsituations:I. In replying to suppression grip, the samboist must apply a counter grip to his opponent’s jacket on
the shoulders.
2. In response to a grip on the uniform at the shoulders, it is possible to apply a suppression grip.
3. In response to a clavicle grip the samboist can apply a grip to the armpit or the uniform underthe same side shoulder cuff.
4. In responding to a grip to his armpit, the samboist can apply a grip to his opponent’s wrist, armpit,or use both "hands" to grip his opponent’s shoulders at the same part of his opponent’s arms as he isgripping on the samboist.
5. In responding to a grip to the chest of his jacket, the samboist can apply a grip to his opponent’sarmpit.
6. In response to the uniform being cross gripped on the chest, the somboist can apply a grip to hisopponent’s armpit.7. In response to a grip to the middle of the belt, the samboist can apply a reverse grip to the shoulder
cuff or armpit- that is to grip the opposite side wrist on the arm that is holding the samboist’s belt, andthus, the samboist’s thumb is closer to his own belt than his little finger. Therefore, his elbow will beinside of the opponent’s armpit on the same side arm.
8. In responding to a belt grip from behind and under the arm, the samboist can use onehand to provide a suppression grip while his second hand grips his opponent’s head, elbowcrook, or grips the back of his opponent’s belt over the same side shoulder.
9. In responding to an outside leg grab, the samboist can grip the back of his opponent’sbelt over the same side shoulder or hold down his opponent’s arm with both of his hands.
10. In response to a cross leg grab, the samboist can use one hand to apply a suppression grip on theopponent’s arm that is gripping his leg, and his other hand can grip the armpit on his opponent’s same sidearm.
Stances are vital to the samboist, but if that stance remains static and in one place, any push into theupper part of his body (or a jerk to his upper body) will be a constant threat to the samboist’s stability that maylead to a critical loss of balance. Therefore, in wrestling at any moment, the samboist must be ready to"preserve his balance” and to parry the pushes and pulls of his opponent. When motion is necessary, he mustconsider that each step means moving his supporting area and therefore, he must minimize those momentswhen his balance is least stable as he moves each leg. He must preserve his balance by not crossing his feetor providing any motion that his opponent can exploit against him. From there, the greater value inwrestling in standing is played by stance as it applies to moving correctly in a manner that preservesthe samboist’s base and subtracts from the opponent’s base.
As a rule, to preserve the stable position must begin with a single step by the leg closest to theintended direction of movement, and for this to occur the other leg’s motion must be somewhere betweenthe position that both feet began the movement from. For example, when in a right stance, to moveforward, the right foot should move ahead of the left foot.
It is necessary to take the least time possible to be in any stance where your feet are setwider than ordinary, and absolutely the crossing of feet is to be avoided when moving the legs.It is necessary for this purpose quick motion is required as a rule.
Moving does not require several successive actions because it may allow the opponent to predict thesamboist’s actions, and the samboist always acts, so that the opponent cannot exploit the samboist’sactions.
Never do make unnecessary movement. It is necessary to aspire to move in relation to the opponent’smotion to be able to apply ploys or to move the opponent from a stable position into a vulnerable position.
PREPARATION TO THROW
To apply a throw in sambo-wrestling, the samboist must vary with the moment as the opponent’spositions change to be ready to exploit his opportunities to throw. These situations come up in thefollowing circumstances:
1) When the opponent is distracted in some manner that removes him from his wrestling on the mat;2) When the opponent over steps his supporting area:
a) Leans forward and pressing on the partner,b) Shifts weight to the rear or forward,
c) Shifts weight over one leg,
d) Crosses feet,e) Jumps around the partner,f) After a throw, rising from the mat without releasing the grip on the partner.
For exploiting motion and the other diverse opportunities and positions of the opponent, thesamboist must vary the speed of his reactions while being able to study his opponent to select thecorresponding ploy for each situation that develops on the mat.
Given a choice the opponent rarely will adopt positions risky for himself. Therefore, in a match, itis necessary to be able to artificially create risky positions for the opponent where it will be convenient forthe samboist to initiate a throw. In other words, the samboist must be able to “prepare his opponent to bethrown”.
The same preparation can be use to implement many throws. We shall dwell on the most oftenused means for preparing the opponent to be thrown, and further, we shall look at taking these means toapply various throws.
Knocking the Opponent onto One Leg
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist ’s left hand adopts a suppressiongr ip whi le his r ight hand gr ips his opponent on the lef t armpit . IN the moment when theopponent attempts to move by moving his r ight leg, the samboist takes a small step backwith his left leg and applies a strong jerk with his left hand downward and toward him as his right handpulls to the left and upward. The jerk should be made in the direction to continue the original motionbetween the opponent’s left and right feet using his right shoulder to form a 45 ° angle downward and tothe left over that same angle.
Knocking the Opponent up onto the Toes
Both wrest lers are in right stance. The samboist ’s lef t hand applies a suppression gripwhi le his r ight hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt f rom under his opponent ’s lef t arm. Bothof his hands then jerk his opponent in the direction of his toes, and then upward. Practice allows thesamboist to feel and define precisely the jerk when theoretically the jerk is defined as what is needed to lead a line to themidpoint between the opponent’s feet and from that point outward to the sides of the toes perpendicular to that plane.The jerk is applied in the direction of this motion.
Freeing One of the Opponent’s Legs from the Mat
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand supplies a suppression grip. In themoment when the opponent is attempting to move his right leg, the samboist quickly sets his right forearmover his opponent’s right elbow crook and shifts his body weight to fix his opponent over his right legwhich becomes slightly bent at the knee.
Freeing Both of the Opponent’s Legs from the Mat
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist applies a suppression grip, and in themoment when his opponent tries to move his right leg, he quickly applies a strong jerk with bothhands downward to direct the jerk with each arm toward his opponent’s opposite side heel. Inthis jerking motion, the samboist must be close to his opponent to use his body weight to notonly fix the shift of his opponent’s body weight over the heels, but to cause his opponent’sknees to bend as well.
Instituting the Opponent
Both are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform on the shoulder. His lefthand draws the opponent in the direction of his right foot to shift his opponent’s body weight outside of hisarea of support. His right hand presses to the left side of his opponent’s body, so that his jerk can “fix” hisopponent so that he is compelled to make a large step with his left leg diagonally forward and to the left.
Cross Institution of the Opponent
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket on the shoulders. Inthe moment when his opponent tries to move his right leg, the samboist’s left hand draws downward and slightly tothe left to force his opponent to shift his base over his right leg. Simultaneously with this, his right hand pressesthe left side of his body upward and forces his opponent to the left (toward his back), so that theopponent’s left leg crosses behind his right leg.
Organized Pull
Both are in right stances. The samboist applies a suppression hold, then jerks and pulls hisopponent toward him to cause his opponent to resist these motions, so that his opponent’s stability is lostas he begins to pull on his opponent. When this method of preparation is used the samboist must be ready todefend against any reciprocal ploys or other offense leading to throws that may be applied by his opponent toward thesamboist’s back.
Organized Pressure
Both are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform on the shoulders. He pushes his opponent tothe side and away from ihim to cause his opponent to resist, so that to retain his stable position, his opponent must press backinto the samboist in a required direction. When applying this method of preparation, it is necessary to be ready to apply bothdefense and reciprocal ploys against the opponent for any throws that he may attempt in the direction of the samboist’s chest.
Provoking the Opponent to Move a Leg to the Side
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist applies a suppression gripwith his left hand. His right hand attempts to grip his opponent’s left leg. In the moment when his opponent desiresto defend his leg by moving it to the side and back, his body weight will be shifted to concentrate over his right leg.
Untwisting the Opponent
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist applies a grip to his opponent’s uniform at the shoulders. Thesamboist untwists his opponent to the right and away from him. To do so, it is necessary for the samboist to turn tothe right, so that his left hand can slightly lift the right side of his opponent as his right hand presses his opponent tothe left. It is possibleto untwist to the left and away from the body as well, and if the opponent is in a right stance, hewill cross his legs, but in this case, , the samboist must adopt a left stance.
Over Turning the Opponent
Both are in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right wristwhile his right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder from behind closer to the arm. Both hands strongly jerkthe opponent toward the samboist and to the right to casuse his opponent to rotate onto his back. Thesamboist’s right hand musts pull his opponent’s right arm and shoulder as far to the right and upwardas possible. His left hand energetically jerksthe opponent’s right forearm in front of him beforereleasing to apply the required grip to realize the completion of the throw.
Lifting the Opponent
Lift ing the opponent is somewhat easier to carry out with a higher grip on the opponent andat a shorter range in the moment of application.
When lif t ing his opponent, the samboist must ensure that his opponent has no chance tohook or entangle his legs in the samboist’s legs to frustrate the lift.
CLASSIFICATION OF SAMBO WRESTLING THROWS
When a samboist contacts the mat, it is only with his feet in standing wrestling, but when the samboist applying anyploy contacts the mat with any part of his body, other than his feet, he is considered to be wrestling in par terre, or tobe more precise, ploys applied in such positions for the wrestler are considered to be par terre ploys.
“Throws” are defined as those ploys by means of which the opponent is forced to adopt a par terre position from astanding position. The wrestler applying the throw can remain standing or contact the mat with other partsof his body.
The prone position on the back slows the samboist and limits his mobility, it is a more favorableposition for holding a wrestler in to apply submission ploys and hold downs, and therefore, thepurpose of every throw is to first of all turn the opponent onto his back, and the thrower is almostalways in a more favorable position when he is above his opponent.
All applied throws do not achieve this planned purpose. A number of them will be foiled by theopponent’s resistance, and others may not succeed due to a number of actions related to the throw orits preparation. In addition to these causes of failure to succeed in throwing the opponent, the abilityto throw is dependent upon a variety of skills required to execute the ploy. Proceeding from this, thefollowing throwing classif ication scheme was adopted for wresting evaluation and sport values:
1) Throws onto the back where the thrower must remain standing;2) Throws onto the side where the thrower must remain standing;
З) Throws onto the back where the thrower’s knees may contact the mat;4) Throws onto the back with an intended fall:
a) When the thrower falls after the opponent,b) When the thrower falls before the opponent;
5) Throws to the side where the thrower’s knee(s) contact the mat;6) Throws onto the buttocks where the thrower remains standing;7) Throws to the side with a falling motion intended in the throw:
а) When the thrower falls after his opponent,b) When the thrower falls before his opponent;
8) Throws onto all fours where the thrower remains standing;
9) Throws onto the knees or hands where the thrower remains standing;10) Throws onto the knees or onto all fours with an intentional falling motion in applying the throw.
In the latter case, the opponent after being thrown must be over the samboist who threw him, so it isimperative that the samboist rise up from his throw to standing or the value of his throw will be outstripped bythe opponent’s numerous new advantages from being above the samboist,. He must not be permitted totake advantage of these.
The structures of the possible throws in sambo-wrestling are quite diverse, and thus, the scheme indicatedbelow on the next page is required. The throws are classified and divided into groups based upon their coreattributes and values in the sambo-wrestling’s arsenal.
Scheme for Classifying the Throws of Sambo Wrestling
Unbalancing by Gripping the Heel
Both wrestlers are in right stancesarmpits. He then quickly squats to kneel on his left knee as his left hand grips the inside of hisopponent’s right heel as his right palm is set on the inside of his opponent’s right knee, so that his fingersare facing to the left. Then, his left hand jerks the heel toward him and upward as his right hand pressesto the left and downward (Figurebody and lifts the trapped leg up to chest levelThe preparation for this ploy canover his other leg.
The self-protection when falling for this ploy is to use the half somersault onto themistake in executing this ploy is pressing the right hand into the opponent’s knee without the left and downwardpressure, but directly away from the samboist
Scheme for Classifying the Throws of Sambo Wrestling
THROWS
UNBALANCING
Unbalancing by Gripping the Heel
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s initial grip is to his opponent’s shoulder cuffs orarmpits. He then quickly squats to kneel on his left knee as his left hand grips the inside of hisopponent’s right heel as his right palm is set on the inside of his opponent’s right knee, so that his fingers
Then, his left hand jerks the heel toward him and upward as his right hand pressesFigure 9). When his opponent begins to fall, the samboist straightens his
body and lifts the trapped leg up to chest level. A variant of this ploy crosses the opponent’s legs.The preparation for this ploy can serve to force the opponent onto one leg, and thus, shift his weight entirely
protection when falling for this ploy is to use the half somersault onto the back.mistake in executing this ploy is pressing the right hand into the opponent’s knee without the left and downwardpressure, but directly away from the samboist.
opponent’s shoulder cuffs orarmpits. He then quickly squats to kneel on his left knee as his left hand grips the inside of hisopponent’s right heel as his right palm is set on the inside of his opponent’s right knee, so that his fingers
Then, his left hand jerks the heel toward him and upward as his right hand pressesWhen his opponent begins to fall, the samboist straightens his
is ploy crosses the opponent’s legs.thus, shift his weight entirely
. The most commonmistake in executing this ploy is pressing the right hand into the opponent’s knee without the left and downward
Unbalancing by Gripping thBoth wrestlers are in a right stance. The opponent has a low stance or attempts to grip the
samboist’s leg, so the samboist places his right palm on the nape of his opponent’s neck andset his left hand goes under his right arm to grip his right forto the right and a large step back with his right leg, the samboist forces his opponent to rollforward and onto his back (Figure 10).
Preparation for this ploy requires bending the opponent with a grip of the same side armpitclose to the back.
Self-protection when falling: the forward somersault.
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides asuppression grip. With a slight turn to the left, the samboist quickly drops onto his left knee and extends right legplace it place it between the opponent's legs, so that his foot is facing his opponent's heel. Simultaneously with this, thesamboist’s right hand grips the outside of his opponent’s leg at the knee crook. His left hand leans his opponent forward ashis right hand throws upward the trapped left knee to force his opponent into a forward diagonal somersault over his rightshoulder and onto his left buttock (Figure
Figure 9 Unbalancing by Gripping the Heel
Unbalancing by Gripping the HeadBoth wrestlers are in a right stance. The opponent has a low stance or attempts to grip the
samboist’s leg, so the samboist places his right palm on the nape of his opponent’s neck andset his left hand goes under his right arm to grip his right forearm. With a sharp turn of his bodyto the right and a large step back with his right leg, the samboist forces his opponent to rollforward and onto his back (Figure 10).
Preparation for this ploy requires bending the opponent with a grip of the same side armpit
protection when falling: the forward somersault.
Figure 10 Unbalancing by Gripping the Head
Unbalancing with the Knee
Figure 11 Unbalancing with the Knee
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides asuppression grip. With a slight turn to the left, the samboist quickly drops onto his left knee and extends right leg
the opponent's legs, so that his foot is facing his opponent's heel. Simultaneously with this, thesamboist’s right hand grips the outside of his opponent’s leg at the knee crook. His left hand leans his opponent forward asis right hand throws upward the trapped left knee to force his opponent into a forward diagonal somersault over his right
Figure 11).
Both wrestlers are in a right stance. The opponent has a low stance or attempts to grip thesamboist’s leg, so the samboist places his right palm on the nape of his opponent’s neck and
earm. With a sharp turn of his bodyto the right and a large step back with his right leg, the samboist forces his opponent to roll
Preparation for this ploy requires bending the opponent with a grip of the same side armpit
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides asuppression grip. With a slight turn to the left, the samboist quickly drops onto his left knee and extends right leg to
the opponent's legs, so that his foot is facing his opponent's heel. Simultaneously with this, thesamboist’s right hand grips the outside of his opponent’s leg at the knee crook. His left hand leans his opponent forward asis right hand throws upward the trapped left knee to force his opponent into a forward diagonal somersault over his right
The preparation for this ploy can be driving the opponent up onto his toes, forcing horganized pressure.
Self-protection is the diagonal somersault.
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stancesuppression grip while his right hand grips his opponent from over his right shoulder to grip the back of his belt. Heapplies pressure to the right, and away from him on his opponent, and then, downward forcing the opponent to crosshis right leg behind his left. As soon as this occurs, the samboist releases his suppression grip, so that his left handcan grip the inside of his opponent’s left knee crook (Figure 12). He then strongly jerks his left hand left and upwardwhile his right hand presses to the right and downward to force his opponent to fall onto his back. As soon as thesamboist is sure that his opponent is falling, he releases his right hand from the grip on his opponent’s belt.
Preparation for this throw consists of drivingopponent’s back.
Self-protection: the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s left leg to control his opponent’s fall.
Throws by Gripping Both Legs
Figure 13
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist applies suppression gripping. He then strongly pullsdownward with both hands forcing his opponent back onto his heels. The samboist then steps forwardwith his right leg as he uses both of his hands to grip the outside of his opponent’s knee crooks, so thathe can drive his right shoulder into his opponent’s stomach (Figure 13). Driving his right shoulder into hisopponent’s stomach, he forces his opponent’s ujerk his opponent’s legs upward and slightly to one side.
The preparation for this ploy can be driving the opponent up onto his toes, forcing him onto one leg, or general
protection is the diagonal somersault.
Unbalancing with a Belt Grip
Figure 12 Unbalancing with a Belt Grip
is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides asuppression grip while his right hand grips his opponent from over his right shoulder to grip the back of his belt. Heapplies pressure to the right, and away from him on his opponent, and then, downward forcing the opponent to cross
ght leg behind his left. As soon as this occurs, the samboist releases his suppression grip, so that his left handcan grip the inside of his opponent’s left knee crook (Figure 12). He then strongly jerks his left hand left and upward
d presses to the right and downward to force his opponent to fall onto his back. As soon as thesamboist is sure that his opponent is falling, he releases his right hand from the grip on his opponent’s belt.
Preparation for this throw consists of driving into the opponent to grip the same side armpit closer to the
protection: the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s left leg to control his opponent’s fall.
Throws by Gripping Both Legs
Throw Gripping Both Legs
Figure 13 Beginning of the Throw by Gripping Both Legs
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist applies suppression gripping. He then strongly pullsdownward with both hands forcing his opponent back onto his heels. The samboist then steps forward
s right leg as he uses both of his hands to grip the outside of his opponent’s knee crooks, so thathe can drive his right shoulder into his opponent’s stomach (Figure 13). Driving his right shoulder into hisopponent’s stomach, he forces his opponent’s upper body away from him as both of his hands stronglyjerk his opponent’s legs upward and slightly to one side.
im onto one leg, or general
hand provides asuppression grip while his right hand grips his opponent from over his right shoulder to grip the back of his belt. Heapplies pressure to the right, and away from him on his opponent, and then, downward forcing the opponent to cross
ght leg behind his left. As soon as this occurs, the samboist releases his suppression grip, so that his left handcan grip the inside of his opponent’s left knee crook (Figure 12). He then strongly jerks his left hand left and upward
d presses to the right and downward to force his opponent to fall onto his back. As soon as thesamboist is sure that his opponent is falling, he releases his right hand from the grip on his opponent’s belt.
into the opponent to grip the same side armpit closer to the
protection: the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s left leg to control his opponent’s fall.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist applies suppression gripping. He then strongly pullsdownward with both hands forcing his opponent back onto his heels. The samboist then steps forward
s right leg as he uses both of his hands to grip the outside of his opponent’s knee crooks, so thathe can drive his right shoulder into his opponent’s stomach (Figure 13). Driving his right shoulder into his
pper body away from him as both of his hands strongly
Figure 14 Completion of the Throw by Gripping Both Legs
As the opponent falls onto his back, the samboist moves his right leg back to thenshins under his armpits to soften his opponent’s impact with the mat (Figure 14).
Self-protection is correctly falling onto the back. If the opponent bends his legs and pulls the samboistinto him, then this situation dictates that thelegs.
The best method for preparing the opponent to apply this throw is to lighten the opponent on his feetwhile using suppression gripping that causes the opponent to circle inside and upwardattacked to the outside and downward at his knees. Toward that end, a belt grip with both hands can beused with a strong pull by both hands to force the opponent to approach the samboist, so that his legscan be gripped.
The throw by gripping both legs can be applied through various means including with a directlifting of the opponent from the matstraightens his back and lifts his opponent straight upward. After he lifts his opcan throw his opponent by pulling both of his opponent’s legs to one sideleft.
A common mistake when executing this ploy is failing to move the right leg back when theopponent falls.
Throw with a Reverse Grip
Both wrestlers are in right stances. Thesamboist applies suppression gripping. Then, his left leg takes a large stepforward to be behind his opponent, so that his right legcan move behind his opponent’s right leg,release his suppression gripping to allow his right hand to griphis opponent’s right knee from the outside while his left handmoves in front of his opponent to grip the left knee fromthe outside
The samboist sharply jerks upward aleg. As his opponent falls, the samboist moves his left leg to the left and rear.
Figure 14 Completion of the Throw by Gripping Both Legs
As the opponent falls onto his back, the samboist moves his right leg back to thenshins under his armpits to soften his opponent’s impact with the mat (Figure 14).
protection is correctly falling onto the back. If the opponent bends his legs and pulls the samboistinto him, then this situation dictates that the samboist use another variant of this throw for gripping both
ing the opponent to apply this throw is to lighten the opponent on his feetwhile using suppression gripping that causes the opponent to circle inside and upwardattacked to the outside and downward at his knees. Toward that end, a belt grip with both hands can beused with a strong pull by both hands to force the opponent to approach the samboist, so that his legs
g both legs can be applied through various means including with a directlifting of the opponent from the mat. In this case, when the samboist grips his opponent’s legs, hestraightens his back and lifts his opponent straight upward. After he lifts his opcan throw his opponent by pulling both of his opponent’s legs to one side—either the right or the
A common mistake when executing this ploy is failing to move the right leg back when the
Throw with a Reverse Grip on Both Legs
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist applies suppression gripping. Then, his left leg takes a large step, so that his right leg can move behind his opponent’s right leg,
lease his suppression gripping to allow his right hand togrip his opponent’s right knee from the outside while his left handmoves in front of his opponent to grip the left knee from the outside (Figure 15).
Figure15
The samboist sharply jerks upward and to the right with both hands to throw his opponent over the samboist’s leftleg. As his opponent falls, the samboist moves his left leg to the left and rear.
As the opponent falls onto his back, the samboist moves his right leg back to then grip the opponent’s
protection is correctly falling onto the back. If the opponent bends his legs and pulls the samboistsamboist use another variant of this throw for gripping both
ing the opponent to apply this throw is to lighten the opponent on his feetwhile using suppression gripping that causes the opponent to circle inside and upward before he isattacked to the outside and downward at his knees. Toward that end, a belt grip with both hands can beused with a strong pull by both hands to force the opponent to approach the samboist, so that his legs
g both legs can be applied through various means including with a directIn this case, when the samboist grips his opponent’s legs, he
straightens his back and lifts his opponent straight upward. After he lifts his opponent, the samboisteither the right or the
A common mistake when executing this ploy is failing to move the right leg back when the
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist applies suppression gripping. Then, his left leg takes a largestep, so that his right leg can move behindhis opponent’s right leg, and thesamboist can
lease his suppression gripping to allow his right hand togrip his opponent’s right knee from theoutside while his left hand
nd to the right with both hands to throw his opponent over the samboist’s left
To protect the falling opponent, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s legs, and tthis ploy requires the correct execution of the fall onto the back
The best posit ion to have the opponent in when applying the reverse throw by grippingboth legs is when the opponent’s legs are crossed
The best preparat ion for hisoff of the mat, or simply forcing the opponent to shift his body weight
Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stancesarm. Simultaneously with this, the left shoulder must be gripped under the armpit by the right forearm as the left armapplies a suppression grip on his opponent’s jacket between the elbow and the armpit.
In the moment when the opponentstrong grip left and downward and toward the samboist was his right hand pulls left and upwardopponent’s weight as he settles it onto his routside of his opponent’s knee crook.the samboist sharply pushes with his right arm away from him and to the right tleft leg, so that in that moment, the samboist grip the outside of his knee crook to knock him to the ground by liftupward and to the right.
If the opponent moves his left legfor gripping him, it is possible for the samboist to grip his opponent’s left knee crook with his right hand from theoutside in a reverse grip, so that the little finger over the thumb.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s collar over the rightshoulder behind his opponent’s neck as his left forearm holds the inside of his opponent’s right thigh. The samboiststeps forward on his right leg to set it between his opponent’s legs to lift him upward, and then, to shift his opponent’sbody, so that the head is facing downward before setting his opponent’s body down using a to the right, forward anddownward motion as he moves his opponent’s legsthe rear on his right leg, the samboist directs his opponent’s body into a forward somersault by pulling downward onhis opponent’s head with his right arm while keeping his opponent’s headhis opponent’s body away from him.
Safety in this ploy includes directing the opponent’s body in a smooth and slow circle forward, and the selfprotection technique for this ploy is the forward so
The most favorable position for this ploy for the opponent to be in occurs when the opponent stands erectclose to the samboist.
Preparation for this ploy consists of driving the opponent onto his toes and onto one leg.
To protect the falling opponent, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s legs, and tthis ploy requires the correct execution of the fall onto the back.
to have the opponent in when applying the reverse throw by grippingboth legs is when the opponent’s legs are crossed.
preparation for his throw is to knock into the opponent or move one of his legsoff of the mat, or simply forcing the opponent to shift his body weight .
Throw with Separate Capture of Both Legs
Both wrestlers are in right stances. Both clasp their opponent on the back with the right arm under the leftwith this, the left shoulder must be gripped under the armpit by the right forearm as the left arm
applies a suppression grip on his opponent’s jacket between the elbow and the armpit.he moment when the opponent moves onto his right leg, the samboist’s left hand provides a
strong grip left and downward and toward the samboist was his right hand pulls left and upwardas he settles it onto his right leg, it becomes possible for the samboist’s left hand to grip the
outside of his opponent’s knee crook. Then, pulling the opponent’s right leg to the left and upward with the left arm,the samboist sharply pushes with his right arm away from him and to the right to force his opponent to shift onto hisleft leg, so that in that moment, the samboist grip the outside of his knee crook to knock him to the ground by lift
If the opponent moves his left leg отставал moves his legs further back to complicate the usual methodfor gripping him, it is possible for the samboist to grip his opponent’s left knee crook with his right hand from theoutside in a reverse grip, so that the little finger over the thumb.
Over Turning the Opponent
Over Turning the Opponent
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s collar over the rightshoulder behind his opponent’s neck as his left forearm holds the inside of his opponent’s right thigh. The samboist
to set it between his opponent’s legs to lift him upward, and then, to shift his opponent’sbody, so that the head is facing downward before setting his opponent’s body down using a to the right, forward anddownward motion as he moves his opponent’s legs to the left, back, and upward (Figure 16). Taking a large step tothe rear on his right leg, the samboist directs his opponent’s body into a forward somersault by pulling downward onhis opponent’s head with his right arm while keeping his opponent’s head close to his body while his left arm driveshis opponent’s body away from him.
Figure 16
Safety in this ploy includes directing the opponent’s body in a smooth and slow circle forward, and the selfprotection technique for this ploy is the forward somersault.
The most favorable position for this ploy for the opponent to be in occurs when the opponent stands erect
Preparation for this ploy consists of driving the opponent onto his toes and onto one leg.
The Front Turnover
To protect the falling opponent, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s legs, and the self-protection for
to have the opponent in when applying the reverse throw by gripping
throw is to knock into the opponent or move one of his legs
the right arm under the leftwith this, the left shoulder must be gripped under the armpit by the right forearm as the left arm
moves onto his right leg, the samboist’s left hand provides astrong grip left and downward and toward the samboist was his right hand pulls left and upward. Using the
s possible for the samboist’s left hand to grip thepulling the opponent’s right leg to the left and upward with the left arm,
o force his opponent to shift onto hisleft leg, so that in that moment, the samboist grip the outside of his knee crook to knock him to the ground by lift
complicate the usual methodfor gripping him, it is possible for the samboist to grip his opponent’s left knee crook with his right hand from the
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s collar over the rightshoulder behind his opponent’s neck as his left forearm holds the inside of his opponent’s right thigh. The samboist
to set it between his opponent’s legs to lift him upward, and then, to shift his opponent’sbody, so that the head is facing downward before setting his opponent’s body down using a to the right, forward and
to the left, back, and upward (Figure 16). Taking a large step tothe rear on his right leg, the samboist directs his opponent’s body into a forward somersault by pulling downward on
close to his body while his left arm drives
Safety in this ploy includes directing the opponent’s body in a smooth and slow circle forward, and the self-
The most favorable position for this ploy for the opponent to be in occurs when the opponent stands erect
Preparation for this ploy consists of driving the opponent onto his toes and onto one leg.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt over hisright shoulder, and his left hand clasps his belt from the front on his stomach. The samboist sets his left leg betweenhis opponent’s legs, half sits back on both legs. He presses his opponent to him and lifts him from the mat bystraightening his body and his legs (Figure 17). Leaning his opponent’s right shoulder forward, he uses his left arm tolift his opponent’s body upward to fo
The most convenient position for applying the front turnover occurs when the opponent is at a close rangeand leaning his body.
The best preparation for this ploy is bend the opponback.
The front turnover can be applied quickly in place to lift an opponent extremely high, and the samboist cancomplete the throw by lowering his right knee and slightly turning his opponent over by
Figure 18 Turning the Opponent to Apply the Rear Turnover
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist, and his righthand grips the inside of his opponent’s same right arm. Then, both of the samboist’s hands strongly jerk theopponent’s trapped arm toward the samboist and to the right.
In the moment when his opponent begins to turn to the right side, the samboist steps,so that his left leg goes behind his opponent’s back, so that he can wrap his left arm aroundhis opponent’s body from behind at belt levelupward to grip the inside of his opponent’s right thigh allowing the samboist to apply a strong jerk to theright and upward to lift his opponent from the ground and into the air, so that the opponent’s body can beturned, so that the head is facing downward and the opponent’s legs are facing upwardmoves his left leg back, so that he can set the upper part of his opponent’s back onto the mat19).
Figure 17
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt over hisright shoulder, and his left hand clasps his belt from the front on his stomach. The samboist sets his left leg between
legs, half sits back on both legs. He presses his opponent to him and lifts him from the mat bystraightening his body and his legs (Figure 17). Leaning his opponent’s right shoulder forward, he uses his left arm tolift his opponent’s body upward to force his opponent from the mat into a somersault that lands him on his back.
The most convenient position for applying the front turnover occurs when the opponent is at a close range
The best preparation for this ploy is bend the opponent over by gripping his same side armpit close to his
The front turnover can be applied quickly in place to lift an opponent extremely high, and the samboist cancomplete the throw by lowering his right knee and slightly turning his opponent over by strongly leaning his opponent.
The Rear Turnover
Figure 18 Turning the Opponent to Apply the Rear Turnover
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist, and his rightponent’s same right arm. Then, both of the samboist’s hands strongly jerk the
opponent’s trapped arm toward the samboist and to the right.
his opponent begins to turn to the right side, the samboist steps,so that his left leg goes behind his opponent’s back, so that he can wrap his left arm aroundhis opponent’s body from behind at belt level (Figure 18). His right arm is turned, so that theupward to grip the inside of his opponent’s right thigh allowing the samboist to apply a strong jerk to theright and upward to lift his opponent from the ground and into the air, so that the opponent’s body can be
ng downward and the opponent’s legs are facing upwardmoves his left leg back, so that he can set the upper part of his opponent’s back onto the mat
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt over hisright shoulder, and his left hand clasps his belt from the front on his stomach. The samboist sets his left leg between
legs, half sits back on both legs. He presses his opponent to him and lifts him from the mat bystraightening his body and his legs (Figure 17). Leaning his opponent’s right shoulder forward, he uses his left arm to
rce his opponent from the mat into a somersault that lands him on his back.The most convenient position for applying the front turnover occurs when the opponent is at a close range
ent over by gripping his same side armpit close to his
The front turnover can be applied quickly in place to lift an opponent extremely high, and the samboist canstrongly leaning his opponent.
Figure 18 Turning the Opponent to Apply the Rear Turnover
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist, and his rightponent’s same right arm. Then, both of the samboist’s hands strongly jerk the
his opponent begins to turn to the right side, the samboist steps,so that his left leg goes behind his opponent’s back, so that he can wrap his left arm around
18). His right arm is turned, so that the palm isupward to grip the inside of his opponent’s right thigh allowing the samboist to apply a strong jerk to theright and upward to lift his opponent from the ground and into the air, so that the opponent’s body can be
ng downward and the opponent’s legs are facing upward. The samboistmoves his left leg back, so that he can set the upper part of his opponent’s back onto the mat (Figure
The best circumstances for theturnover is when the opponent attempts to apply a throw by gripping the armpit or the throwover the hip .
The preparation for applying this throw is to turn the opponent
RE AR STEPPING THROW
Re a r S t e p p
Both wrestlers are in right stancesright hand grips his opponent’s uniform at the right clavicle. The samboist steps to forward and toon his left leg to set his foot near his opponent’s right foot. The samboist’s toes are turned to the leftThen, moving his slightly bent right leg forward and to the left he places his knee crook behind hisopponent’s right leg, so that he ishis opponent’s right knee crook (Figure 20).
In the moment of execution of the stepping throw, the samboist must direct his body weightforward onto his bent left knee. He thenthrow his opponent toward his left toes. As his opponent is falling, the samboist must break his fall byretaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve (Figure 21).
Figure 19 Completing the Rear Turnover
The best circumstances for the opponent to be in for the samboist to apply the rearturnover is when the opponent attempts to apply a throw by gripping the armpit or the throw
The preparation for applying this throw is to turn the opponent.
RE AR STEPPING THROW
Re a r S t e p p i n g T h ro w u n d e r O n e L e g
Figure 20 Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand supplies a suppression grip, and hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform at the right clavicle. The samboist steps to forward and toon his left leg to set his foot near his opponent’s right foot. The samboist’s toes are turned to the leftThen, moving his slightly bent right leg forward and to the left he places his knee crook behind his
he is erect and fully standing on his feet with his right knee crook aligned withhis opponent’s right knee crook (Figure 20).
In the moment of execution of the stepping throw, the samboist must direct his body weightforward onto his bent left knee. He then strongly jerks his arms and body to the left and downward tothrow his opponent toward his left toes. As his opponent is falling, the samboist must break his fall byretaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve (Figure 21).
opponent to be in for the samboist to apply the rearturnover is when the opponent attempts to apply a throw by gripping the armpit or the throw
i n g T h r o w u n d er On e L e g
The samboist’s left hand supplies a suppression grip, and hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform at the right clavicle. The samboist steps to forward and to the righton his left leg to set his foot near his opponent’s right foot. The samboist’s toes are turned to the left.Then, moving his slightly bent right leg forward and to the left he places his knee crook behind his
erect and fully standing on his feet with his right knee crook aligned with
In the moment of execution of the stepping throw, the samboist must direct his body weightstrongly jerks his arms and body to the left and downward to
throw his opponent toward his left toes. As his opponent is falling, the samboist must break his fall by
A common mistake in executing the rear stepping throw is shifting the body weight over the rightleg, and then, bending that leg.
The best situations for executing this throw occur:
a) When the opponent bends his legs and pulls the samboist toward him;
b) When the opponent crosses his legs.
The best preparations for applying the rear stepping throw are:
a) When one or both of the opponent’s legs are free of the mat;b) When smothering the opponent;c) When cross smothering the opponent;d) When applying organized pressure one) When turning the opponent.
Stepping Throw under Both Legs
If the opponent stands in astepping throw, so that his right leg is set close to his opponent’s left Achilles’throw is applied as it was in the rear stepping throw under one leg.
Stepping Throw with the Opponent’s Lateral Motion
If the opponent moves in the rightmoves his right leg to set it by hisstep forward and left with his left leg to set his right leg to his opponent’s left leg to apply the rear steppingthrow under both of his opponent’s legs.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip as hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the right clavicle. He then steps left on his left leg to face hisopponent’s far leg and leans his body forward to drop onto his left knee. At the same time, his right legapplies the rear stepping throw under his opponent’s right leg (Figure 22). The samboist strongly jerkswith his arms and body to the left and downward to throw hiThe opponent’s fall is mitigated by the samboist retaining his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. Theopponent mitigates his own fall using the ploy for the fall onto the left side.
Stepping Throw with a Falling Motion
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underhis right elbow. His left leg takes a large step as he strongly throws his body forward and energetically
take in executing the rear stepping throw is shifting the body weight over the right
The best situations for executing this throw occur:
When the opponent bends his legs and pulls the samboist toward him;
opponent crosses his legs.
The best preparations for applying the rear stepping throw are:
When one or both of the opponent’s legs are free of the mat;When smothering the opponent;When cross smothering the opponent;When applying organized pressure on the opponent;When turning the opponent.
Stepping Throw under Both Legs
stands in a narrow right stance, the samboist should attack as above with a rearstepping throw, so that his right leg is set close to his opponent’s left Achilles’ Tendon. From there, thethrow is applied as it was in the rear stepping throw under one leg.
Stepping Throw with the Opponent’s Lateral Motion
If the opponent moves in the right side (from the samboist’s viewpoint, histo set it by his left, so that as his opponent is moving his right leg, the samboist can
step forward and left with his left leg to set his right leg to his opponent’s left leg to apply the rear steppingthrow under both of his opponent’s legs.
Stepping Throw from the Knee
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip as hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the right clavicle. He then steps left on his left leg to face his
leg and leans his body forward to drop onto his left knee. At the same time, his right legapplies the rear stepping throw under his opponent’s right leg (Figure 22). The samboist strongly jerkswith his arms and body to the left and downward to throw his opponent toward the samboist’s left knee.The opponent’s fall is mitigated by the samboist retaining his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. Theopponent mitigates his own fall using the ploy for the fall onto the left side.
Figure22RearSteppingThrowbyDroppingtoaKnee
Stepping Throw with a Falling Motion
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underhis right elbow. His left leg takes a large step as he strongly throws his body forward and energetically
take in executing the rear stepping throw is shifting the body weight over the right
When the opponent bends his legs and pulls the samboist toward him;
stance, the samboist should attack as above with a rearTendon. From there, the
Stepping Throw with the Opponent’s Lateral Motion
the samboist’s viewpoint, his left side), the samboist, so that as his opponent is moving his right leg, the samboist can
step forward and left with his left leg to set his right leg to his opponent’s left leg to apply the rear stepping
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip as hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the right clavicle. He then steps left on his left leg to face his
leg and leans his body forward to drop onto his left knee. At the same time, his right legapplies the rear stepping throw under his opponent’s right leg (Figure 22). The samboist strongly jerks
s opponent toward the samboist’s left knee.The opponent’s fall is mitigated by the samboist retaining his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. The
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underhis right elbow. His left leg takes a large step as he strongly throws his body forward and energetically
applies the rear stepping throw with his right leg udirectly forward. As he does so, his right arm shifts over the shoulder portion of his opponent’s right armas he mitigates the fall by placing his right palm on the mat in front of him and to the left.
Self protection and fall mitigation includes the opportunities to sit close to the samboist’s heelswhile strongly curving the back, so that the opponent and samboist roll smoothly.
Stepping Throw with a Leg Gripped from the Outside
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s sleeve underthe left elbow, and his left hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. He then strongly jerks hisopponent to force him to shift his weight over his right leg.
To prevent his legs from being drawn together and to prevent losing his balance, the opponent is forced toslightly lift his left leg from the ground.outside of his opponent’s left knee crookthrow with his left leg under his opponent’s right leg to throw his opponent to the ground close to the samboist’s toeson his right foot (Figure 23).
When applying this ploy, the partner’s fall is mitigated by the samboist’s left hand keeping hold of his grip onhis opponent’s chest while his right hand holds his opponent’s left leg. The opponent protects himself by using thefall onto the back ploy.
Stepping Throw with the C
Both wrestlers are in right stancesinstitution. In the moment when the opponent’s left leg crosses behind his right leg, the samboist’s righthand grips the inside of his oppoapplies the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s left leg, so that his Achilles’ tendon is close tohis opponent’s Achilles’ tendon (Figure 24). When usipreserving his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve as he releases his grip on his opponent’s leg.
Stepping Throw at the Heel with the Arm Gripped over the BackBoth wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips the opponent’s jacket on the right forearm.
applies the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg as the samboist fallsdirectly forward. As he does so, his right arm shifts over the shoulder portion of his opponent’s right armas he mitigates the fall by placing his right palm on the mat in front of him and to the left.
Self protection and fall mitigation includes the opportunities to sit close to the samboist’s heelswhile strongly curving the back, so that the opponent and samboist roll smoothly.
Stepping Throw with a Leg Gripped from the Outside
right stance. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s sleeve underthe left elbow, and his left hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. He then strongly jerks hisopponent to force him to shift his weight over his right leg.
legs from being drawn together and to prevent losing his balance, the opponent is forced to. The samboist exploits this moment to allow his right hand to grip the
outside of his opponent’s left knee crook. Turning his body to the right, the samboist applies the rear steppingthrow with his left leg under his opponent’s right leg to throw his opponent to the ground close to the samboist’s toes
Figure 23
the partner’s fall is mitigated by the samboist’s left hand keeping hold of his grip onhis opponent’s chest while his right hand holds his opponent’s left leg. The opponent protects himself by using the
Stepping Throw with the Cross Leg Gripped
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist applies suppression gripping and applies a cross. In the moment when the opponent’s left leg crosses behind his right leg, the samboist’s right
hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook to lift the trapped leg toward his right hipapplies the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s left leg, so that his Achilles’ tendon is close tohis opponent’s Achilles’ tendon (Figure 24). When using this ploy, the samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall bypreserving his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve as he releases his grip on his opponent’s leg.
Figure 24
Stepping Throw at the Heel with the Arm Gripped over the BackBoth wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips the opponent’s jacket on the right forearm.
nder his opponent’s right leg as the samboist fallsdirectly forward. As he does so, his right arm shifts over the shoulder portion of his opponent’s right armas he mitigates the fall by placing his right palm on the mat in front of him and to the left.
Self protection and fall mitigation includes the opportunities to sit close to the samboist’s heels
Stepping Throw with a Leg Gripped from the Outside
right stance. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s sleeve underthe left elbow, and his left hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. He then strongly jerks his
legs from being drawn together and to prevent losing his balance, the opponent is forced toThe samboist exploits this moment to allow his right hand to grip the
g his body to the right, the samboist applies the rear steppingthrow with his left leg under his opponent’s right leg to throw his opponent to the ground close to the samboist’s toes
the partner’s fall is mitigated by the samboist’s left hand keeping hold of his grip onhis opponent’s chest while his right hand holds his opponent’s left leg. The opponent protects himself by using the
ross Leg Gripped
The samboist applies suppression gripping and applies a cross. In the moment when the opponent’s left leg crosses behind his right leg, the samboist’s right
nent’s right knee crook to lift the trapped leg toward his right hip. He thenapplies the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s left leg, so that his Achilles’ tendon is close to
ng this ploy, the samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall bypreserving his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve as he releases his grip on his opponent’s leg.
Stepping Throw at the Heel with the Arm Gripped over the BackBoth wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips the opponent’s jacket on the right forearm.
The samboist clamps his opponent’s right arm under his right armpit, and he turns sideways to his opponent, so thathis right leg is beside and behind his opponent’s right leg, and as he pivots to the left, he sets his left foot behind andvery close to his opponent’s heel. His right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the right forearm to pull hisopponent close into his back. The samboist pr(Figure 25). The samboist strongly bends his right leg to sit down onto his left buttock as close as possible to hisopponent’s right heel as he also turns his body to the left forc
Mitigating the fall involves smoothly rolling over a well bent back.
Stepping Throw at the Heel with an Arm over the Neck
The same throw as the previous throw except that the opponent’the armpit but by the right forearm.not press his opponent’s right arm into his back but into his neck
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand applies suppressiongripping while his right hand moves under the opponent’s left arm to griparmpit. Pivoting his body left, the samboist arcs his left leg to the rear and right to set his toes closeto the toes of his opponent’s left foot, so that both of them are facing in the same direction
He then swings his right leg left andthat the samboist’s right knee crook is braced against his opponent’s right knee, and the samboist’s toeson his right foot facing the same direction
The samboist’s body weight must be shifted over his bent left knee while his right leg is fullystraightened as the samboist stands on the matthe left and downward, the samboist throws his opponent to land close to the samboifoot.
The samboist must mitigate his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s
The samboist clamps his opponent’s right arm under his right armpit, and he turns sideways to his opponent, so thatbehind his opponent’s right leg, and as he pivots to the left, he sets his left foot behind and
very close to his opponent’s heel. His right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the right forearm to pull hisopponent close into his back. The samboist presses his left arm into his opponent’s chest forcing his body to the rear(Figure 25). The samboist strongly bends his right leg to sit down onto his left buttock as close as possible to hisopponent’s right heel as he also turns his body to the left forcing his opponent to roll over his back and onto the mat.
Mitigating the fall involves smoothly rolling over a well bent back.
Figure 25
Stepping Throw at the Heel with an Arm over the Neck
as the previous throw except that the opponent’s right arm must be gripped not underthe armpit but by the right forearm. Thus, after turning and setting the stepping throw, the samboistnot press his opponent’s right arm into his back but into his neck.
Front Stepping Throws
Front Stepping Throw
Figure 26 Front Stepping Throw
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand applies suppressiongripping while his right hand moves under the opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his opponent’s
Pivoting his body left, the samboist arcs his left leg to the rear and right to set his toes closeto the toes of his opponent’s left foot, so that both of them are facing in the same direction
He then swings his right leg left and upward and exploits this motion to set the front stepping throw, sothat the samboist’s right knee crook is braced against his opponent’s right knee, and the samboist’s toeson his right foot facing the same direction (Figure 26).
weight must be shifted over his bent left knee while his right leg is fullystraightened as the samboist stands on the mat. By turning his body and jerking with his arms tothe left and downward, the samboist throws his opponent to land close to the samboi
The samboist must mitigate his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s
The samboist clamps his opponent’s right arm under his right armpit, and he turns sideways to his opponent, so thatbehind his opponent’s right leg, and as he pivots to the left, he sets his left foot behind and
very close to his opponent’s heel. His right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the right forearm to pull hisesses his left arm into his opponent’s chest forcing his body to the rear
(Figure 25). The samboist strongly bends his right leg to sit down onto his left buttock as close as possible to hising his opponent to roll over his back and onto the mat.
Stepping Throw at the Heel with an Arm over the Neck
s right arm must be gripped not undering and setting the stepping throw, the samboist does
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand applies suppressionhe back of his opponent’s jacket near the
Pivoting his body left, the samboist arcs his left leg to the rear and right to set his toes closeto the toes of his opponent’s left foot, so that both of them are facing in the same direction.
upward and exploits this motion to set the front stepping throw, sothat the samboist’s right knee crook is braced against his opponent’s right knee, and the samboist’s toes
weight must be shifted over his bent left knee while his right leg is fullyBy turning his body and jerking with his arms to
the left and downward, the samboist throws his opponent to land close to the samboist’s left
The samboist must mitigate his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s
right sleeve. The common mistake in setting the front stepping throw is notthe opponent’s leg but beside the leg. Mitigating the fall is the same as performing the somersault overthe stick to land on the left side.
When the opponent attempts a front stepping throw, he may not apply a right hand grip on the backof the belt. In this case, it is better for thleft elbow, so that the palm of the samboist’s right hand is facing straight upward and his thumb is not somuch forward as it is facing right and upward
I f t he o p po ne n t le an s h is bod ya con ven ie n t s i t ua t i on fo r a pp ly in g the f ro n t s te pp in g t h ro w.
B as ic p rep a ra t i on fo r app l y in g th e f ron t s tepp in g th row has th ree me th od s :
a) Instituting the opponent where the ploy is applied under thefoot contacts the mat or under the leg as the foot turns on the mat
b) Driving the opponent onto one leg;c) Driving the opponent onto his toes.
Both wrestlers are in right stanceknee against his opponent’s left foot, and he sets his right leg for the front stepping throw, so that his rightcalf is braced into his opponent’s rightstepping throw from the knee is the same as for applying the front stepping throw
Stepping Throw with the Elbow Crook Gripping
The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip, and his rightleft shoulder close to his armpit.opponent to the right and away from him so that he is in position to apply the front steppingthrow under his opponent’s rightto throw his opponent down by the toes of his left foothis left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. His opponent protecdo in any front stepping throw.
Stepping Throw with the Knee to a Knee
Both wrestlers are in right stancehand moves under his opponent’sand inside of his opponent’s right foot, and his right knee into the outer part of his opponent’s right knee.
By turning his body left 90o
he is able to move his left leg in an arc to the rear and left to set its kneeonto the mat. Jerking his hands and body to the rear and turning left, he rolls his opponent over hisright knee. The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall by retaining hisright sleeve. His opponent protects himself as he did when performing a somersault over a stick to
right sleeve. The common mistake in setting the front stepping throw is not setting the right foot in front ofhe leg. Mitigating the fall is the same as performing the somersault over
When the opponent attempts a front stepping throw, he may not apply a right hand grip on the backof the belt. In this case, it is better for the samboist’s right hand to grip the opponent’s jacket under theleft elbow, so that the palm of the samboist’s right hand is facing straight upward and his thumb is not somuch forward as it is facing right and upward.
I f t he o ppo ne nt le an s h is bod y f o rw ard a nd s h i f t s h is bod y we ig h t o v e r h i s toes , th is isa con ven ien t s i t ua t io n fo r ap p ly in g t he f ro n t s tep p in g t h ro w.
Ba s ic p rep a ra t i on fo r app l y in g th e f r on t s tepp in g th ro w has th ree me th od s:
Instituting the opponent where the ploy is applied under the leg in the moment when itsfoot contacts the mat or under the leg as the foot turns on the mat;
Driving the opponent onto one leg;Driving the opponent onto his toes.
Front Stepping Throw from the Knee
Figure 27 Front Stepping Throw from a Knee
Both wrestlers are in right stance. By turning his body to the left, the samboistknee against his opponent’s left foot, and he sets his right leg for the front stepping throw, so that his rightcalf is braced into his opponent’s right shin (Figure 27). The set up and preparation for the frontstepping throw from the knee is the same as for applying the front stepping throw
Stepping Throw with the Elbow Crook Gripping
The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip, and his right elbow crook grips his opponent’s. By jerking with his hands and body, the samboist forces his
opponent to the right and away from him so that he is in position to apply the front steppingthrow under his opponent’s right leg. He subsequently jerks his body and arms to the left and downwardto throw his opponent down by the toes of his left foot. He reduces the impact of his opponent’s fall by retaininghis left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. His opponent protects himself in the fall as he normally would
Stepping Throw with the Knee to a Knee
Both wrestlers are in right stance' The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip while his righthand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip his uniform on the back. His right foot it set close toand inside of his opponent’s right foot, and his right knee into the outer part of his opponent’s right knee.
he is able to move his left leg in an arc to the rear and left to set its kneeonto the mat. Jerking his hands and body to the rear and turning left, he rolls his opponent over hisright knee. The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’sright sleeve. His opponent protects himself as he did when performing a somersault over a stick to
setting the right foot in front ofhe leg. Mitigating the fall is the same as performing the somersault over
When the opponent attempts a front stepping throw, he may not apply a right hand grip on the backe samboist’s right hand to grip the opponent’s jacket under the
left elbow, so that the palm of the samboist’s right hand is facing straight upward and his thumb is not so
f o rw ard a nd s h i f t s h i s bo d y w e igh t o v e r h is to es , th i s is
Ba s ic p rep a ra t i on fo r app l y in g the f ro n t s tepp in g t h ro w h as t h ree metho ds :
leg in the moment when its
Front Stepping Throw from the Knee
Figure 27 Front Stepping Throw from a Knee
By turning his body to the left, the samboist drops onto his leftknee against his opponent’s left foot, and he sets his right leg for the front stepping throw, so that his right
The set up and preparation for the frontstepping throw from the knee is the same as for applying the front stepping throw.
Stepping Throw with the Elbow Crook Gripping
elbow crook grips his opponent’sBy jerking with his hands and body, the samboist forces his
opponent to the right and away from him so that he is in position to apply the front steppingHe subsequently jerks his body and arms to the left and downward
He reduces the impact of his opponent’s fall by retainingts himself in the fall as he normally would
The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip while his rightleft arm to grip his uniform on the back. His right foot it set close to
and inside of his opponent’s right foot, and his right knee into the outer part of his opponent’s right knee.he is able to move his left leg in an arc to the rear and left to set its knee
onto the mat. Jerking his hands and body to the rear and turning left, he rolls his opponent over hisleft hand grip on his opponent’s
right sleeve. His opponent protects himself as he did when performing a somersault over a stick to
land on his left side.
Stepping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
The opponent is in a left stance while thehis opponent under his right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. Bysharply jerking his opponent, the samboist forces him to shift his body weight behind his rigprevent bending his leg or losing his balance, the opponent responds by slightly moving his left leg.The samboist exploits this motion by using his right hand to grip his opponent’s left knee crook from theoutside to lift the trapped leg assamboist executes a front stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg. Whenapplying this ploy, the toes of the samboist’s right foot must face in the same directioopponent’s right toes (Figure 28). As soon as the samboist realizes that his opponent is falling, hisright hand releases its grip on his opponent’s trapped leg. The opponent protects himself from the fallas he did when somersaulting over the s
Stepping Throw at the Heel with a Lifting Shin
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides suppression gripping, and hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform under histraightened right leg outside of his opponent’s right heel, so that the lower third of his right shin ispressed against his opponent’s right shin. His straightened left leg is on the outer edge of hsuppress his opponent’s motion by moving as deeply between his opponent’s legs as possible (Figure29).
The samboist falls onto his left side as he pulls strongly with his arms to the left and downward andinto him as his right shin drives hissamboist in a diagonal somersault that carries him over to his back over his right shoulder andeventually onto his left buttock.
Stepping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent under his right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. Bysharply jerking his opponent, the samboist forces him to shift his body weight behind his rigprevent bending his leg or losing his balance, the opponent responds by slightly moving his left leg.The samboist exploits this motion by using his right hand to grip his opponent’s left knee crook from theoutside to lift the trapped leg as high as possible toward his hip, and without stopping this motion thesamboist executes a front stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg. Whenapplying this ploy, the toes of the samboist’s right foot must face in the same directioopponent’s right toes (Figure 28). As soon as the samboist realizes that his opponent is falling, hisright hand releases its grip on his opponent’s trapped leg. The opponent protects himself from the fallas he did when somersaulting over the stick to land on his left side.
Figure 28
Figure 29
Stepping Throw at the Heel with a Lifting Shin
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides suppression gripping, and hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform under his opponent’s right armpit. The samboist then sets hisstraightened right leg outside of his opponent’s right heel, so that the lower third of his right shin ispressed against his opponent’s right shin. His straightened left leg is on the outer edge of hsuppress his opponent’s motion by moving as deeply between his opponent’s legs as possible (Figure
The samboist falls onto his left side as he pulls strongly with his arms to the left and downward andinto him as his right shin drives his opponent’s right shin upward to force his opponent to fall over thesamboist in a diagonal somersault that carries him over to his back over his right shoulder and
Lateral Stepping ThrowsThe Lateral Stepping Throw
Stepping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent under his right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. Bysharply jerking his opponent, the samboist forces him to shift his body weight behind his right leg. Toprevent bending his leg or losing his balance, the opponent responds by slightly moving his left leg.The samboist exploits this motion by using his right hand to grip his opponent’s left knee crook from the
high as possible toward his hip, and without stopping this motion thesamboist executes a front stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg. Whenapplying this ploy, the toes of the samboist’s right foot must face in the same direction as hisopponent’s right toes (Figure 28). As soon as the samboist realizes that his opponent is falling, hisright hand releases its grip on his opponent’s trapped leg. The opponent protects himself from the fall
Stepping Throw at the Heel with a Lifting Shin
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides suppression gripping, and hiss opponent’s right armpit. The samboist then sets his
straightened right leg outside of his opponent’s right heel, so that the lower third of his right shin ispressed against his opponent’s right shin. His straightened left leg is on the outer edge of his base tosuppress his opponent’s motion by moving as deeply between his opponent’s legs as possible (Figure
The samboist falls onto his left side as he pulls strongly with his arms to the left and downward andopponent’s right shin upward to force his opponent to fall over the
samboist in a diagonal somersault that carries him over to his back over his right shoulder and
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand provides suppression gripping whilehis right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Taking smaller steps to the left and back, thesamboist squats and sharply jerks his body and arms tContinuing to pull with left hand toward him as well as to left and downward, the samboist sits downonto his left buttock while driving his left leg forward, so that he can set his heel to permit his left shinpresses against his opponent’s right shin or calf (Figure 30). His right leg can assist up lifting upwardon his opponent’s left leg to augment the effectiveness of the ploy. As his opponent falls, thesamboist’s left hand and arm draw his opponent’s right adraws in and rotates his opponent’s body so that his opponent is forced into a diagonal somersault overhis right shoulder to land on his left buttock.
The self-protection for this ploy is the diagonal somapplying the lateral stepping throw is sitting down onto the mat without actually unbalancing theopponent.
It is easiest to apply the lateral stepping throw when the opponent:
a) Stands to the side of the samboib) Stands in a narrow stance.c) Stands with his legs crossing.
Stepping Throw at the Hip or Thigh
This ploy is applied the same as the lateral stepping throw except that the samboist’s left legmust be pressed close to the outside of the opponent’s right
The opponent is in a left stance and the samboist in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of his upper arms.
The samboist takes several smaller steps forward ontwisting motion. As he does so, he hooks his right knee crook around his opponent’s left knee crookfrom the inside.
Lifting his opponent’s hooked left leg upward and toward the samboist and somewhat to theright, the samboist sharply straightens his left leg as he strongly pushes his opponent away anddownward with his arms (Figure
Safety in the inside hooking thronot to strike his opponent’s groin, and if the samboist falls, to not land on his opponent. Theopponent’s self-protection is the half
The best situations for the
a) Instituting the opponent (see Figure 31);b) Organized pressure on the opponent;
Figure 30
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand provides suppression gripping whilehis right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Taking smaller steps to the left and back, thesamboist squats and sharply jerks his body and arms to move his opponent onto his right leg.Continuing to pull with left hand toward him as well as to left and downward, the samboist sits downonto his left buttock while driving his left leg forward, so that he can set his heel to permit his left shin
ses against his opponent’s right shin or calf (Figure 30). His right leg can assist up lifting upwardon his opponent’s left leg to augment the effectiveness of the ploy. As his opponent falls, thesamboist’s left hand and arm draw his opponent’s right arm as closely as possible to him, which in turn,draws in and rotates his opponent’s body so that his opponent is forced into a diagonal somersault overhis right shoulder to land on his left buttock.
protection for this ploy is the diagonal somersault onto the back. The common mistake inapplying the lateral stepping throw is sitting down onto the mat without actually unbalancing the
It is easiest to apply the lateral stepping throw when the opponent:
Stands to the side of the samboist.Stands in a narrow stance.Stands with his legs crossing.
Stepping Throw at the Hip or Thigh
This ploy is applied the same as the lateral stepping throw except that the samboist’s left legmust be pressed close to the outside of the opponent’s right leg.
Inside Hooking Throws
The Inside Hooking Throw
The opponent is in a left stance and the samboist in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of his upper arms.
The samboist takes several smaller steps forward on his left foot and slightly sits with a slighttwisting motion. As he does so, he hooks his right knee crook around his opponent’s left knee crook
Lifting his opponent’s hooked left leg upward and toward the samboist and somewhat to theright, the samboist sharply straightens his left leg as he strongly pushes his opponent away and
ure З1).Safety in the inside hooking throw includes when entering the hook that the samboist take care
not to strike his opponent’s groin, and if the samboist falls, to not land on his opponent. Theprotection is the half-somersault fall onto the back.
The best situations for the opponent to be in for applying the inside hooking throw are:
Instituting the opponent (see Figure 31);Organized pressure on the opponent;
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand provides suppression gripping whilehis right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Taking smaller steps to the left and back, the
o move his opponent onto his right leg.Continuing to pull with left hand toward him as well as to left and downward, the samboist sits downonto his left buttock while driving his left leg forward, so that he can set his heel to permit his left shin
ses against his opponent’s right shin or calf (Figure 30). His right leg can assist up lifting upwardon his opponent’s left leg to augment the effectiveness of the ploy. As his opponent falls, the
rm as closely as possible to him, which in turn,draws in and rotates his opponent’s body so that his opponent is forced into a diagonal somersault over
ersault onto the back. The common mistake inapplying the lateral stepping throw is sitting down onto the mat without actually unbalancing the
This ploy is applied the same as the lateral stepping throw except that the samboist’s left leg
The opponent is in a left stance and the samboist in right stance. The samboist grips his
his left foot and slightly sits with a slighttwisting motion. As he does so, he hooks his right knee crook around his opponent’s left knee crook
Lifting his opponent’s hooked left leg upward and toward the samboist and somewhat to theright, the samboist sharply straightens his left leg as he strongly pushes his opponent away and
w includes when entering the hook that the samboist take carenot to strike his opponent’s groin, and if the samboist falls, to not land on his opponent. The
opponent to be in for applying the inside hooking throw are:
c) Freeing the opponent from the mat.
The samboist’s right leg hooks his opponent’s left leg as he did above. Then, the samboist liftshis right leg high and upward while his right arm jerks to the left and upward and his left arm pullstoward him and left and downward. The opponent will fall beside the s
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve. The opponent’s self-protection requires using the fall onto the left side.
Inside Hooking Throw Prepared by Instituting
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform on theshoulders at the upper part of his arms. The samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis right leg as his right arm draws his opponent’s left arm toward the ssamboist takes a diagonal step forward on his left leg. Without giving his opponent an opportunity toset his left foot onto the mat, the samboist lifts the hooked leg inward and upward with his right leg, andwithout stopping the motion, turns 180hands to the right and downward. The opponent must be thrown to the mat in the direction directlyopposite counter to his initial position.
Safety and self-protectionthrow prepared by institution also can be set up with a grip by the left hand to the opponent’s rightarmpit and with the right hand gripping the back of the uniform from under the opponent’
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist’s lefthand provides a suppression grip as his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm tthe back of his uniform. The samboist steps slightly forward on his left leg before he slightly sits. Theupper part of his right shin and calf (closer to his knee crook) hooks his opponent’s left knee crook fromthe inside as the samboist entwines (grape vines) with his shin from behind, so that he can hook his
Freeing the opponent from the mat.
Figure 31 Inside Hooking Throw
Twisting Inside Hooking Throw
right leg hooks his opponent’s left leg as he did above. Then, the samboist liftshis right leg high and upward while his right arm jerks to the left and upward and his left arm pullstoward him and left and downward. The opponent will fall beside the samboist’s left leg.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightprotection requires using the fall onto the left side.
Inside Hooking Throw Prepared by Instituting
tlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform on theshoulders at the upper part of his arms. The samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis right leg as his right arm draws his opponent’s left arm toward the samboist and upward as thesamboist takes a diagonal step forward on his left leg. Without giving his opponent an opportunity toset his left foot onto the mat, the samboist lifts the hooked leg inward and upward with his right leg, and
e motion, turns 1800 to the right. As he turns, the samboist applies a strong jerk withhands to the right and downward. The opponent must be thrown to the mat in the direction directlyopposite counter to his initial position.
protection are the same as in the inside hooking throw. The inside hookingthrow prepared by institution also can be set up with a grip by the left hand to the opponent’s rightarmpit and with the right hand gripping the back of the uniform from under the opponent’
Inside Entwining Throw
Figure 32 Inside Entwining Throw
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist’s lefthand provides a suppression grip as his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm tthe back of his uniform. The samboist steps slightly forward on his left leg before he slightly sits. Theupper part of his right shin and calf (closer to his knee crook) hooks his opponent’s left knee crook from
entwines (grape vines) with his shin from behind, so that he can hook his
right leg hooks his opponent’s left leg as he did above. Then, the samboist liftshis right leg high and upward while his right arm jerks to the left and upward and his left arm pulls
amboist’s left leg.To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his left hand grip on his opponent’s right
Inside Hooking Throw Prepared by Instituting
tlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform on theshoulders at the upper part of his arms. The samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight over
amboist and upward as thesamboist takes a diagonal step forward on his left leg. Without giving his opponent an opportunity toset his left foot onto the mat, the samboist lifts the hooked leg inward and upward with his right leg, and
to the right. As he turns, the samboist applies a strong jerk withhands to the right and downward. The opponent must be thrown to the mat in the direction directly
are the same as in the inside hooking throw. The inside hookingthrow prepared by institution also can be set up with a grip by the left hand to the opponent’s rightarmpit and with the right hand gripping the back of the uniform from under the opponent’s left arm.
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist’s lefthand provides a suppression grip as his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip him onthe back of his uniform. The samboist steps slightly forward on his left leg before he slightly sits. Theupper part of his right shin and calf (closer to his knee crook) hooks his opponent’s left knee crook from
entwines (grape vines) with his shin from behind, so that he can hook his
foot on the outer part his opponent’s same shin (Figure 32). He applies a strong motion with his rightleg and turns his body to the right to lift his opponent’s hooked left leg andopponent in place and onto his back to land by the samboist’s right foot.
Safety measures include not falling onto the opponent. The opponent will protect himself fromthe fall using the half somersault for landing on his ba
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand applies a suppression grip as hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform on his chest. The samboist then steps forward on his leftand slightly to the left. The upper part of his right shin hooks his opponent’s right knee crook before thesamboist applies a strong motion to lift his opponent from the ground. The samboist jerks his arms andbody to the left and downward to throwsamboist’s right leg.
Safety measures include the samboist retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve. The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling
The best situations for applying the outside hooking throw on the opponent occur when theopponent:
a) Stands to one side of the samboist;b) Has one leg farther forward than the other;c) Bends his legs and pulls the samboist forward.
The best preparations for this ploy are those ploys to lift the opponent from the mat or lessenhis body weight on the mat.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip whilehis right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. The samboist’s right leg steps left, so that hisright toes are outside of the toes of his opponent’s right foot. The samboist’s left shin and calf hook hisopponent’s right knee crook. Then, the samboist sharplyleft to throw his opponent onto his back. In applying the jerking motion, the samboist must fall forwardin place with his opponent, but he knows for sure that his opponent is falling, the samboist stops his fato remain standing while his opponent continues falling.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. Toprotect himself, the opponent uses the ploy for falling onto his back using the half somersault
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Then, the samboistforces his opponent to shift his body weight onto his r
foot on the outer part his opponent’s same shin (Figure 32). He applies a strong motion with his rightleg and turns his body to the right to lift his opponent’s hooked left leg and with this effort to throw hisopponent in place and onto his back to land by the samboist’s right foot.
Safety measures include not falling onto the opponent. The opponent will protect himself fromthe fall using the half somersault for landing on his back.
Outside Hooking Throws
The Outside Hooking Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand applies a suppression grip as hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform on his chest. The samboist then steps forward on his leftand slightly to the left. The upper part of his right shin hooks his opponent’s right knee crook before thesamboist applies a strong motion to lift his opponent from the ground. The samboist jerks his arms andbody to the left and downward to throw his opponent onto his back in place, so that he lands by the
Safety measures include the samboist retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve. The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto his left side.
The best situations for applying the outside hooking throw on the opponent occur when the
Stands to one side of the samboist;Has one leg farther forward than the other;Bends his legs and pulls the samboist forward.
t preparations for this ploy are those ploys to lift the opponent from the mat or lessen
Opposite Side Leg Hook
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip whileps his opponent’s uniform on the chest. The samboist’s right leg steps left, so that his
right toes are outside of the toes of his opponent’s right foot. The samboist’s left shin and calf hook hisopponent’s right knee crook. Then, the samboist sharply jerks his body and arms forward and slightlyleft to throw his opponent onto his back. In applying the jerking motion, the samboist must fall forwardin place with his opponent, but he knows for sure that his opponent is falling, the samboist stops his fato remain standing while his opponent continues falling.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. Toprotect himself, the opponent uses the ploy for falling onto his back using the half somersault
Sitting Hook with a Lifting Foot
Figure 33
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Then, the samboistforces his opponent to shift his body weight onto his right leg, so that the samboist can sit down onto
foot on the outer part his opponent’s same shin (Figure 32). He applies a strong motion with his rightwith this effort to throw his
Safety measures include not falling onto the opponent. The opponent will protect himself from
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand applies a suppression grip as hisright hand grips his opponent’s uniform on his chest. The samboist then steps forward on his left legand slightly to the left. The upper part of his right shin hooks his opponent’s right knee crook before thesamboist applies a strong motion to lift his opponent from the ground. The samboist jerks his arms and
his opponent onto his back in place, so that he lands by the
Safety measures include the samboist retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightonto his left side.
The best situations for applying the outside hooking throw on the opponent occur when the
t preparations for this ploy are those ploys to lift the opponent from the mat or lessen
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand provides a suppression grip whileps his opponent’s uniform on the chest. The samboist’s right leg steps left, so that his
right toes are outside of the toes of his opponent’s right foot. The samboist’s left shin and calf hook hisjerks his body and arms forward and slightly
left to throw his opponent onto his back. In applying the jerking motion, the samboist must fall forwardin place with his opponent, but he knows for sure that his opponent is falling, the samboist stops his fall
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. Toprotect himself, the opponent uses the ploy for falling onto his back using the half somersault.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Then, the samboist
ight leg, so that the samboist can sit down onto
his left buttock, so that his left knee crook is wrapped around the lower part of his opponent’s right shinand calf area. The samboist turns his body to the left and strongly jerks with his left arm to thedownward while his right arm jerks to the left and upward to force his opponent to lean to the left andaway from the samboist. Exploiting the opponent’s position, the samboist lifts upward with his left legthat is precisely placed with its kne
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist ensures that his opponent smoothly somersaultsdiagonally on to the mat without his shoulder first contacting the ground. To protect himself, theopponent executes a diagonal somersault onto his back over his right shoulder to land on his leftbuttock.
The opponent is in right stance while the samboist is in left stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulders. He applies a strong jerk with his hands in the direction of hisopponent’s left heel, and as soon as his opponent shifts hisuses the toes of his left foot to hook behind the Achilles tendons on his opponent’s right leg (Figure 34).
Using a strong motion with his left leg, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right leg toand to the right, and as he does so, his arms and body jerk to the left and downward. As the opponentfalls, the samboist bends his left knee and sets the leg to the left and rear.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his grip onThe opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto the left side. If the opponentdefends his right leg from the samboist’s left leg by moving it further away, it will be difficult to executethe ploy, but the samboist can turn his right heel outward (closer to the opponent) to perhaps close thedistance.
The best position for applying the foot hook occurs when the opponent has one leg furtherahead of his other leg.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under his elbows.The samboist then jerks his arms in the direction of his left foot, so that his opponent is compelled toshift his body weight over his left lesweep laterally into his opponent’s right foot (Figure 35). His left leg thus lifts his opponent’s right footto the right and upward, and as the samboist jerks his hands to the left abegins to fall. When he is certain that his opponent is falling, the samboist bends his left knee andmoves his leg to the left and back to maintain his own stability.
his left buttock, so that his left knee crook is wrapped around the lower part of his opponent’s right shinand calf area. The samboist turns his body to the left and strongly jerks with his left arm to thedownward while his right arm jerks to the left and upward to force his opponent to lean to the left andaway from the samboist. Exploiting the opponent’s position, the samboist lifts upward with his left legthat is precisely placed with its knee crook on his opponent’s right foot (Figure 33).
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist ensures that his opponent smoothly somersaultsdiagonally on to the mat without his shoulder first contacting the ground. To protect himself, the
utes a diagonal somersault onto his back over his right shoulder to land on his left
Foot Hook
The opponent is in right stance while the samboist is in left stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulders. He applies a strong jerk with his hands in the direction of hisopponent’s left heel, and as soon as his opponent shifts his body weight over his left leg, the samboistsuses the toes of his left foot to hook behind the Achilles tendons on his opponent’s right leg (Figure 34).
Figure 34
Using a strong motion with his left leg, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right leg toand to the right, and as he does so, his arms and body jerk to the left and downward. As the opponentfalls, the samboist bends his left knee and sets the leg to the left and rear.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve.The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto the left side. If the opponentdefends his right leg from the samboist’s left leg by moving it further away, it will be difficult to execute
y, but the samboist can turn his right heel outward (closer to the opponent) to perhaps close the
The best position for applying the foot hook occurs when the opponent has one leg further
Lateral SweepsThe Lateral Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under his elbows.The samboist then jerks his arms in the direction of his left foot, so that his opponent is compelled toshift his body weight over his left leg. The samboist then applies the toe portion of his left foot sole tosweep laterally into his opponent’s right foot (Figure 35). His left leg thus lifts his opponent’s right footto the right and upward, and as the samboist jerks his hands to the left and downward, his opponentbegins to fall. When he is certain that his opponent is falling, the samboist bends his left knee andmoves his leg to the left and back to maintain his own stability.
his left buttock, so that his left knee crook is wrapped around the lower part of his opponent’s right shinand calf area. The samboist turns his body to the left and strongly jerks with his left arm to the left anddownward while his right arm jerks to the left and upward to force his opponent to lean to the left andaway from the samboist. Exploiting the opponent’s position, the samboist lifts upward with his left leg
e crook on his opponent’s right foot (Figure 33).To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist ensures that his opponent smoothly somersaults
diagonally on to the mat without his shoulder first contacting the ground. To protect himself, theutes a diagonal somersault onto his back over his right shoulder to land on his left
The opponent is in right stance while the samboist is in left stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulders. He applies a strong jerk with his hands in the direction of his
body weight over his left leg, the samboistsuses the toes of his left foot to hook behind the Achilles tendons on his opponent’s right leg (Figure 34).
Using a strong motion with his left leg, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right leg toward himand to the right, and as he does so, his arms and body jerk to the left and downward. As the opponent
his opponent’s right sleeve.The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto the left side. If the opponentdefends his right leg from the samboist’s left leg by moving it further away, it will be difficult to execute
y, but the samboist can turn his right heel outward (closer to the opponent) to perhaps close the
The best position for applying the foot hook occurs when the opponent has one leg further
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under his elbows.The samboist then jerks his arms in the direction of his left foot, so that his opponent is compelled to
g. The samboist then applies the toe portion of his left foot sole tosweep laterally into his opponent’s right foot (Figure 35). His left leg thus lifts his opponent’s right foot
nd downward, his opponentbegins to fall. When he is certain that his opponent is falling, the samboist bends his left knee and
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall bysleeve. The opponent protects himself from the fall by using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
The common mistake in executing the lateral sweeping throw comes from sweeping into theopponent’s leg with the wrong part of the foot.
The best situations for applying the lateral sweeping throw occur when the opponent:
a) Has one foot ahead of the other;b) Crosses his feet;c) Steps heavily or hops;d) Drops to one knee while gripping the samboist.
The best means for preparing the opponent to be thrown with the lateral sweep are:a) Cross body institution;b) Driving him to one side of his leg or forcing him back on a heel.
Sweep Prepared with a Cross Body Institution
Both wrestlers are in right stance. TheThe opponent moves forward. When his opponent sets his right leg onto the mat, the samboist’s lefthand jerks left and downward while his right hand jerks left and upward and slightly toward thesamboist. This forces the opponent to cross his left leg behind his right leg. In that moment when theopponent begins to lift his right leg to better the stability and convenience of his position, the samboist’sleft leg sweeps laterally to lift his opponenself-protection as the same as for the lateral sweeping throw.
Sweeping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. Theopponent’s uniform under the elbows to force him to shift his body weight over his right leg, so that thesamboist can use his right hand to grip the outside of his opponent’s left knee crook. The samboist liftsthe trapped leg as high as possible and pulls it toward him. To prevent losing his balance, the opponentwill move forward on his right leg, as he is doing this, he may become airborne, so the samboist applies alateral sweep with his left leg (Figure 36). When the samboist isreleases his right hand grip on his opponent’s left leg. As a safety measure, the samboist retains his lefthand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. To protect himself in the fall, the opponent employs the ploy forfalling onto the left side.
Figure 35
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve. The opponent protects himself from the fall by using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
The common mistake in executing the lateral sweeping throw comes from sweeping into theleg with the wrong part of the foot.
The best situations for applying the lateral sweeping throw occur when the opponent:
Has one foot ahead of the other;
Steps heavily or hops;Drops to one knee while gripping the samboist.
means for preparing the opponent to be thrown with the lateral sweep are:Cross body institution;Driving him to one side of his leg or forcing him back on a heel.
Sweep Prepared with a Cross Body Institution
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.The opponent moves forward. When his opponent sets his right leg onto the mat, the samboist’s lefthand jerks left and downward while his right hand jerks left and upward and slightly toward the
oist. This forces the opponent to cross his left leg behind his right leg. In that moment when theopponent begins to lift his right leg to better the stability and convenience of his position, the samboist’sleft leg sweeps laterally to lift his opponent’s right leg. When using this ploy, the safety procedures and
protection as the same as for the lateral sweeping throw.
Sweeping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform under the elbows to force him to shift his body weight over his right leg, so that thesamboist can use his right hand to grip the outside of his opponent’s left knee crook. The samboist lifts
as possible and pulls it toward him. To prevent losing his balance, the opponentwill move forward on his right leg, as he is doing this, he may become airborne, so the samboist applies alateral sweep with his left leg (Figure 36). When the samboist is sure that his opponent is falling, hereleases his right hand grip on his opponent’s left leg. As a safety measure, the samboist retains his lefthand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. To protect himself in the fall, the opponent employs the ploy for
retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve. The opponent protects himself from the fall by using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
The common mistake in executing the lateral sweeping throw comes from sweeping into the
The best situations for applying the lateral sweeping throw occur when the opponent:
means for preparing the opponent to be thrown with the lateral sweep are:
Sweep Prepared with a Cross Body Institution
samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.The opponent moves forward. When his opponent sets his right leg onto the mat, the samboist’s lefthand jerks left and downward while his right hand jerks left and upward and slightly toward the
oist. This forces the opponent to cross his left leg behind his right leg. In that moment when theopponent begins to lift his right leg to better the stability and convenience of his position, the samboist’s
t’s right leg. When using this ploy, the safety procedures and
Sweeping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform under the elbows to force him to shift his body weight over his right leg, so that thesamboist can use his right hand to grip the outside of his opponent’s left knee crook. The samboist lifts
as possible and pulls it toward him. To prevent losing his balance, the opponentwill move forward on his right leg, as he is doing this, he may become airborne, so the samboist applies a
sure that his opponent is falling, hereleases his right hand grip on his opponent’s left leg. As a safety measure, the samboist retains his lefthand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. To protect himself in the fall, the opponent employs the ploy for
Sweeping when the Opponent Is Approaching
The opponent approaches from a right stance while the samboist retreats from a left stance. Inthe moment when the opponent sets his right leg onto the mat and begins to(but while his foot still contacts the mat), the samboist uses his left leg to apply a lateral sweeping throwunder his opponent’s right foot. Basically, the ploy is applied that same as it was for the lateral sweepingthrow.
Sweeping when the Opponent Is Retreating
The opponent retreats from a right stance while the samboist advances from a left stance. In themoment when the opponent is lifting his right foot from the mat, the samboist applies a lateral sweepunder that foot using his left leg. Basically, this ploy is applied the same as the lateral sweeping throw.
Sweeping with a Timed Step (or Timed Hop)
Both wrestlers are in a front stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.The opponent steps forward and to the left while the samboist steps forward and to the right. In thatmoment when the opponent begins to move his right leg to the left, the samboist laterally sweeps underhis opponent’s right leg with his left foot (Figure 37). Asbody and arms to shift his opponent’s weight mostly toward him. The samboist breaks his opponent’s fallby retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve.
The opponent is on both knees while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist then gripshis opponent’s uniform under the elbows. He then draws his opponent up as if to stand him on both feetbut follows this effort by laterally sweeping his left lwho is kneeling when raised upward can have his power minimized for the support of his right leg byapplying a variant of the lateral sweeping throw. If the opponent rises to his feet, as he sets his lon the mat, the samboist steps on it with his right foot and executes a right side lateral sweeping throw.
Figure 36
Sweeping when the Opponent Is Approaching
The opponent approaches from a right stance while the samboist retreats from a left stance. Inthe moment when the opponent sets his right leg onto the mat and begins to lift his weight off of that foot(but while his foot still contacts the mat), the samboist uses his left leg to apply a lateral sweeping throwunder his opponent’s right foot. Basically, the ploy is applied that same as it was for the lateral sweeping
Sweeping when the Opponent Is Retreating
The opponent retreats from a right stance while the samboist advances from a left stance. In themoment when the opponent is lifting his right foot from the mat, the samboist applies a lateral sweep
that foot using his left leg. Basically, this ploy is applied the same as the lateral sweeping throw.
Sweeping with a Timed Step (or Timed Hop)
Both wrestlers are in a front stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.nt steps forward and to the left while the samboist steps forward and to the right. In that
moment when the opponent begins to move his right leg to the left, the samboist laterally sweeps underhis opponent’s right leg with his left foot (Figure 37). As his leg sweeps, the samboist strongly jerks hisbody and arms to shift his opponent’s weight mostly toward him. The samboist breaks his opponent’s fallby retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve.
Figure 37
Sweeping from the Knees
The opponent is on both knees while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist then gripshis opponent’s uniform under the elbows. He then draws his opponent up as if to stand him on both feetbut follows this effort by laterally sweeping his left leg under his opponent’s right leg. A strong opponentwho is kneeling when raised upward can have his power minimized for the support of his right leg byapplying a variant of the lateral sweeping throw. If the opponent rises to his feet, as he sets his lon the mat, the samboist steps on it with his right foot and executes a right side lateral sweeping throw.
Sweeping when the Opponent Is Approaching
The opponent approaches from a right stance while the samboist retreats from a left stance. Inlift his weight off of that foot
(but while his foot still contacts the mat), the samboist uses his left leg to apply a lateral sweeping throwunder his opponent’s right foot. Basically, the ploy is applied that same as it was for the lateral sweeping
Sweeping when the Opponent Is Retreating
The opponent retreats from a right stance while the samboist advances from a left stance. In themoment when the opponent is lifting his right foot from the mat, the samboist applies a lateral sweep
that foot using his left leg. Basically, this ploy is applied the same as the lateral sweeping throw.
Sweeping with a Timed Step (or Timed Hop)
Both wrestlers are in a front stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.nt steps forward and to the left while the samboist steps forward and to the right. In that
moment when the opponent begins to move his right leg to the left, the samboist laterally sweeps underhis leg sweeps, the samboist strongly jerks his
body and arms to shift his opponent’s weight mostly toward him. The samboist breaks his opponent’s fall
The opponent is on both knees while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist then gripshis opponent’s uniform under the elbows. He then draws his opponent up as if to stand him on both feet
eg under his opponent’s right leg. A strong opponentwho is kneeling when raised upward can have his power minimized for the support of his right leg byapplying a variant of the lateral sweeping throw. If the opponent rises to his feet, as he sets his left footon the mat, the samboist steps on it with his right foot and executes a right side lateral sweeping throw.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacketThe samboist’s right leg steps right and forward, so that his body can turn left as his right toes are outsideof his opponent’s left toes at a right angle. Simultaneously, the samboist performs a strong jerk with hishands to the left and upward as if he is attempting to throw his opponent over his left shoulder. As soonas his opponent rises up onto his toes, as the samboist continues the jerking motion of his arms(supplemented by his body), he sweeps with the toe part of his left fankle (Figure 38).
Mitigating his opponent’s fall requires that the samboist retain his left hand’s grip on hisopponent’s right sleeve. To protect himself, the opponent uses the ploy for somersaulting over the stickto land on his left side. The common mistake in executing the front sweeping throw is sweeping theopponent when he is not unbalanced.
The best positions for the opponent to be in for executing the front sweeping throw are when:
a) The opponent’s legs are inb) The opponent crosses his feet.
The best preparations for setting up the opponent for the front sweeping throw are:
a) Driving the opponent up onto his toes;b) Instituting the opponent.
There are other entries into the front sweeping throw than what is described above. Before takinga right step forward, step back. This helps to bring the opponent up onto his toes.
The difficulty in this approachrisen up onto his toes and maintains a stable stance. Thus, to exploit his step forward, the samboist mustcontinuously use his arms and body to drive his opponent up onto his toes.
If in performing the front swemoment when the opponent begins to lose his balance, the samboist can add his own body weight toaugment his opponent’s fall by strongly arching his body back and turning his opponent tsame time, his left arm, bent at the elbow, strongly draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and as hesmoothly begins to fall, the arm vector changes to upward as his right hand drives the left side of hisopponent away from him (Figure 39). To mitigate his opponent’s fall, as his opponent’s fall is determined,the samboist must not permit his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat. He must throw his opponentso that he falls directly onto his back. The opponent will protecteither his right or left side.
Front Sweeping Throws
The Front Sweeping Throw
Figure 38
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacketThe samboist’s right leg steps right and forward, so that his body can turn left as his right toes are outsideof his opponent’s left toes at a right angle. Simultaneously, the samboist performs a strong jerk with his
and upward as if he is attempting to throw his opponent over his left shoulder. As soonas his opponent rises up onto his toes, as the samboist continues the jerking motion of his arms(supplemented by his body), he sweeps with the toe part of his left foot sole into his opponent’s right
Mitigating his opponent’s fall requires that the samboist retain his left hand’s grip on hisopponent’s right sleeve. To protect himself, the opponent uses the ploy for somersaulting over the sticko land on his left side. The common mistake in executing the front sweeping throw is sweeping the
opponent when he is not unbalanced.The best positions for the opponent to be in for executing the front sweeping throw are when:
The opponent’s legs are in a narrow stance, and he is leaning forward;The opponent crosses his feet.
The best preparations for setting up the opponent for the front sweeping throw are:
Driving the opponent up onto his toes;Instituting the opponent.
into the front sweeping throw than what is described above. Before takinga right step forward, step back. This helps to bring the opponent up onto his toes.
pproach lies in the fact that after stepping back the opponent may not hrisen up onto his toes and maintains a stable stance. Thus, to exploit his step forward, the samboist mustcontinuously use his arms and body to drive his opponent up onto his toes.
Sweeping Throw with a Falling Motion
If in performing the front sweeping throw, the opponent is difficult to compel into falling, in thatmoment when the opponent begins to lose his balance, the samboist can add his own body weight toaugment his opponent’s fall by strongly arching his body back and turning his opponent tsame time, his left arm, bent at the elbow, strongly draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and as hesmoothly begins to fall, the arm vector changes to upward as his right hand drives the left side of his
gure 39). To mitigate his opponent’s fall, as his opponent’s fall is determined,the samboist must not permit his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat. He must throw his opponentso that he falls directly onto his back. The opponent will protect himself using the ploy for rolling onto
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.The samboist’s right leg steps right and forward, so that his body can turn left as his right toes are outsideof his opponent’s left toes at a right angle. Simultaneously, the samboist performs a strong jerk with his
and upward as if he is attempting to throw his opponent over his left shoulder. As soonas his opponent rises up onto his toes, as the samboist continues the jerking motion of his arms
oot sole into his opponent’s right
Mitigating his opponent’s fall requires that the samboist retain his left hand’s grip on hisopponent’s right sleeve. To protect himself, the opponent uses the ploy for somersaulting over the sticko land on his left side. The common mistake in executing the front sweeping throw is sweeping the
The best positions for the opponent to be in for executing the front sweeping throw are when:
a narrow stance, and he is leaning forward;
The best preparations for setting up the opponent for the front sweeping throw are:
into the front sweeping throw than what is described above. Before takinga right step forward, step back. This helps to bring the opponent up onto his toes.
lies in the fact that after stepping back the opponent may not haverisen up onto his toes and maintains a stable stance. Thus, to exploit his step forward, the samboist must
Sweeping Throw with a Falling Motion
eping throw, the opponent is difficult to compel into falling, in thatmoment when the opponent begins to lose his balance, the samboist can add his own body weight toaugment his opponent’s fall by strongly arching his body back and turning his opponent to the left. At thesame time, his left arm, bent at the elbow, strongly draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and as hesmoothly begins to fall, the arm vector changes to upward as his right hand drives the left side of his
gure 39). To mitigate his opponent’s fall, as his opponent’s fall is determined,the samboist must not permit his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat. He must throw his opponent
himself using the ploy for rolling onto
If the opponent stands in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance, the opponent’s right legwill be very difficult to attack. In thisknee (Figure 40). In completing the sweep, the fall mitigation and selfwere used in the front sweeping throw.
Samboists of shorter heightsopponents, but the front sweeping throw applied at the knee can be used by them very well.
Sweeping Throw Prepared by Instituting the Opponent
The opponent is in left stance whileopponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of the arms. He then forces his opponent to shift his body’s weightover his left leg before his left hand draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and upwardopponent to step diagonally forward on his right leg. As his opponent begins to lift his right foot from themat, the samboist’s left leg applies a front sweeping throw under his opponent’s right leg. In completingthe sweeping throw, the fall mitigation and selfthrow.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent stands on wide set legs and leaning his bodyforward. The samboist grips his opponhis toes as his right leg steps further forward, so that he can set his right heel inside and close to hisopponent’s left heel. The samboist then sharply turns his body left and bends hison his left buttock as close as possible to his right heel. Simultaneously, both of his arms strongly jerk tothrow his opponent over his left shoulder as his left leg moves under his opponent’s right leg. When hisopponent loses his balance and begins to fall, the samboist sets his right instep over his left leg. Tomitigate his opponent’s fall, he does not permit his opponent to set his right arm into the mat, he does notpermit his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat, bforward somersault diagonally onto his back. The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy forfalling in a diagonal somersault onto the back leading with his right shoulder and ending on hisbuttock.
Figure 39
Sweeping at the Knee
If the opponent stands in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance, the opponent’s right leg. In this, the toe side of the foot sole should sweep at the opponent’s right
). In completing the sweep, the fall mitigation and self-protection are the same as whatwere used in the front sweeping throw.
Figure 40
Samboists of shorter heights find it very difficult to apply the front sweeping throw against talleropponents, but the front sweeping throw applied at the knee can be used by them very well.
Sweeping Throw Prepared by Instituting the Opponent
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of the arms. He then forces his opponent to shift his body’s weightover his left leg before his left hand draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and upwardopponent to step diagonally forward on his right leg. As his opponent begins to lift his right foot from themat, the samboist’s left leg applies a front sweeping throw under his opponent’s right leg. In completing
all mitigation and self-protection used are the same as for the front sweeping
Sweeping Throw with a Lifting Foot
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent stands on wide set legs and leaning his bodyforward. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows. He then drives his opponent up ontohis toes as his right leg steps further forward, so that he can set his right heel inside and close to hisopponent’s left heel. The samboist then sharply turns his body left and bends hison his left buttock as close as possible to his right heel. Simultaneously, both of his arms strongly jerk tothrow his opponent over his left shoulder as his left leg moves under his opponent’s right leg. When his
his balance and begins to fall, the samboist sets his right instep over his left leg. Tomitigate his opponent’s fall, he does not permit his opponent to set his right arm into the mat, he does notpermit his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat, but he does force his opponent’s body to fall into aforward somersault diagonally onto his back. The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy forfalling in a diagonal somersault onto the back leading with his right shoulder and ending on his
If the opponent stands in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance, the opponent’s right leg, the toe side of the foot sole should sweep at the opponent’s right
protection are the same as what
find it very difficult to apply the front sweeping throw against talleropponents, but the front sweeping throw applied at the knee can be used by them very well.
Sweeping Throw Prepared by Instituting the Opponent
the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of the arms. He then forces his opponent to shift his body’s weightover his left leg before his left hand draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and upward to compel hisopponent to step diagonally forward on his right leg. As his opponent begins to lift his right foot from themat, the samboist’s left leg applies a front sweeping throw under his opponent’s right leg. In completing
protection used are the same as for the front sweeping
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent stands on wide set legs and leaning his bodyent’s jacket under the elbows. He then drives his opponent up onto
his toes as his right leg steps further forward, so that he can set his right heel inside and close to hisopponent’s left heel. The samboist then sharply turns his body left and bends his right knee to sit downon his left buttock as close as possible to his right heel. Simultaneously, both of his arms strongly jerk tothrow his opponent over his left shoulder as his left leg moves under his opponent’s right leg. When his
his balance and begins to fall, the samboist sets his right instep over his left leg. Tomitigate his opponent’s fall, he does not permit his opponent to set his right arm into the mat, he does not
ut he does force his opponent’s body to fall into aforward somersault diagonally onto his back. The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy forfalling in a diagonal somersault onto the back leading with his right shoulder and ending on his left
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform, so that his lefthand is under his opponent’s right elbow, and his right handsets his right foot outside of his opponent’s right foot with his toes turned inward. Simultaneously, hejerks in the direction of his opponent’s left leg to remove his opponent’s weight from his right leg as tsamboist sweeps the toe part of his left foot sole under his opponent’s right heel (Figure 41). Lifting hisleft leg, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right leg as high as possible while jerking his arms to the left anddownward to throw his opponent
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall using his left hand on his opponent’s right sleeve. Theopponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto the back with a half somersault.
The best position for the opponent tostanding laterally to the samboist.
The best preparation for the opponent is to institute him into crossing his legs.
This ploy is applied the same as the rear sweeping throw exinsole is not aligned with the opponent’s right heel, but at the opponent’s right knee crook.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket unright elbow. His left leg then takes a large stop left and forward on a half bent right knee to lunge forward.
Then he aligns the toe part of his right insole with his opponent’s right knee crook to sweep intothe back of his opponent’s knee with his bent leg. As he does so, he throws his opponent by jerking withhis arms to left and downward, so that his opponent lands by the
As his opponent falls, the samboist retains his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve, andhis protects himself in his fall by using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
Figure 41 Rear Sweeping Throw
Rear Sweeping Throws
The Rear Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform, so that his lefthand is under his opponent’s right elbow, and his right hand is under his opponent’s left elbow. He thensets his right foot outside of his opponent’s right foot with his toes turned inward. Simultaneously, hejerks in the direction of his opponent’s left leg to remove his opponent’s weight from his right leg as tsamboist sweeps the toe part of his left foot sole under his opponent’s right heel (Figure 41). Lifting hisleft leg, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right leg as high as possible while jerking his arms to the left anddownward to throw his opponent onto the mat.
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall using his left hand on his opponent’s right sleeve. Theopponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto the back with a half somersault.
The best position for the opponent to be in when applying the rear sweeping throw is when is hestanding laterally to the samboist.
The best preparation for the opponent is to institute him into crossing his legs.
Sweep at the Knee
This ploy is applied the same as the rear sweeping throw except that the toe part of the leftinsole is not aligned with the opponent’s right heel, but at the opponent’s right knee crook.
Knee Sweep to the Same Side Leg
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket unright elbow. His left leg then takes a large stop left and forward on a half bent right knee to lunge forward.
Figure 42
the toe part of his right insole with his opponent’s right knee crook to sweep intothe back of his opponent’s knee with his bent leg. As he does so, he throws his opponent by jerking withhis arms to left and downward, so that his opponent lands by the samboist’s left leg (Figure 42).
As his opponent falls, the samboist retains his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve, andhis protects himself in his fall by using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform, so that his leftis under his opponent’s left elbow. He then
sets his right foot outside of his opponent’s right foot with his toes turned inward. Simultaneously, hejerks in the direction of his opponent’s left leg to remove his opponent’s weight from his right leg as thesamboist sweeps the toe part of his left foot sole under his opponent’s right heel (Figure 41). Lifting hisleft leg, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right leg as high as possible while jerking his arms to the left and
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall using his left hand on his opponent’s right sleeve. Theopponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for falling onto the back with a half somersault.
be in when applying the rear sweeping throw is when is he
The best preparation for the opponent is to institute him into crossing his legs.
cept that the toe part of the leftinsole is not aligned with the opponent’s right heel, but at the opponent’s right knee crook.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow. His left leg then takes a large stop left and forward on a half bent right knee to lunge forward.
the toe part of his right insole with his opponent’s right knee crook to sweep intothe back of his opponent’s knee with his bent leg. As he does so, he throws his opponent by jerking with
samboist’s left leg (Figure 42).As his opponent falls, the samboist retains his left hand grip on his opponent’s right sleeve, and
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under hisright elbow while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s jacket over his left clavicle. Jerking hisopponent in the direction of his opphis right leg, and from there, the samboist his right insole under the inside of his opponent’s right leg byhis heel. Lifting his right leg, the samboist also lifts his opponent’s rigsamboist’s hands jerk his opponent left, forward, and downward to throw him to the ground (Figure 43).
The samboist must take care not to fall onto his opponent. His opponent protects himself in thefall using the ploy for falling onto the back with a half somersault.
The optimum position for the opponent to be in for executing the inside sweeping throw is whenhe stands with wide set legs. The best preparation for this throw is to institute the opponent.
Insid
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of the arms. He forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis left leg as the samboist’s left arm draws his opponent’s right arm toward the samboist and upward toforce his opponent to take a deeper diagonal step forward on his right leg. In the moment when hisopponent begins to lift his foot from the mat, the samboist executesweep to the inside under his opponent’s left leg with his own left leg in the moment when his opponentsets his right foot onto the mat which frees his opponent’s left foot from a greater share of the opponent’sbody weight.
Inside Sweeping Throws
The Inside Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under hisright elbow while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s jacket over his left clavicle. Jerking hisopponent in the direction of his opponent’s left leg, he forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis right leg, and from there, the samboist his right insole under the inside of his opponent’s right leg byhis heel. Lifting his right leg, the samboist also lifts his opponent’s right leg left and upward as thesamboist’s hands jerk his opponent left, forward, and downward to throw him to the ground (Figure 43).
Figure 43
The samboist must take care not to fall onto his opponent. His opponent protects himself in thehe ploy for falling onto the back with a half somersault.
The optimum position for the opponent to be in for executing the inside sweeping throw is whenhe stands with wide set legs. The best preparation for this throw is to institute the opponent.
Inside Sweeping Throw with Institution
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of the arms. He forces his opponent to shift his body weight over
the samboist’s left arm draws his opponent’s right arm toward the samboist and upward toforce his opponent to take a deeper diagonal step forward on his right leg. In the moment when hisopponent begins to lift his foot from the mat, the samboist executes the inside sweeping throw. He cansweep to the inside under his opponent’s left leg with his own left leg in the moment when his opponentsets his right foot onto the mat which frees his opponent’s left foot from a greater share of the opponent’s
Sweep to the Inside of the Knee
Figure 44
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under hisright elbow while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s jacket over his left clavicle. Jerking his
onent’s left leg, he forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis right leg, and from there, the samboist his right insole under the inside of his opponent’s right leg by
ht leg left and upward as thesamboist’s hands jerk his opponent left, forward, and downward to throw him to the ground (Figure 43).
The samboist must take care not to fall onto his opponent. His opponent protects himself in the
The optimum position for the opponent to be in for executing the inside sweeping throw is whenhe stands with wide set legs. The best preparation for this throw is to institute the opponent.
e Sweeping Throw with Institution
The opponent is in a left stance while the samboist is in a right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of the arms. He forces his opponent to shift his body weight over
the samboist’s left arm draws his opponent’s right arm toward the samboist and upward toforce his opponent to take a deeper diagonal step forward on his right leg. In the moment when his
s the inside sweeping throw. He cansweep to the inside under his opponent’s left leg with his own left leg in the moment when his opponentsets his right foot onto the mat which frees his opponent’s left foot from a greater share of the opponent’s
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s jacket on the right sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent’s left shouldersamboist steps forward on his left leg with the toes of his left foot strongly turned to the left. Bending hisright knee sweeps the sole of his right foot into the inside on his opponent’s left knee (Figure 44). Thesamboist turns his body left and somewhat forward using a strong motion by his right foot and leg, he liftshis opponent’s left leg back and upward, so that the more that the samboist’s right leg leaves the mat, themore the opponent is forced to turn to the left until he falls ont
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains a grip on his opponent’s left sleeve. Theopponent protects himself from the fall as he did when somersaulting over the stick to land on the leftside.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow while his right hand grips his opponent’s back from under his left armpit. The samboist’s leftfoot, with its toes turned to the left, steps in pcenter into his opponent’s right leg close to that knee (Figure 45). Closely drawing his opponent towardhim, the samboist sharply leans his body to the left while using his right leg to thrWhen his opponent is airborne, the samboist twists his leg to the right and throws his opponent towardthe left to land by his left leg (Figure 46).
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall by retaining his lsleeve.
The best situation for the opponent to be found in to execute this throw is when the opponent isstanding in a higher stance and leaning this body forward.
The best preparation for this throw is driving the o
“Work Horse” with an Elbow Crook Grip to the Opposite Side
If the opponent does not allow the samboist to grip behind his back, the samboist can apply thefollowing grip: his left hand grips his opponent’s jtraps his opponent’s shoulder part of his left arm from behind and close to his body.
In applying the throw, the fall mitigation and self
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. His left foot, with its toes turnedto the left, steps in place behind his right leg. His right leg, bent at the knee, presses his upper part shininto his opponent’s right leg at the inside close to his opponent’s knee with the outer edge of the
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s jacket on the right sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent’s left shouldersamboist steps forward on his left leg with the toes of his left foot strongly turned to the left. Bending hisright knee sweeps the sole of his right foot into the inside on his opponent’s left knee (Figure 44). The
ft and somewhat forward using a strong motion by his right foot and leg, he liftshis opponent’s left leg back and upward, so that the more that the samboist’s right leg leaves the mat, themore the opponent is forced to turn to the left until he falls onto his back.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains a grip on his opponent’s left sleeve. Theopponent protects himself from the fall as he did when somersaulting over the stick to land on the left
Lifting Throws
The “Work Horse”
th wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow while his right hand grips his opponent’s back from under his left armpit. The samboist’s leftfoot, with its toes turned to the left, steps in place behind his right leg. He bends his right knee to press itscenter into his opponent’s right leg close to that knee (Figure 45). Closely drawing his opponent towardhim, the samboist sharply leans his body to the left while using his right leg to throw his opponent upward.When his opponent is airborne, the samboist twists his leg to the right and throws his opponent towardthe left to land by his left leg (Figure 46).
Figures 45 and 46
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s right
The best situation for the opponent to be found in to execute this throw is when the opponent isstanding in a higher stance and leaning this body forward.
The best preparation for this throw is driving the opponent off balance and instituting his body.
“Work Horse” with an Elbow Crook Grip to the Opposite Side
If the opponent does not allow the samboist to grip behind his back, the samboist can apply thefollowing grip: his left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under the right elbow while his right elbow crooktraps his opponent’s shoulder part of his left arm from behind and close to his body.
In applying the throw, the fall mitigation and self-protection are the same as in the previous ploy.
“Work Horse” with the Aid of a Foot
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. His left foot, with its toes turned
n place behind his right leg. His right leg, bent at the knee, presses his upper part shininto his opponent’s right leg at the inside close to his opponent’s knee with the outer edge of the
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s jacket on the right sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Thesamboist steps forward on his left leg with the toes of his left foot strongly turned to the left. Bending hisright knee sweeps the sole of his right foot into the inside on his opponent’s left knee (Figure 44). The
ft and somewhat forward using a strong motion by his right foot and leg, he liftshis opponent’s left leg back and upward, so that the more that the samboist’s right leg leaves the mat, the
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains a grip on his opponent’s left sleeve. Theopponent protects himself from the fall as he did when somersaulting over the stick to land on the left
th wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow while his right hand grips his opponent’s back from under his left armpit. The samboist’s left
lace behind his right leg. He bends his right knee to press itscenter into his opponent’s right leg close to that knee (Figure 45). Closely drawing his opponent toward
ow his opponent upward.When his opponent is airborne, the samboist twists his leg to the right and throws his opponent toward
eft hand grip on his opponent’s right
The best situation for the opponent to be found in to execute this throw is when the opponent is
pponent off balance and instituting his body.
“Work Horse” with an Elbow Crook Grip to the Opposite Side
If the opponent does not allow the samboist to grip behind his back, the samboist can apply theacket under the right elbow while his right elbow crook
traps his opponent’s shoulder part of his left arm from behind and close to his body.protection are the same as in the previous ploy.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. His left foot, with its toes turned
n place behind his right leg. His right leg, bent at the knee, presses his upper part shininto his opponent’s right leg at the inside close to his opponent’s knee with the outer edge of the
samboist’s right sole press to the opponent’s same shin close tothe throw is the same as the basic throw.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right shoulder ashis right hand goes under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his opponent’s belt. He squat slightlyon both legs and steps forward on his right foot to set it between his opponent’s legs. Pressing hisopponent’s body to his own, the samboist grips firmly and arches his bodylift his opponent from the mat. Shifting his weight over his right leg, the thigh of his bent left leg lifts hisopponent upward, and when his opponent is high enough, the samboist’s same thigh drives his opponentto the right and away from him. When lifting from the outside, the samboist can hook his foot and shininside of his opponent’s trapped leg to assist in throwing his opponent (Figure 47). By jerking his armsand turning his body to the left and downward, he throwopponent is falling, the samboist is able to remove his left leg, still bent at the knee, to move that leg asfar as possible to the left and rear.
Fall mitigation is achieved by the samboist retaining his left hhis right arm. The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. Thehis opponent’s belt on the right side by going over top of his opponent’s right arm. His right hand gripsthe back of his opponent’s belt from under his opponent’s left arm. Squatting on both legs, the samboist’sright leg steps forward to set his foot inside and close to his opponent’s left leg. Using a strong arm lift,the samboist arches his back and straightens his legs to lift his opponent from the ground to press thethigh of his opponent’s right leg to the outside of hisweight over the samboist’s left leg as the samboist’s arms and body pull left and downward (Figure 48).
samboist’s right sole press to the opponent’s same shin close to the foot. From there, the execution ofthe throw is the same as the basic throw.
The Outside Lifting Throw
Figure 47
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right shoulder asopponent’s left arm to grip the back of his opponent’s belt. He squat slightly
on both legs and steps forward on his right foot to set it between his opponent’s legs. Pressing hisopponent’s body to his own, the samboist grips firmly and arches his body while straightening his legs tolift his opponent from the mat. Shifting his weight over his right leg, the thigh of his bent left leg lifts hisopponent upward, and when his opponent is high enough, the samboist’s same thigh drives his opponent
ght and away from him. When lifting from the outside, the samboist can hook his foot and shininside of his opponent’s trapped leg to assist in throwing his opponent (Figure 47). By jerking his armsand turning his body to the left and downward, he throws his opponent’s back to the mat. When hisopponent is falling, the samboist is able to remove his left leg, still bent at the knee, to move that leg asfar as possible to the left and rear.
Fall mitigation is achieved by the samboist retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s jacket onhis right arm. The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
The Inside Lifting Throw
Figure 48
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s belt on the right side by going over top of his opponent’s right arm. His right hand gripsthe back of his opponent’s belt from under his opponent’s left arm. Squatting on both legs, the samboist’s
s forward to set his foot inside and close to his opponent’s left leg. Using a strong arm lift,the samboist arches his back and straightens his legs to lift his opponent from the ground to press thethigh of his opponent’s right leg to the outside of his bent left thigh and shin to throw his opponent’s bodyweight over the samboist’s left leg as the samboist’s arms and body pull left and downward (Figure 48).
Major Outer Reaping Throws
The Major Outer Reap
the foot. From there, the execution of
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right shoulder asopponent’s left arm to grip the back of his opponent’s belt. He squat slightly
on both legs and steps forward on his right foot to set it between his opponent’s legs. Pressing hiswhile straightening his legs to
lift his opponent from the mat. Shifting his weight over his right leg, the thigh of his bent left leg lifts hisopponent upward, and when his opponent is high enough, the samboist’s same thigh drives his opponent
ght and away from him. When lifting from the outside, the samboist can hook his foot and shininside of his opponent’s trapped leg to assist in throwing his opponent (Figure 47). By jerking his arms
s his opponent’s back to the mat. When hisopponent is falling, the samboist is able to remove his left leg, still bent at the knee, to move that leg as
and grip on his opponent’s jacket onhis right arm. The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for falling onto the left side.
samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s belt on the right side by going over top of his opponent’s right arm. His right hand gripsthe back of his opponent’s belt from under his opponent’s left arm. Squatting on both legs, the samboist’s
s forward to set his foot inside and close to his opponent’s left leg. Using a strong arm lift,the samboist arches his back and straightens his legs to lift his opponent from the ground to press the
bent left thigh and shin to throw his opponent’s bodyweight over the samboist’s left leg as the samboist’s arms and body pull left and downward (Figure 48).
Both wrestlers are in right stanthe right elbow, and his right hand applies pressure to his opponent’s right collar bone. The samboistcompels his opponent to shift his body weight over his right leg as the samboist simultforward and to the left on his left leg with the toes of his left foot turned to the left. He quickly drives isbent right leg to the left and forward, so that a strong stroke of that leg to the rear is aligned with hisopponent’s right knee crook as the samboist strongly jerks his arms to the left and downward (Figure 49).To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist left hand must keep a grip on his opponent’s right sleeve.His opponent will protect himself from the falling using the plposition for the opponent to be in when the samboist applies the major outer reap is when his opponent’sleg(s) are further forward.
The Major Outer Reaping Throw Prepared by Institution
The samboist is in right stance while his opponent is in left stance. He grips his opponent’suniform under the shoulder parts of his arms. He then forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis left leg as the samboist’s left hand draws his opponent’s right arm towardopponent to take a further diagonal step forward with his right leg. As the opponent lifts his foot from themat, the samboist applies the major outer reap as described above. As he applies the throw, his righthand changes its grip to press against his opponent’s right collar bone.
Major Outer Reap on the Retreating Opponent
Both wrestlers are in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. His opponent backing up adopts a rightstance as the samboist advances.moving his left leg back, the samboist takes a large step forward on his right leg and a larger step forwardand to the left on his left leg to stand on his bent right legright leg moving to the rear, the samboist follows applying the major outer reaping throw as describedabove.
Major Outer Reaping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s right hand grips the opponent’schest while his right hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee crook. Lifting the trapped legupward and to the left, the samboist places his right leg forward and between his opponent’s legs to alignhis knee crook with his opponent’s left knee crook.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his right hand grip on his opponent’s chest.
Major Outer Reaping with the Legs Crossed
Figure 49
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand applies pressure to his opponent’s right collar bone. The samboistcompels his opponent to shift his body weight over his right leg as the samboist simultforward and to the left on his left leg with the toes of his left foot turned to the left. He quickly drives isbent right leg to the left and forward, so that a strong stroke of that leg to the rear is aligned with his
e crook as the samboist strongly jerks his arms to the left and downward (Figure 49).To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist left hand must keep a grip on his opponent’s right sleeve.His opponent will protect himself from the falling using the ploy for falling onto the left side. The bestposition for the opponent to be in when the samboist applies the major outer reap is when his opponent’s
The Major Outer Reaping Throw Prepared by Institution
ht stance while his opponent is in left stance. He grips his opponent’suniform under the shoulder parts of his arms. He then forces his opponent to shift his body weight overhis left leg as the samboist’s left hand draws his opponent’s right arm toward him and upward forcing hisopponent to take a further diagonal step forward with his right leg. As the opponent lifts his foot from themat, the samboist applies the major outer reap as described above. As he applies the throw, his right
s grip to press against his opponent’s right collar bone.
Major Outer Reap on the Retreating Opponent
wrestlers are in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. His opponent backing up adopts a rightstance as the samboist advances. During the moment when the opponent rearranges his stance by
the samboist takes a large step forward on his right leg and a larger step forwardand to the left on his left leg to stand on his bent right leg. When his opponent begins to retreat with his
t leg moving to the rear, the samboist follows applying the major outer reaping throw as described
Major Outer Reaping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s right hand grips the opponent’schest while his right hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee crook. Lifting the trapped legupward and to the left, the samboist places his right leg forward and between his opponent’s legs to align
ent’s left knee crook.To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his right hand grip on his opponent’s chest.
Major Outer Reaping with the Legs Crossed
ce. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand applies pressure to his opponent’s right collar bone. The samboistcompels his opponent to shift his body weight over his right leg as the samboist simultaneously stepsforward and to the left on his left leg with the toes of his left foot turned to the left. He quickly drives isbent right leg to the left and forward, so that a strong stroke of that leg to the rear is aligned with his
e crook as the samboist strongly jerks his arms to the left and downward (Figure 49).To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist left hand must keep a grip on his opponent’s right sleeve.
oy for falling onto the left side. The bestposition for the opponent to be in when the samboist applies the major outer reap is when his opponent’s
The Major Outer Reaping Throw Prepared by Institution
ht stance while his opponent is in left stance. He grips his opponent’suniform under the shoulder parts of his arms. He then forces his opponent to shift his body weight over
him and upward forcing hisopponent to take a further diagonal step forward with his right leg. As the opponent lifts his foot from themat, the samboist applies the major outer reap as described above. As he applies the throw, his right
Major Outer Reap on the Retreating Opponent
wrestlers are in a right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. His opponent backing up adopts a right
rearranges his stance bythe samboist takes a large step forward on his right leg and a larger step forward
When his opponent begins to retreat with hist leg moving to the rear, the samboist follows applying the major outer reaping throw as described
Major Outer Reaping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s right hand grips the opponent’s jacket on thechest while his right hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee crook. Lifting the trapped legupward and to the left, the samboist places his right leg forward and between his opponent’s legs to align
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his right hand grip on his opponent’s chest.
Major Outer Reaping with the Legs Crossed
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist institutes his opponent to cross his oppwith his right hand gripping the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook. Lifting the trapped leg upwardand to the right, the samboist steps his left leg close to his opponent’s left leg and applies a right legmajor outer reaping throw to his opassured, the samboist moves back his right leg and uses his left hand to mitigate his opponent’s fall byretaining his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. The opponent protects himself infor falling onto the left side.
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of his opponent’s arms. Thopponent with his legs placed so that his right leg is set close to his left leg with his left foot poised ontoes that are turned to the left. In the hop, the right leg is moved to be behind the left leg. An energeticmotion by the samboist’s right shin is aligned with his opponent’s left knee crook as the samboist’s armmotion drives his opponent to the right (Figure 51).
When the opponent’s fall is defined, the samboist begins to mitigate the fall using his left hand todraw on his opponent’s jacket in the area of his right sleeve, and during this same time, the samboist’sright leg continues lifting his opponent’s left leg as high as possible. The opponent protects himself usingthe ploy for falling onto the right side
The best position for the opponent to be in when applying the alignment occurs when theopponent stands laterally to the samboist with wide set legs.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist institutes his opponent to cross his oppwith his right hand gripping the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook. Lifting the trapped leg upwardand to the right, the samboist steps his left leg close to his opponent’s left leg and applies a right legmajor outer reaping throw to his opponent’s left knee crook (Figure 50). When his opponent’s fall isassured, the samboist moves back his right leg and uses his left hand to mitigate his opponent’s fall byretaining his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. The opponent protects himself in
Figure 50
Alignment
Figure 51
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform on the shoulder part of his opponent’s arms. The samboist hops in close to hisopponent with his legs placed so that his right leg is set close to his left leg with his left foot poised ontoes that are turned to the left. In the hop, the right leg is moved to be behind the left leg. An energetic
on by the samboist’s right shin is aligned with his opponent’s left knee crook as the samboist’s armmotion drives his opponent to the right (Figure 51).
When the opponent’s fall is defined, the samboist begins to mitigate the fall using his left hand todraw on his opponent’s jacket in the area of his right sleeve, and during this same time, the samboist’sright leg continues lifting his opponent’s left leg as high as possible. The opponent protects himself usingthe ploy for falling onto the right side.
The best position for the opponent to be in when applying the alignment occurs when theopponent stands laterally to the samboist with wide set legs.
Sweeping Hip Throws
The Sweeping Hip Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist institutes his opponent to cross his opponentwith his right hand gripping the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook. Lifting the trapped leg upwardand to the right, the samboist steps his left leg close to his opponent’s left leg and applies a right leg
ponent’s left knee crook (Figure 50). When his opponent’s fall isassured, the samboist moves back his right leg and uses his left hand to mitigate his opponent’s fall byretaining his grip on his opponent’s right sleeve. The opponent protects himself in falling using the ploy
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hise samboist hops in close to his
opponent with his legs placed so that his right leg is set close to his left leg with his left foot poised ontoes that are turned to the left. In the hop, the right leg is moved to be behind the left leg. An energetic
on by the samboist’s right shin is aligned with his opponent’s left knee crook as the samboist’s arm
When the opponent’s fall is defined, the samboist begins to mitigate the fall using his left hand todraw on his opponent’s jacket in the area of his right sleeve, and during this same time, the samboist’sright leg continues lifting his opponent’s left leg as high as possible. The opponent protects himself using
The best position for the opponent to be in when applying the alignment occurs when the
Figure 52
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right hand grips his opponent’s back by going under his opponent’s left arm. The samboist pivotsleft on his right foot (turning the heel by being on the toes) as he sets his left leg behind his right leg whichallows the half bent leg to move left and upward. Pressing his right side into his opponent’s body, thesamboist strongly strikes using the thigh of his straightened right leg into the front part of his opponent’sright thigh. The samboist then pulls with his arms and body to the left and downward to throw hisopponent by his left leg (Figure 52).
The samboist mitigates his opponent’s fall by retaining his left hand grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve. This opponent protects himself from the fall using the same ploy as for somersaulting over thestick to land on the left side.
Preparations for applying the sweeping hip throw include:a) Driving the opponent onto one leg.b) Driving the opponent up onto his toes.
Sweeping Hip Throw with an Elbow Crook Grip on the Opposite Side Arm
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, and if he isnot gripping his opponent’s jacket on the back from under his opponent’s left arm with his right hand, thesamboist uses his right elbow crook to grip the shoulder part of his opponent’s left arm closer to theshoulder joint. From that point, the execution of the ploy is the same as in the previous ploy.
Throws over the Head
The Throw over the Head
Figure 53
The opponent stands in a front stance, and slightly leans into the samboist. The samboist is inright stance. He grips his opponent’s uniform under the elbows. He steps his left leg forward to his heelfacing his opponent’s toes (Figure 53). He then strongly jerks his arms toward him and upward as if thesamboist intends to throw his opponent over his body as he then sits on the ground as close as possibleto his left heel and sets his strongly bent right leg on his opponent’s bstopping this motion, the motion is timed to roll his shoulders and back onto the mat as he drives (withoutstriking) the toes of his right foot into his opponent. The direction of the pushing motion of the leg must beupward and back to a place behind the samboist’s head (Figure 54). After the leg push, the opponent isdirected over the samboist’s left shoulder and his right shoulder. Mitigating the opponent’s fall alsoincludes that the samboist’s arms provide a framesamboist’s face, and that these same arms provide a strong pull to ensure throwing the opponent overthe samboist sufficiently to prevent his opponent’s head from hitting the groun
The opponent’s own selfdiagonal somersault onto the back. From these, the opponent can fall in the following way: beginningwith a front somersault except that when his shoulder blades contact the mat, he mua base of wide set legs. After his shoulder blades contact the mat, his legs must not be crossed, and thepurpose of this effort is prevent his lower back from contacting the mat.
The best situation for the opponent to be in for execuopponent bends down and forward
The best means for preparing thea) Organized pressure,b) Moving the opponent onto one leg
Throw over the Head
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right forearm grips his opponent’s left armpit,and both hands grip his opponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of the opponent’s same arm. Thesamboist’s left leg steps as far forward and as close to his opponent as possible to set that foot betweenhis opponent’s legs. The samboist sits close to his left heel and sets his right knee into his opponent’sbelt with his right instep braced into the inner parstraighten his shin and jerk toward him with his arms to throw his opponent over his head (Figure 55).When the opponent’s body is falling toward the mat and over the samboist’s head, the samboist mdraw his opponent toward him using the trapped arm.
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for somersaulting diagonally onto the backover the right shoulder to the left buttock.
Figure 54
The opponent stands in a front stance, and slightly leans into the samboist. The samboist is inright stance. He grips his opponent’s uniform under the elbows. He steps his left leg forward to his heel
(Figure 53). He then strongly jerks his arms toward him and upward as if thesamboist intends to throw his opponent over his body as he then sits on the ground as close as possibleto his left heel and sets his strongly bent right leg on his opponent’s belt over his stomach area. Withoutstopping this motion, the motion is timed to roll his shoulders and back onto the mat as he drives (withoutstriking) the toes of his right foot into his opponent. The direction of the pushing motion of the leg must beupward and back to a place behind the samboist’s head (Figure 54). After the leg push, the opponent isdirected over the samboist’s left shoulder and his right shoulder. Mitigating the opponent’s fall alsoincludes that the samboist’s arms provide a frame to prevent his opponent’s head dropping into thesamboist’s face, and that these same arms provide a strong pull to ensure throwing the opponent overthe samboist sufficiently to prevent his opponent’s head from hitting the ground.
The opponent’s own self-protection includes using the ploy for the forward somersault or thediagonal somersault onto the back. From these, the opponent can fall in the following way: beginningwith a front somersault except that when his shoulder blades contact the mat, he mua base of wide set legs. After his shoulder blades contact the mat, his legs must not be crossed, and thepurpose of this effort is prevent his lower back from contacting the mat.
The best situation for the opponent to be in for executing the throw over the head is when theorward while attempting to push the samboist around on the mat
The best means for preparing the opponent are:
b) Moving the opponent onto one leg
Throw over the Head with a Knee Propped in the Stomach
Figure 55
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right forearm grips his opponent’s left armpit,and both hands grip his opponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of the opponent’s same arm. The
left leg steps as far forward and as close to his opponent as possible to set that foot betweenhis opponent’s legs. The samboist sits close to his left heel and sets his right knee into his opponent’sbelt with his right instep braced into the inner part of his opponent’s left thigh, so that the samboist canstraighten his shin and jerk toward him with his arms to throw his opponent over his head (Figure 55).When the opponent’s body is falling toward the mat and over the samboist’s head, the samboist mdraw his opponent toward him using the trapped arm.
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for somersaulting diagonally onto the backover the right shoulder to the left buttock.
The opponent stands in a front stance, and slightly leans into the samboist. The samboist is inright stance. He grips his opponent’s uniform under the elbows. He steps his left leg forward to his heel
(Figure 53). He then strongly jerks his arms toward him and upward as if thesamboist intends to throw his opponent over his body as he then sits on the ground as close as possible
elt over his stomach area. Withoutstopping this motion, the motion is timed to roll his shoulders and back onto the mat as he drives (withoutstriking) the toes of his right foot into his opponent. The direction of the pushing motion of the leg must beupward and back to a place behind the samboist’s head (Figure 54). After the leg push, the opponent isdirected over the samboist’s left shoulder and his right shoulder. Mitigating the opponent’s fall also
to prevent his opponent’s head dropping into thesamboist’s face, and that these same arms provide a strong pull to ensure throwing the opponent over
protection includes using the ploy for the forward somersault or thediagonal somersault onto the back. From these, the opponent can fall in the following way: beginningwith a front somersault except that when his shoulder blades contact the mat, he must quickly arch upona base of wide set legs. After his shoulder blades contact the mat, his legs must not be crossed, and the
ting the throw over the head is when thewhile attempting to push the samboist around on the mat.
with a Knee Propped in the Stomach
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right forearm grips his opponent’s left armpit,and both hands grip his opponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of the opponent’s same arm. The
left leg steps as far forward and as close to his opponent as possible to set that foot betweenhis opponent’s legs. The samboist sits close to his left heel and sets his right knee into his opponent’s
t of his opponent’s left thigh, so that the samboist canstraighten his shin and jerk toward him with his arms to throw his opponent over his head (Figure 55).When the opponent’s body is falling toward the mat and over the samboist’s head, the samboist must
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for somersaulting diagonally onto the back
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s right handgrips his opponent’s jacket on the chest from under the opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s littlefinger (in a reverse grip) is on top. The samboist mjump into the air and apply his legs as “scissors”, so that his right leg is at his opponent’s chest, and hisleft leg is behind his opponent’s knees (Figure 56). As soon as the samboist’s legs are wraphis opponent, he applies a sharp motion to drive his right leg to the rear, and his left leg forward to knockhis opponent down. When his opponent begins to fall, the samboist uses his left leg to lift his opponent’slegs as high as possible.
The samboist’s fall mitigation includes bracing his left arm on the ground. The opponent protectshimself using the ploy for the half
The best positions for the opponent to be in to apply the “scissors” throw are when:
a) The opponent is standing laterally to the samboist;b) The opponent pulls the samboist to him;
The best preparations for the throw include:
a) Instituting with legs crossed;b) Instituting.
The opponent stands in a front stance with his body held erect. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform under the elbows. The samboist jumps up and onto his opponent as if to sit atop hisopponent’s body. Holding his legs around his opponent’s body, the smat. His hands move to grip his opponent’s opposite side heels as he moves his right foot toward hischest, and then drives his right foot away from him as he simultaneously jerks his arms to pull hisopponent’s heels toward him, so that his opponent falls onto his back on the mat (Figure 57).
Fall mitigation includes pressing his shins and calves into his opponent’s body (to prevent kickinghim in the thorax).
The “Scissors” Throw
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s right handgrips his opponent’s jacket on the chest from under the opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s littlefinger (in a reverse grip) is on top. The samboist moves beside his opponent’s left side, so that he canjump into the air and apply his legs as “scissors”, so that his right leg is at his opponent’s chest, and hisleft leg is behind his opponent’s knees (Figure 56). As soon as the samboist’s legs are wraphis opponent, he applies a sharp motion to drive his right leg to the rear, and his left leg forward to knockhis opponent down. When his opponent begins to fall, the samboist uses his left leg to lift his opponent’s
The samboist’s fall mitigation includes bracing his left arm on the ground. The opponent protectshimself using the ploy for the half-somersault onto the back.
The best positions for the opponent to be in to apply the “scissors” throw are when:
onent is standing laterally to the samboist;The opponent pulls the samboist to him;
The best preparations for the throw include:
Instituting with legs crossed;
Figure 56 “Scissors”
Figure 57 The “Saddle”
The “Saddle” Throw
opponent stands in a front stance with his body held erect. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform under the elbows. The samboist jumps up and onto his opponent as if to sit atop hisopponent’s body. Holding his legs around his opponent’s body, the samboist allows his back to fall to themat. His hands move to grip his opponent’s opposite side heels as he moves his right foot toward hischest, and then drives his right foot away from him as he simultaneously jerks his arms to pull his
s toward him, so that his opponent falls onto his back on the mat (Figure 57).Fall mitigation includes pressing his shins and calves into his opponent’s body (to prevent kicking
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s right handgrips his opponent’s jacket on the chest from under the opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s little
oves beside his opponent’s left side, so that he canjump into the air and apply his legs as “scissors”, so that his right leg is at his opponent’s chest, and hisleft leg is behind his opponent’s knees (Figure 56). As soon as the samboist’s legs are wrapped aroundhis opponent, he applies a sharp motion to drive his right leg to the rear, and his left leg forward to knockhis opponent down. When his opponent begins to fall, the samboist uses his left leg to lift his opponent’s
The samboist’s fall mitigation includes bracing his left arm on the ground. The opponent protects
The best positions for the opponent to be in to apply the “scissors” throw are when:
opponent stands in a front stance with his body held erect. The samboist grips hisopponent’s uniform under the elbows. The samboist jumps up and onto his opponent as if to sit atop his
amboist allows his back to fall to themat. His hands move to grip his opponent’s opposite side heels as he moves his right foot toward hischest, and then drives his right foot away from him as he simultaneously jerks his arms to pull his
s toward him, so that his opponent falls onto his back on the mat (Figure 57).Fall mitigation includes pressing his shins and calves into his opponent’s body (to prevent kicking
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploybest position for the opponent to be in to apply the saddle throw occurs when the opponent is standingerect or with his body leaning slightly to the rear.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow, and his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his uniform.Forcing his opponent to shift his body weight onto hisfoot, so that his left buttock is close to his opponent’s right hip. Simultaneously with this pivot, thesamboist brings his left leg to his right leg to slightly squat on both legs (Figure 58).
Aligning his left buttock with the inner part of his opponent’s right thigh fromthen, upward causes the opponent to fly over the samboist, and when the opponent’s body rotates overthe samboist’s hip, but before his opponent contacts the mat, the samboist releases his grip on hisopponent’s back.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his left hand’s grip on his opponent’s rightsleeve.
To protect himself from the fall, the opponent uses the ploy for falling onto the left side as donewhen falling over the stick. The common mistakbuttock with the opponent with only an upward motion that does not include the vector to the rear.
The best situations for applying this ploy on the opponent occur when the opponent attempts togrip the back of the samboist’s jacket.
The best preparation for the throw over the hip occurs (except in the special circumstances to bedescribed below) by:
a) Instituting the opponent;b) By forcing the opponent onto one leg.
Throw over the Hip with the Bel
In response to the opponent’s left hand grip to the back of the samboist’s belt from under his rightarm, the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, and his right hand grips the back of hisopponent’s belt by going over his opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist can apply the throw over thehip as described above.
Throw over the Hip Gripping the Collar
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for the half somersault to the back. Thebest position for the opponent to be in to apply the saddle throw occurs when the opponent is standingerect or with his body leaning slightly to the rear.
Throws over the Hip (or Thigh)
The Throw over the Hip
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow, and his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his uniform.Forcing his opponent to shift his body weight onto his toes, the samboist pivots left on the toes of his rightfoot, so that his left buttock is close to his opponent’s right hip. Simultaneously with this pivot, thesamboist brings his left leg to his right leg to slightly squat on both legs (Figure 58).
gning his left buttock with the inner part of his opponent’s right thigh fromcauses the opponent to fly over the samboist, and when the opponent’s body rotates over
the samboist’s hip, but before his opponent contacts the mat, the samboist releases his grip on his
Figures 58 and 59
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his left hand’s grip on his opponent’s right
To protect himself from the fall, the opponent uses the ploy for falling onto the left side as donewhen falling over the stick. The common mistake when executing the throw over the hip is to align the leftbuttock with the opponent with only an upward motion that does not include the vector to the rear.
The best situations for applying this ploy on the opponent occur when the opponent attempts torip the back of the samboist’s jacket.
The best preparation for the throw over the hip occurs (except in the special circumstances to be
Instituting the opponent;By forcing the opponent onto one leg.
Throw over the Hip with the Belt Gripped over an Arm
In response to the opponent’s left hand grip to the back of the samboist’s belt from under his rightarm, the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, and his right hand grips the back of his
ver his opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist can apply the throw over the
Throw over the Hip Gripping the Collar
for the half somersault to the back. Thebest position for the opponent to be in to apply the saddle throw occurs when the opponent is standing
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow, and his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his uniform.
toes, the samboist pivots left on the toes of his rightfoot, so that his left buttock is close to his opponent’s right hip. Simultaneously with this pivot, thesamboist brings his left leg to his right leg to slightly squat on both legs (Figure 58).
gning his left buttock with the inner part of his opponent’s right thigh from below to the rear, andcauses the opponent to fly over the samboist, and when the opponent’s body rotates over
the samboist’s hip, but before his opponent contacts the mat, the samboist releases his grip on his
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains his left hand’s grip on his opponent’s right
To protect himself from the fall, the opponent uses the ploy for falling onto the left side as donee when executing the throw over the hip is to align the left
buttock with the opponent with only an upward motion that does not include the vector to the rear.The best situations for applying this ploy on the opponent occur when the opponent attempts to
The best preparation for the throw over the hip occurs (except in the special circumstances to be
t Gripped over an Arm
In response to the opponent’s left hand grip to the back of the samboist’s belt from under his rightarm, the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, and his right hand grips the back of his
ver his opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist can apply the throw over the
Throw over the Hip Gripping the Collar
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s lapel over hischest while his left hand grips his opponent’s left side of his collar. The samboist’s right hand must bebelow his left hand. He then applies the throw over the hip as described above.
Throw over the Hip Prepared by Bumping the Knee
The opponent is in left stancehis opponent’s right sleeve as his right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. He then sets his rightfoot inside, and close to, his opponent’s left foot. His right knee presseleft knee, and when his opponent begins to lose his balance, the samboist applies the throw over the hip.
Throw over the Hip Prepared by Heaving the Thigh
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left handhis right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his jacket. Both of the samboist’shands strongly jerk the opponent to the left and downward as he simultaneously slightly squats. When hefeels his opponent resist, the samboistthrow his opponent into the samboist’s right buttock. Simultaneously with this motion of moving hisopponent toward him, the samboist converts the motion
Throw over the Hip with the Head Gripped and a Falling Motion
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right elbow crook grips histhe samboist turns, so that he executes a pivot to the left on his right foot, so that his left buttock isoutside of his opponent’s right hip or thigh (Figure 60). Completing his pivot,beside his right leg and shifts his weight over his left leg. Slightly moving the toes of his right foot to theright, the samboist stands with his right knee close to his left toes. He rotates his opponent over his backforcing him to somersault with his back to the mat. When his opponent begins to roll onto his back, thesamboist sits down onto his right buttock close to his opponent’s right side and presses his opponent intothe lateral hold down position (see figure of t
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains a tight hold on his opponent’s head, so thathis opponent’s head does not strike the mat, and the samboist sits down on the mat with his opponentand ensures that he does not fall
The opponent protects himself in the fall by tucking in his head and using the ploy for the forwardsomersault.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s rightThe samboist pivots on his right foot to the left, so that his heels are to his opponent’s toes, and his backis to his opponent, so that his right arm can wrap around the shoulder part of his opponent’s back from
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s lapel over hishis left hand grips his opponent’s left side of his collar. The samboist’s right hand must be
below his left hand. He then applies the throw over the hip as described above.
Throw over the Hip Prepared by Bumping the Knee
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s right sleeve as his right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. He then sets his rightfoot inside, and close to, his opponent’s left foot. His right knee presses into the inside of his opponent’sleft knee, and when his opponent begins to lose his balance, the samboist applies the throw over the hip.
Throw over the Hip Prepared by Heaving the Thigh
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, andhis right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his jacket. Both of the samboist’shands strongly jerk the opponent to the left and downward as he simultaneously slightly squats. When he
s his opponent resist, the samboist spirals the motion to the right and upwardthrow his opponent into the samboist’s right buttock. Simultaneously with this motion of moving hisopponent toward him, the samboist converts the motion into the entry for the throw over the hip.
Throw over the Hip with the Head Gripped and a Falling Motion
Figure 60
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right elbow crook grips his opponent’s head. Simultaneously with gripping his opponent’s head,the samboist turns, so that he executes a pivot to the left on his right foot, so that his left buttock isoutside of his opponent’s right hip or thigh (Figure 60). Completing his pivot, the samboist sets his left legbeside his right leg and shifts his weight over his left leg. Slightly moving the toes of his right foot to theright, the samboist stands with his right knee close to his left toes. He rotates his opponent over his back
cing him to somersault with his back to the mat. When his opponent begins to roll onto his back, thesamboist sits down onto his right buttock close to his opponent’s right side and presses his opponent intothe lateral hold down position (see figure of the lateral hold down).
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains a tight hold on his opponent’s head, so thathis opponent’s head does not strike the mat, and the samboist sits down on the mat with his opponentand ensures that he does not fall onto his opponent’s body.
The opponent protects himself in the fall by tucking in his head and using the ploy for the forward
Reverse Throw over the Hip
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s rightThe samboist pivots on his right foot to the left, so that his heels are to his opponent’s toes, and his backis to his opponent, so that his right arm can wrap around the shoulder part of his opponent’s back from
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s lapel over hishis left hand grips his opponent’s left side of his collar. The samboist’s right hand must be
Throw over the Hip Prepared by Bumping the Knee
while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s right sleeve as his right hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. He then sets his right
s into the inside of his opponent’sleft knee, and when his opponent begins to lose his balance, the samboist applies the throw over the hip.
Throw over the Hip Prepared by Heaving the Thigh
grips his opponent’s right sleeve, andhis right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his jacket. Both of the samboist’shands strongly jerk the opponent to the left and downward as he simultaneously slightly squats. When he
and behind his back tothrow his opponent into the samboist’s right buttock. Simultaneously with this motion of moving his
into the entry for the throw over the hip.
Throw over the Hip with the Head Gripped and a Falling Motion
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,opponent’s head. Simultaneously with gripping his opponent’s head,
the samboist turns, so that he executes a pivot to the left on his right foot, so that his left buttock isthe samboist sets his left leg
beside his right leg and shifts his weight over his left leg. Slightly moving the toes of his right foot to theright, the samboist stands with his right knee close to his left toes. He rotates his opponent over his back
cing him to somersault with his back to the mat. When his opponent begins to roll onto his back, thesamboist sits down onto his right buttock close to his opponent’s right side and presses his opponent into
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, the samboist retains a tight hold on his opponent’s head, so thathis opponent’s head does not strike the mat, and the samboist sits down on the mat with his opponent
The opponent protects himself in the fall by tucking in his head and using the ploy for the forward
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve.The samboist pivots on his right foot to the left, so that his heels are to his opponent’s toes, and his backis to his opponent, so that his right arm can wrap around the shoulder part of his opponent’s back from
behind, so that the samboist’s right hand is on his opponent’s right shoulder. Then, his left hand movesbetween their bodies by his opponent’s right side to wrap around his back. Quickly, the samboist sets hisleft buttock and throws his opponent forward over the samboist’s back withowhile attempting not to allow him to brace his left arm on the ground (Figure 61).
Throw over the Hip by Approaching around the Leg
If the opponent stands in a left stance with his right leg advanced, shown in theopponent can easily attack the samboist with a lateral sweeping throw under the samboist’s advancedright leg. In this case, the samboist would be better served to approach from around the leg. Thus, heshould use his left hand to grip higrip the back of his opponent’s belt. The samboist’s left leg should be set, so that its heel is by hisopponent’s toes on his left foot to maximize the samboist’s turn to the left. Heshift his weight onto his right leg, so that the samboist can pivot on his left leg to the left to set his hipunder his opponent as in the basic ploy.
Throw over the Hip with an Entry by Swapping
The samboist’s left hand griright hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. Quickly and strongly, the samboist forces his opponentto shift his body weight over his heels. Then the samboist strongly jerks with botsimultaneously thrusts his right hip under his opponent as the samboist pivots on his right foot as hewould do in the basic ploy.
The approach by swapping is a very active ploy, but for it to be applied, the opponent’s weightmust be properly manipulated, and the hip inserted with excellent timing in the “swap”.
Sweeping Hip Throw from the Throw over the Hip
The samboist begins the basic ploy, “the throw over the hip” with his right buttock intercepting theinner part of his opponent’s right thigh. Shifting his body weight over his left leg, the samboist uses hisright leg to apply the “sweeping hip throw” as shown in the ploy under that name.
ight hand is on his opponent’s right shoulder. Then, his left hand movesbetween their bodies by his opponent’s right side to wrap around his back. Quickly, the samboist sets hisleft buttock and throws his opponent forward over the samboist’s back without releasing his right armwhile attempting not to allow him to brace his left arm on the ground (Figure 61).
Figure 61
Throw over the Hip by Approaching around the Leg
If the opponent stands in a left stance with his right leg advanced, shown in theopponent can easily attack the samboist with a lateral sweeping throw under the samboist’s advancedright leg. In this case, the samboist would be better served to approach from around the leg. Thus, heshould use his left hand to grip his opponent’s jacket under the right elbow while his right hand shouldgrip the back of his opponent’s belt. The samboist’s left leg should be set, so that its heel is by hisopponent’s toes on his left foot to maximize the samboist’s turn to the left. He then forces his opponent toshift his weight onto his right leg, so that the samboist can pivot on his left leg to the left to set his hipunder his opponent as in the basic ploy.
Throw over the Hip with an Entry by Swapping
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under his right elbow, and the samboist’sright hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. Quickly and strongly, the samboist forces his opponentto shift his body weight over his heels. Then the samboist strongly jerks with both hands toward him andsimultaneously thrusts his right hip under his opponent as the samboist pivots on his right foot as he
The approach by swapping is a very active ploy, but for it to be applied, the opponent’s weighte properly manipulated, and the hip inserted with excellent timing in the “swap”.
Sweeping Hip Throw from the Throw over the Hip
Figure 62
The samboist begins the basic ploy, “the throw over the hip” with his right buttock intercepting theof his opponent’s right thigh. Shifting his body weight over his left leg, the samboist uses his
right leg to apply the “sweeping hip throw” as shown in the ploy under that name.
ight hand is on his opponent’s right shoulder. Then, his left hand movesbetween their bodies by his opponent’s right side to wrap around his back. Quickly, the samboist sets his
ut releasing his right arm
Throw over the Hip by Approaching around the Leg
If the opponent stands in a left stance with his right leg advanced, shown in the basic ploy, theopponent can easily attack the samboist with a lateral sweeping throw under the samboist’s advancedright leg. In this case, the samboist would be better served to approach from around the leg. Thus, he
s opponent’s jacket under the right elbow while his right hand shouldgrip the back of his opponent’s belt. The samboist’s left leg should be set, so that its heel is by his
then forces his opponent toshift his weight onto his right leg, so that the samboist can pivot on his left leg to the left to set his hip
Throw over the Hip with an Entry by Swapping
ps his opponent’s jacket under his right elbow, and the samboist’sright hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt. Quickly and strongly, the samboist forces his opponent
h hands toward him andsimultaneously thrusts his right hip under his opponent as the samboist pivots on his right foot as he
The approach by swapping is a very active ploy, but for it to be applied, the opponent’s weighte properly manipulated, and the hip inserted with excellent timing in the “swap”.
Sweeping Hip Throw from the Throw over the Hip
The samboist begins the basic ploy, “the throw over the hip” with his right buttock intercepting theof his opponent’s right thigh. Shifting his body weight over his left leg, the samboist uses his
Under Hooking from the Throw over the Hip
To begin this ploy, do as aboveleg, his right leg, bent at the knee, moves to the right. Then, the samboist presses his right shin/calf areaoutside of his opponent’s right shin, so that the shin is blocked (Figure 62).opponent upward by straightening his left leg as his right calf drives his opponent leftward and over hisback, so that his opponent’s unsupported body must fall with his back onto the mat.
Throws by Gripping the Arm with the
The Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s uniform under the right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket at theshoulder. By jerking his arms, the samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight over up onto histoes. At the same time that his arms are jerking, the samboist advances his left foot, so that its heel isclose to his opponent’s toes on histo the left.
He continues to pull on his opponent in the direction that his toes are facing as he steps his rightfoot close to his body as his right arm grips his opponent’s risamboist sharply turns his body to the left as his right leg swings in an arc behind his opponent as thesamboist sets his right palm on the mat with a left and forward motion before reclining on his right side toforce his opponent to somersault onto his back (Figure 63).
Mitigating the opponent’s fall includes holding the opponent’s right arm and shoulder close in tothe samboist’s body as he hits the mat when rolling over the samboist. Also the sacare not to land on his opponent, and to ensure that he does not, the samboist must first recline onto hisright side.
The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for the diagonal somersault onto theback.
The best position for the opponent to be in to apply the throw by gripping the arm under thearmpit is when opponent bends or leans forward and is pushing with his arms.
The best preparation for setting up the throw occurs by:
a) Institution;b) Institution with a grip
following ploy).
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit Set up by Institution
Under Hooking from the Throw over the Hip
To begin this ploy, do as above. As soon as the body weight is shifted over the samboist’s leftleg, his right leg, bent at the knee, moves to the right. Then, the samboist presses his right shin/calf areaoutside of his opponent’s right shin, so that the shin is blocked (Figure 62). The samboist lifts hisopponent upward by straightening his left leg as his right calf drives his opponent leftward and over hisback, so that his opponent’s unsupported body must fall with his back onto the mat.
Throws by Gripping the Arm with the Armpit
The Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s uniform under the right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket at theshoulder. By jerking his arms, the samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight over up onto histoes. At the same time that his arms are jerking, the samboist advances his left foot, so that its heel isclose to his opponent’s toes on his left leg, so that the samboist’s toes on his left foot are facing decidedly
He continues to pull on his opponent in the direction that his toes are facing as he steps his rightfoot close to his body as his right arm grips his opponent’s right shoulder under his armpit. Then, thesamboist sharply turns his body to the left as his right leg swings in an arc behind his opponent as thesamboist sets his right palm on the mat with a left and forward motion before reclining on his right side toforce his opponent to somersault onto his back (Figure 63).
Figure 63
Mitigating the opponent’s fall includes holding the opponent’s right arm and shoulder close in tothe samboist’s body as he hits the mat when rolling over the samboist. Also the sacare not to land on his opponent, and to ensure that he does not, the samboist must first recline onto his
The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for the diagonal somersault onto the
osition for the opponent to be in to apply the throw by gripping the arm under thearmpit is when opponent bends or leans forward and is pushing with his arms.
The best preparation for setting up the throw occurs by:
Institution with a grip by the same side armpit beside the opponent’s back (as shown in the
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit Set up by Institution
Under Hooking from the Throw over the Hip
. As soon as the body weight is shifted over the samboist’s leftleg, his right leg, bent at the knee, moves to the right. Then, the samboist presses his right shin/calf area
The samboist lifts hisopponent upward by straightening his left leg as his right calf drives his opponent leftward and over hisback, so that his opponent’s unsupported body must fall with his back onto the mat.
Armpit
The Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s uniform under the right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket at the leftshoulder. By jerking his arms, the samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight over up onto histoes. At the same time that his arms are jerking, the samboist advances his left foot, so that its heel is
left leg, so that the samboist’s toes on his left foot are facing decidedly
He continues to pull on his opponent in the direction that his toes are facing as he steps his rightght shoulder under his armpit. Then, the
samboist sharply turns his body to the left as his right leg swings in an arc behind his opponent as thesamboist sets his right palm on the mat with a left and forward motion before reclining on his right side to
Mitigating the opponent’s fall includes holding the opponent’s right arm and shoulder close in tothe samboist’s body as he hits the mat when rolling over the samboist. Also the samboist must take greatcare not to land on his opponent, and to ensure that he does not, the samboist must first recline onto his
The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for the diagonal somersault onto the
osition for the opponent to be in to apply the throw by gripping the arm under the
by the same side armpit beside the opponent’s back (as shown in the
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit Set up by Institution
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleevewhile his right hand goes over his opponent’s right shoulder to grip his jacket behind his right armpit. Thesamboist draws on his opponent, so that his opponent shifts his body weight over his right leg. Holdinghis opponent with his left arm, the samboist appforce his opponent to take a wide diagonal step on his left leg. Intercepting his opponent’s left leg with hisown left leg, the samboist applies the throw by gripping the arm under the armpit as
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit with the Foot Hook
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. The samboisthis body weight onto his heels and simultaneously sets his left foot to the outside of his opponent’s rightfoot. The samboist pivots left on his left foot to place his right leg between himself and his opponent, sothat he can release his previous grip with his right hand to grip his opponent’s right arm under his rightarmpit. Bending his right knee, the samboist’s right leg and toes hook his opponent’s right leg on the shincloser to his foot (Figure 64).
The samboist sits down as close as possible to his left heel while strongly turning his body to theleft to force his opponent to roll onto his back on the mat.
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for the half somersault onto the back.
Throws by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder and Forearm
The Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’to shift his weight over his right leg before turning his back on this opponent by pivoting left on his rightfoot with his heel turned to his opponent’s toes. His hand arm grips his opponent’s right armpositions his right shoulder under his opponent’s right armpit (Figure 65). Firmly drawing the trapped armto the samboist and his shoulder, the samboist sharply leans forward on his half bent knees.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeveis right hand goes over his opponent’s right shoulder to grip his jacket behind his right armpit. The
samboist draws on his opponent, so that his opponent shifts his body weight over his right leg. Holdinghis opponent with his left arm, the samboist applies a motion with his right arm that is slightly upward toforce his opponent to take a wide diagonal step on his left leg. Intercepting his opponent’s left leg with hisown left leg, the samboist applies the throw by gripping the arm under the armpit as
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit with the Foot Hook
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,and his right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. The samboist forces his opponent to shifthis body weight onto his heels and simultaneously sets his left foot to the outside of his opponent’s rightfoot. The samboist pivots left on his left foot to place his right leg between himself and his opponent, so
an release his previous grip with his right hand to grip his opponent’s right arm under his rightarmpit. Bending his right knee, the samboist’s right leg and toes hook his opponent’s right leg on the shin
Figure 64
samboist sits down as close as possible to his left heel while strongly turning his body to theleft to force his opponent to roll onto his back on the mat.
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for the half somersault onto the back.
Throws by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder and Forearm
The Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. He then forces his opponentto shift his weight over his right leg before turning his back on this opponent by pivoting left on his rightfoot with his heel turned to his opponent’s toes. His hand arm grips his opponent’s right armpositions his right shoulder under his opponent’s right armpit (Figure 65). Firmly drawing the trapped armto the samboist and his shoulder, the samboist sharply leans forward on his half bent knees.
Figure 65 Start for the Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeveis right hand goes over his opponent’s right shoulder to grip his jacket behind his right armpit. The
samboist draws on his opponent, so that his opponent shifts his body weight over his right leg. Holdinglies a motion with his right arm that is slightly upward to
force his opponent to take a wide diagonal step on his left leg. Intercepting his opponent’s left leg with hisown left leg, the samboist applies the throw by gripping the arm under the armpit as described above.
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit with the Foot Hook
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve,forces his opponent to shift
his body weight onto his heels and simultaneously sets his left foot to the outside of his opponent’s rightfoot. The samboist pivots left on his left foot to place his right leg between himself and his opponent, so
an release his previous grip with his right hand to grip his opponent’s right arm under his rightarmpit. Bending his right knee, the samboist’s right leg and toes hook his opponent’s right leg on the shin
samboist sits down as close as possible to his left heel while strongly turning his body to the
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploy for the half somersault onto the back.
Throws by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder and Forearm
The Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket unders jacket on the chest. He then forces his opponent
to shift his weight over his right leg before turning his back on this opponent by pivoting left on his rightfoot with his heel turned to his opponent’s toes. His hand arm grips his opponent’s right arm andpositions his right shoulder under his opponent’s right armpit (Figure 65). Firmly drawing the trapped armto the samboist and his shoulder, the samboist sharply leans forward on his half bent knees.
To mitigate his opponent’s fall, both of the samboist’s hands retain their grip on the opponent’sright sleeve.
To protect himself in the fall, the opponent uses the ploy for somersaulting over the stick.The best position for the opponent to be in to apply this thr
grip the samboist’s neck.The best set-ups and preparations for applying the throw gripping the arm on the shoulder are:
a) By instituting;b) By instituting with a grip by the same side armpit and by executing the ploy as de
the ploys below.
Throw with the Arm Gripped on the Shoulder Prepared from a Leg Grab Attempt
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s jacket under the right sleeve, and his right hand grips attempts to grip his opponent’s leftleg at the outside of the knee crook. In the moment when his opponent is moving back his left leg, thesamboist draws his left hand toward himself and slightly uforward and straighten his right leg which allows the samboist to apply the throw by gripping the arm onthe shoulder as described above.
Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder Prepared by Instituting
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right sleeve, and his right elbow crook grips the back of the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm.The samboist strongly jerks his body and right arm to instattempts to draw his opponent toward his back. When the opponent is to the right of the samboist, heamplifies this motion to apply the throw by gripping the arm over the shoulder.
Throw by Gripping the Arm
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent under his rightarmpit while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent under the same armpit. Turning his back to hisopponent by pivoting on his right leg to the left, so that his heel is beside his opponent’s toes, thesamboist places the shoulder portion of his right arm under his opponent’s right shoulder. Keeping thisarm to his shoulder with his arms and pressing his opponent’sharply leans his body forward and quickly drops down onto both of his knees (Figure 67). He draws hisopponent’s right shoulder as closely as possible to him, and this compels his opponent to execute aforward somersault.
To mitigate his fall, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his hands on the mat.The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for the diagonal somersault to the back, so thathe impacts the mat from his right shoulder
his opponent’s fall, both of the samboist’s hands retain their grip on the opponent’s
To protect himself in the fall, the opponent uses the ploy for somersaulting over the stick.The best position for the opponent to be in to apply this throw is when the opponent attempts to
ups and preparations for applying the throw gripping the arm on the shoulder are:
By instituting with a grip by the same side armpit and by executing the ploy as de
Figure 66 Completing the Throw
Throw with the Arm Gripped on the Shoulder Prepared from a Leg Grab Attempt
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripsjacket under the right sleeve, and his right hand grips attempts to grip his opponent’s left
leg at the outside of the knee crook. In the moment when his opponent is moving back his left leg, thesamboist draws his left hand toward himself and slightly upward. This causes his opponent to leanforward and straighten his right leg which allows the samboist to apply the throw by gripping the arm onthe shoulder as described above.
Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder Prepared by Instituting
tlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right sleeve, and his right elbow crook grips the back of the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm.The samboist strongly jerks his body and right arm to institute the opponent to the right as the samboistattempts to draw his opponent toward his back. When the opponent is to the right of the samboist, heamplifies this motion to apply the throw by gripping the arm over the shoulder.
Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder from the Knees
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent under his rightarmpit while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent under the same armpit. Turning his back to his
pivoting on his right leg to the left, so that his heel is beside his opponent’s toes, thesamboist places the shoulder portion of his right arm under his opponent’s right shoulder. Keeping thisarm to his shoulder with his arms and pressing his opponent’s armpit into his shoulder, the samboistsharply leans his body forward and quickly drops down onto both of his knees (Figure 67). He draws hisopponent’s right shoulder as closely as possible to him, and this compels his opponent to execute a
To mitigate his fall, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his hands on the mat.The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for the diagonal somersault to the back, so thathe impacts the mat from his right shoulder to his left buttock.
his opponent’s fall, both of the samboist’s hands retain their grip on the opponent’s
To protect himself in the fall, the opponent uses the ploy for somersaulting over the stick.ow is when the opponent attempts to
ups and preparations for applying the throw gripping the arm on the shoulder are:
By instituting with a grip by the same side armpit and by executing the ploy as described in
Throw with the Arm Gripped on the Shoulder Prepared from a Leg Grab Attempt
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripsjacket under the right sleeve, and his right hand grips attempts to grip his opponent’s left
leg at the outside of the knee crook. In the moment when his opponent is moving back his left leg, thepward. This causes his opponent to lean
forward and straighten his right leg which allows the samboist to apply the throw by gripping the arm on
Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder Prepared by Instituting
tlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right sleeve, and his right elbow crook grips the back of the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm.
itute the opponent to the right as the samboistattempts to draw his opponent toward his back. When the opponent is to the right of the samboist, he
on the Shoulder from the Knees
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent under his rightarmpit while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent under the same armpit. Turning his back to his
pivoting on his right leg to the left, so that his heel is beside his opponent’s toes, thesamboist places the shoulder portion of his right arm under his opponent’s right shoulder. Keeping this
s armpit into his shoulder, the samboistsharply leans his body forward and quickly drops down onto both of his knees (Figure 67). He draws hisopponent’s right shoulder as closely as possible to him, and this compels his opponent to execute a
To mitigate his fall, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his hands on the mat.The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for the diagonal somersault to the back, so that
Throw Gripping the Arm on the Forearm
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent on his right laphis opponent as he did in the throw with the arm gripped on the shoulder with his right elbow elevatedupward, so that his right forearm is braced into his opponent’s right armpit from below (Figure 68).Basically, this throw is analogous to the throw by gripping the arm on the shoulder.
Throw Gripping the Arm in the Elbow Crook
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow while his right elbow crook gAttempting to draw his right elbow crook upward, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right arm and turns hisback to his opponent as when throwing with the arm gripped on the shoulder, so that he cavery same throw.
Throw by Gripping the Arm in the Elbow Crook and Sitting under
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist or his uniform on his right forearm andthe samboist’s right elbow crook grips the shoulder part of hissamboist sets his right foot inside his opponent’s right foot with his knee moving to the outside (Figure69).
Figure 67
Figure 68
Throw Gripping the Arm on the Forearm
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent on his right lapel. The samboist turns his back onhis opponent as he did in the throw with the arm gripped on the shoulder with his right elbow elevatedupward, so that his right forearm is braced into his opponent’s right armpit from below (Figure 68).
throw is analogous to the throw by gripping the arm on the shoulder.
Throw Gripping the Arm in the Elbow Crook
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underthe right elbow while his right elbow crook grips under his opponent’s right arm at the shoulder joint.Attempting to draw his right elbow crook upward, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right arm and turns hisback to his opponent as when throwing with the arm gripped on the shoulder, so that he ca
Throw by Gripping the Arm in the Elbow Crook and Sitting under
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist or his uniform on his right forearm andthe samboist’s right elbow crook grips the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm from below. Thesamboist sets his right foot inside his opponent’s right foot with his knee moving to the outside (Figure
Figure 69
Throw Gripping the Arm on the Forearm
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underel. The samboist turns his back on
his opponent as he did in the throw with the arm gripped on the shoulder with his right elbow elevatedupward, so that his right forearm is braced into his opponent’s right armpit from below (Figure 68).
throw is analogous to the throw by gripping the arm on the shoulder.
Throw Gripping the Arm in the Elbow Crook
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket underrips under his opponent’s right arm at the shoulder joint.
Attempting to draw his right elbow crook upward, the samboist lifts his opponent’s right arm and turns hisback to his opponent as when throwing with the arm gripped on the shoulder, so that he can apply that
Throw by Gripping the Arm in the Elbow Crook and Sitting under
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist or his uniform on his right forearm andopponent’s right arm from below. The
samboist sets his right foot inside his opponent’s right foot with his knee moving to the outside (Figure
The samboist use both of his arms to strongly press his opponent’s right arm into the sambbody as the samboist sits his left buttock down onto the mat by his right heel. Straightening his left leg toset it as far as possible between his opponent’s legs, the samboist raises the outer edge of his left footfrom the mat. The samboist’s bent right knee must be outside of his opponent’s right leg, and when theopponent leans to the point that he begins to fall onto the samboist, the samboist raises his right legupward to raise his opponent’s right leg. The opponent, then falling over theforward somersault onto his back onto the mat.
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his right handon the mat, and does not allow his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat.
To protect himself from the throw, the opponent applies the diagonal somersault over his rightshoulder and onto his left buttock.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist uses his left armpit to grip hisforearm. Simultaneously, his left hand grips his opponent’s belt by going over top of his opponent’s rightarm. His right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the left shoulder. The samboist steps forward on hisright leg to set his foot between his opponent’s legs. Strongly arching his back, the samboist aligns hisstomach to his opponent’s body from below as he works to throw his opponent over his left shoulder(Figure 70). Falling to the rear, the samboist sharply turns his body tohis opponent and throw him over the samboist’s left shoulder, so that his opponent’s back falls onto themat.
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his right handon the mat, and the samboist does not drop his body weight onto his opponent. The opponent protectshimself from the fall using the diagonal somersault over the right shoulder and onto the left buttock.
The best position for applying the ploy on the opponent occurarms around the samboist’s back.
The preparations and setpressure on the opponent.
The samboist use both of his arms to strongly press his opponent’s right arm into the sambbody as the samboist sits his left buttock down onto the mat by his right heel. Straightening his left leg toset it as far as possible between his opponent’s legs, the samboist raises the outer edge of his left foot
ent right knee must be outside of his opponent’s right leg, and when theopponent leans to the point that he begins to fall onto the samboist, the samboist raises his right legupward to raise his opponent’s right leg. The opponent, then falling over the samboist, executes aforward somersault onto his back onto the mat.
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his right handon the mat, and does not allow his opponent’s right shoulder to strike the mat.
protect himself from the throw, the opponent applies the diagonal somersault over his rightshoulder and onto his left buttock.
Throws over the Shoulder
Figure 70
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist uses his left armpit to grip hisforearm. Simultaneously, his left hand grips his opponent’s belt by going over top of his opponent’s rightarm. His right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the left shoulder. The samboist steps forward on his
t between his opponent’s legs. Strongly arching his back, the samboist aligns hisstomach to his opponent’s body from below as he works to throw his opponent over his left shoulder(Figure 70). Falling to the rear, the samboist sharply turns his body to the left in a circle reckoned to lifthis opponent and throw him over the samboist’s left shoulder, so that his opponent’s back falls onto the
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his right handt, and the samboist does not drop his body weight onto his opponent. The opponent protects
himself from the fall using the diagonal somersault over the right shoulder and onto the left buttock.The best position for applying the ploy on the opponent occurs when the opponent wraps his
arms around the samboist’s back.The preparations and set-ups to use on the opponent for this given throw include organized
The “Mill” Throws
The “Mill”
Figure 71
The samboist use both of his arms to strongly press his opponent’s right arm into the samboist’sbody as the samboist sits his left buttock down onto the mat by his right heel. Straightening his left leg toset it as far as possible between his opponent’s legs, the samboist raises the outer edge of his left foot
ent right knee must be outside of his opponent’s right leg, and when theopponent leans to the point that he begins to fall onto the samboist, the samboist raises his right leg
samboist, executes a
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his right hand
protect himself from the throw, the opponent applies the diagonal somersault over his right
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist uses his left armpit to grip his opponent’s rightforearm. Simultaneously, his left hand grips his opponent’s belt by going over top of his opponent’s rightarm. His right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the left shoulder. The samboist steps forward on his
t between his opponent’s legs. Strongly arching his back, the samboist aligns hisstomach to his opponent’s body from below as he works to throw his opponent over his left shoulder
the left in a circle reckoned to lifthis opponent and throw him over the samboist’s left shoulder, so that his opponent’s back falls onto the
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist does not permit his opponent to brace his right handt, and the samboist does not drop his body weight onto his opponent. The opponent protects
himself from the fall using the diagonal somersault over the right shoulder and onto the left buttock.s when the opponent wraps his
ups to use on the opponent for this given throw include organized
Both wrestlers are in right stanright sleeve. The samboist then applies a strong left hand jerk toward him that is angled slightly upwardas he simultaneously lunges under his opponent’s right shoulder, so that the uppmeets his opponent’s stomach (Figure 71). The samboist’s right hand grips the inside of his opponent’sright knee crook, and the samboist energetically lifts his opponent upward driving his opponent’s trappedleg to the right. When the opponent’s body attains a 90 degree angle to the samboist’s body, thesamboist throws his opponent’s right arm and shoulder upward. Simultaneously, the samboist steps backwith his left leg toward his left and rear pulling with his left hand downwaopponent’s right arm leads his opponent to fall with his back on the ground.
The samboist protects his falling opponent by using his left hand grip to pull up on his opponent’strapped right arm.
The opponent protects hon the left side.
The samboist’s right hand goes over his opponent’s right shoulder to grip his uniform frombehind. The samboist’s left handhis opponent, so that his shoulders are under his opponent, and he can throw his opponent toward hisright leg by forcing his opponent into a forward somersault to land his back on the
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist’s left hand retains its grip on his opponent, and heforces his opponent into a smooth forward somersault.
The opponent protects himself in falling by using the ploy for the forward somersault.
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right forearm while his right hand grips hisopponent’s left wrist, so that the samboist’s thumb and index fingers are close to the inside of theopponent’s thumb than to his little finger. Slightly turning the opponent’s left arm inward, the samboistdraws his opponent close to place his opponent up onto his back (Figure 73). The samboist can throwhis opponent to either the right or the left. If he throws to the right, hishis opponent’s right arm.
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips the upper side of his opponent’sright sleeve. The samboist then applies a strong left hand jerk toward him that is angled slightly upwardas he simultaneously lunges under his opponent’s right shoulder, so that the upper part of his right sidemeets his opponent’s stomach (Figure 71). The samboist’s right hand grips the inside of his opponent’sright knee crook, and the samboist energetically lifts his opponent upward driving his opponent’s trapped
hen the opponent’s body attains a 90 degree angle to the samboist’s body, thesamboist throws his opponent’s right arm and shoulder upward. Simultaneously, the samboist steps backwith his left leg toward his left and rear pulling with his left hand downward and toward himself, so that hisopponent’s right arm leads his opponent to fall with his back on the ground.
The samboist protects his falling opponent by using his left hand grip to pull up on his opponent’s
The opponent protects himself from the fall using the ploy for somersaulting over the stick to land
The Reverse “Mill”
Figure 72
The samboist’s right hand goes over his opponent’s right shoulder to grip his uniform frombehind. The samboist’s left hand grips the inside of his opponent’s left knee crook, and he steps underhis opponent, so that his shoulders are under his opponent, and he can throw his opponent toward hisright leg by forcing his opponent into a forward somersault to land his back on the
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist’s left hand retains its grip on his opponent, and heforces his opponent into a smooth forward somersault.
The opponent protects himself in falling by using the ploy for the forward somersault.
The “Mill” Gripping Both Hands
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right forearm while his right hand grips hisopponent’s left wrist, so that the samboist’s thumb and index fingers are close to the inside of the
little finger. Slightly turning the opponent’s left arm inward, the samboistdraws his opponent close to place his opponent up onto his back (Figure 73). The samboist can throwhis opponent to either the right or the left. If he throws to the right, his left hand must release its grip on
ce. The samboist’s left hand grips the upper side of his opponent’sright sleeve. The samboist then applies a strong left hand jerk toward him that is angled slightly upward
er part of his right sidemeets his opponent’s stomach (Figure 71). The samboist’s right hand grips the inside of his opponent’sright knee crook, and the samboist energetically lifts his opponent upward driving his opponent’s trapped
hen the opponent’s body attains a 90 degree angle to the samboist’s body, thesamboist throws his opponent’s right arm and shoulder upward. Simultaneously, the samboist steps back
rd and toward himself, so that his
The samboist protects his falling opponent by using his left hand grip to pull up on his opponent’s
imself from the fall using the ploy for somersaulting over the stick to land
The samboist’s right hand goes over his opponent’s right shoulder to grip his uniform fromgrips the inside of his opponent’s left knee crook, and he steps under
his opponent, so that his shoulders are under his opponent, and he can throw his opponent toward hisright leg by forcing his opponent into a forward somersault to land his back on the mat (Figure 72).
To protect his falling opponent, the samboist’s left hand retains its grip on his opponent, and he
The opponent protects himself in falling by using the ploy for the forward somersault.
The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right forearm while his right hand grips hisopponent’s left wrist, so that the samboist’s thumb and index fingers are close to the inside of the
little finger. Slightly turning the opponent’s left arm inward, the samboistdraws his opponent close to place his opponent up onto his back (Figure 73). The samboist can throw
left hand must release its grip on
Mitigating the opponent’s fall requires keeping a hand gripping on the side that the opponent isthrown to.
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploys for falling o
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket on theshoulder part of his right arm while his right hand grips his opponent’s belt on the stomach closeright side. The samboist applies a strong jerk toward him with his left hand with a slight upward vectorallowing the samboist to duck under his opponent to place the upper part of his right shoulder into hisopponent’s stomach close to where hiselbow as high as possible to the left, so that it is outside of his opponent’s right thigh as he firmly drawshis opponent to his shoulders to energetically lift his opponent upward (Figure 7to the basic “mill”.
Combinations of throws in sambothree throws. The basic throw is considered to be included in the combination. Incombination, it is ordered in reverse from the final throw used to the first throw applied which is defined asthe basic or initial throw, or the throw “from”.
Combinations may be characterized through one of two roles:
1) Combinations that are based upon what develops from the first throw. In these combinations,subsequent throws develop from the previous effort that begins with a previous throw, so that the ensuingactions are directed from what happened in the initial throw.
2) Combinations that are based upon the opponent’s counter actions to the initial throw. Thesecombinations are directed to the side or the opposite side of the opponent’s actions to counter the initialthrow.
In composing combinations of throws it is veryfrom the first throw to subsequent throws. If the selected grip is unable to support the transition from thefirst to a second throw, that grip must change to transition from the first to the second throwgreater goal of the throw is threatened.
If it is impossible to maintain a single grip between two throws, then the continuity of thecombination requires a convenient transition from the first grip to the second grip.
Within this book, we give buhis work develop other combinations for the given throws.
Combinations Based on What Develops in the First Throw
Figure 73
Mitigating the opponent’s fall requires keeping a hand gripping on the side that the opponent is
The opponent protects himself in the fall using the ploys for falling onto the side.
The “Mill” By Gripping the Belt
Figure 74
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket on theshoulder part of his right arm while his right hand grips his opponent’s belt on the stomach closeright side. The samboist applies a strong jerk toward him with his left hand with a slight upward vectorallowing the samboist to duck under his opponent to place the upper part of his right shoulder into hisopponent’s stomach close to where his right hand is gripping his opponent’s belt. He raises his rightelbow as high as possible to the left, so that it is outside of his opponent’s right thigh as he firmly drawshis opponent to his shoulders to energetically lift his opponent upward (Figure 74). This ploy is analogous
Throwing Combinations
Combinations of throws in sambo-wrestling are defined as the subsequent execution of two orthree throws. The basic throw is considered to be included in the combination. Incombination, it is ordered in reverse from the final throw used to the first throw applied which is defined asthe basic or initial throw, or the throw “from”.
Combinations may be characterized through one of two roles:
that are based upon what develops from the first throw. In these combinations,subsequent throws develop from the previous effort that begins with a previous throw, so that the ensuingactions are directed from what happened in the initial throw.
Combinations that are based upon the opponent’s counter actions to the initial throw. Thesecombinations are directed to the side or the opposite side of the opponent’s actions to counter the initial
In composing combinations of throws it is very important to use gripping that facilitates movingfrom the first throw to subsequent throws. If the selected grip is unable to support the transition from thefirst to a second throw, that grip must change to transition from the first to the second throwgreater goal of the throw is threatened.
If it is impossible to maintain a single grip between two throws, then the continuity of thecombination requires a convenient transition from the first grip to the second grip.
Within this book, we give but the most basic combinations. Every trainer must in the process ofhis work develop other combinations for the given throws.
Combinations Based on What Develops in the First Throw
Mitigating the opponent’s fall requires keeping a hand gripping on the side that the opponent is
nto the side.
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket on theshoulder part of his right arm while his right hand grips his opponent’s belt on the stomach close to theright side. The samboist applies a strong jerk toward him with his left hand with a slight upward vectorallowing the samboist to duck under his opponent to place the upper part of his right shoulder into his
right hand is gripping his opponent’s belt. He raises his rightelbow as high as possible to the left, so that it is outside of his opponent’s right thigh as he firmly draws
4). This ploy is analogous
wrestling are defined as the subsequent execution of two orthree throws. The basic throw is considered to be included in the combination. In defining a throwingcombination, it is ordered in reverse from the final throw used to the first throw applied which is defined as
that are based upon what develops from the first throw. In these combinations,subsequent throws develop from the previous effort that begins with a previous throw, so that the ensuing
Combinations that are based upon the opponent’s counter actions to the initial throw. Thesecombinations are directed to the side or the opposite side of the opponent’s actions to counter the initial
important to use gripping that facilitates movingfrom the first throw to subsequent throws. If the selected grip is unable to support the transition from thefirst to a second throw, that grip must change to transition from the first to the second throw then the
If it is impossible to maintain a single grip between two throws, then the continuity of thecombination requires a convenient transition from the first grip to the second grip.
t the most basic combinations. Every trainer must in the process of
Combinations Based on What Develops in the First Throw
The Throw with a Reverse Grip on Two Legs from the Lateral SweepingThrow
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform at the elbows. Hethen begins to execute the lateral sweeping throw with his left leg under his opponent’s right leg, andwhen his opponent’s leg is sufficiently lifted, the samboist quickly steps his left leg forward to apply thereverse leg grip with both hands.
Rear Stepping Throw from the Rear Knee Sweep
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket at theright sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent’s uniform on the chest. The samboist begins to applythe rear knee sweeping throw to the right knee, and when his opponent begins to bend the attacked knee,the samboist transitions to the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg.
Rear Stepping Throw from the Lateral Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform under the elbows.He begins to apply the lateral sweeping throw with his left leg under his opponent’s right leg, and whenhis opponent’s right leg is raised sufficiently high, the samboist quickly steps forward on his left leg withhis toes turned left. Without giving his opponent time to reset his right leg on the mat, the samboistexecutes the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s left leg. In the moment when thesamboist’s right leg begins its arc for the stepping throw his right hand shifts its grip to the opponent’sjacket in the chest area.
Front Stepping Throw from the Inside Knee Sweep
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s right sleeve while the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Thesamboist begins to apply the inside knee sweeping throw, and when his opponent’s left leg is raisedsufficiently high, the samboist transitions to the front stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’sright leg.
Laterally Stepping Throw from the Lateral Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist grips his opponent’s jacket under the elbows.The samboist begins to apply the lateral sweeping throw, and when his opponent’s right leg is raisedsufficiently high, the samboist transitions to the lateral stepping throw with his left leg set so that his heelis set far enough that his opponent cannot step his right leg over the samboist’s left leg.
Rear Sweeping Throw with a Reverse Leg Grip from the Lateral SweepingThrow
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist grips his opponent’s uniform under the elbows.The samboist begins to apply the lateral sweeping throw, and when his opponent’s left leg is raisedsufficiently high, the samboist’s right forearm grips his opponent’s left knee crook from the outside. Hetransitions to the rear sweeping throw with his left heel under his opponent’s left heel. When hisopponent fall is assured, the samboist releases his right hand grip on his opponent’s leg.
Mitigating his opponent’s fall requires the samboist to retain his left hand grip on his opponent’sright sleeve.
Inside Knee Sweep from the Throw over the Hip
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips this opponent’s jacket under theright elbow, and the samboist’s right moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his jacket.The samboist then begins to apply the throw over the hip, and as soon as he has turned his back to hisopponent, his right foot guides his knee to sweep inside of the inner part of his opponent’s right knee.
Springing Inner Hip Throw from the Inside Sweep at the Knee
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s jacket under the right elbow, and his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm togrip the back of his jacket. The samboist begins to execute the inside knee sweep throw with his right legunder his opponent’s left leg. As soon as his opponent’s left leg is sufficiently raised, the samboistapplies the springing inner hip throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg.
Major Outer Reaping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside from theInside Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under theright elbow, and the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the chest. The samboist’s rightleg executes the inside sweeping throw under his opponent’s right leg. When his opponent’s right leg issufficiently raised, the samboist grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee with his left hand. Withoutreleasing his opponent’s right leg after the opponent is swept to the mat, the samboist applies the majorouter reaping throw under his opponent’s left leg from the inside.
“Scissors” from the Lateral Sweeping Throw
The opponent is in left stance, and the samboist is in right stance. The samboist grips hisopponent’s jacket under the elbows. The samboist begins the lateral sweeping throw with his right legunder his opponent’s left leg. When his opponent’s left leg is sufficiently lifted from the mat, the samboistexecutes the “scissors” throw so that his right leg is planted in his opponent’s chest, and his left leg isbehind his opponent’s knees.
COMBINATIONS BASED UPON WHAT DEVELOPS FROM THEOPPONENT’S RESISTANCE TO THE INITIAL THROW
Throw by Gripping the Legs from the Throw over the HipBoth wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s jacket under
the right elbow, and his right hand moves under his opponent’s left arm to grip the back of his opponent’sjacket. The samboist begins to execute the throw over the hip. When the samboist’s back is turned to hisopponent, he senses his opponent’s resistance by his opponent bending his knees and leaning to therear, so the samboist quickly grips the outside of both of his opponent’s knees to apply the throw bygripping both legs.
Front Stepping Throw from the Inside Hooking Throw
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s right sleeve, and the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. Thesamboist uses his right leg to begin the execution of the inside hooking throw under his opponent’s leftleg, and when he begins to feel his opponent’s resistance by attempting to drive the samboist away fromhim, the samboist quickly guides his right leg (without setting on the ground when releasing his hook) intothe front stepping throw under his opponent’s right leg.
Front Stepping Throw at the Heel from the Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket at the right clavicle. The samboist beginsto apply the rear stepping throw, and when his opponent begins to move the attacked leg (the right leg)and uses his arms to drive the samboist back, the samboist quickly executes the front stepping throw atthe heel.
Inside Hooking Throw from the Throw over the Hip
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and the samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. The samboistbegins to apply the throw over the hip. When he turns his back to his opponent, he feels his opponent’sresistance because his opponent is bending his knees and leaning to the rear, so the samboist quicklyapplies the inside hooking throw with his right leg under his opponent’s left leg.
Front Sweeping Throw from the Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent uniform under theright sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent’s jacket over the right clavicle. The samboist begins toapply the rear stepping throw, and when his opponent moves his right leg back and begins to use hisarms to drive the samboist away from him, the samboist quickly applies the front sweeping throw with hisleft leg under his opponent’s right leg.
Front Sweeping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside from theInside Hooking Throw
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left hand gripshis opponent’s right sleeve while his right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. The samboist useshis right leg to begin the inside hooking throw under his opponent’s left leg. When the trapped leg is liftedfrom the ground and the opponent begins to resist, the samboist’s right hand grips the outside of hisopponent’s left knee. From there, the samboist sweeps his opponent’s right leg from the mat using hisleft leg.
Springing Hip Throw from the Inside Hooking Throw
The opponent is in left stance while the samboist is in right stance. The samboist’s left-hand griphis opponent’s right sleeve, and his right hand grips his opponent’s left shoulder cuff. The samboist’sright leg applies the inside hooking throw to his opponent’s left leg, and when the samboist feels hisopponent’s resistance, he quickly, without moving his right leg back to the ground after the failed hook,applies the springing hip throw under his opponent’s right leg.
Major Outer Reaping Throw from the Inside Hooking Throw and the Throwover the Hip from the Inside Hooking Throw
Both of these combinations are applied similarly to the combination above: the springing hipthrow from the inside hooking throw.
Throw by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit from the Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s uniform underthe right elbow, and his right hand grips his opponent’s right lapel. The samboist begins to apply the rearstepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s right leg. When his opponent begins to move his
attacked leg to the rear, and his arms begin to drive the samboist away from him, the samboist quicklyapplies the throw by gripping the opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s armpit.
DEFENSES AGAINST THE BASIC THROWS
Defense against throws are defined as those actions directed toward stopping or mitigating theopponent’s throw. Pure defense without offensive ploys is not a true path toward victory. In his defensethough, the samboist must work to stop an opponent’s throw as it begins or as it develops.
Defenses against the Throw That Is Beginning
Stopping the opponent’s body motion can be accomplished by the samboist bracing a palmagainst an appropriate part of his opponent’s body—for example, if the opponent initiates the throw overthe hip by gripping the samboist’s back from under the samboist’s left arm, the samboist must brace hisleft palm into his opponent’s right hip joint. Stopping the opponent’s body motion by bracing against hiship joint can be accomplished successfully when the opponent applies:
a) The front stepping throw,b) The sweeping hip throw,c) The throw over the hip,d) The throw by gripping the arm under the armpit,e) The throw by gripping the arm on the shoulder.
To stop the opponent’s body motion by bracing against his shoulder joint can be successfullyapplied when the opponent applies:
a) The “mill”,b) The throw by gripping both legs,c) All throws by gripping the outside of the leg.
Stopping the Attacking Limb
The attacking limb can be stopped by the samboist’s hand or arm. For example, the opponentattacks with the throw over the head. As he attempts to set his right foot in the samboist’s stomach, thesamboist’s left hand parries his opponent’s attacking foot right foot away from his body and to the right.
Parrying the attacking limb can be successfully applied against:
a) The throw by gripping both legs,b) The “mill”,c) The rear stepping throw and the major outer reaping throw,d) The throw over the heade) The “scissors” and the “saddle”.
Stopping the Attacking Leg
The attacking leg can be addressed through counter gripping including by the samboist grippingthe attacking leg. For example, the opponent initiates a rear stepping throw with his right leg under thesamboist’s right leg, so the samboist moves his attacked leg back and counters by attacking his incomingopponent. Stopping the opponent’s attacking leg can be successfully applied against the:
a) Throw by gripping both legs (by stopping the opponent’s front leg)b) Rear stepping throw and major outer reaping throw,c) Inside hooking throw,
d) Foot hook and lateral sweeping throwe) “Mill”.
Loading the Opponent’s Attacking Leg
In attacking the samboist with his leg, the opponent removes his body weight from his attackingleg, and the samboist can take quick advantage of his to push his opponent. If the push compels hisopponent to shift his weight back onto his attacking leg, then the opponent cannot execute his intendedattack. For example, the opponent attempts to appdraws the leg to attack, the samboist pulls his opponent to the left and away from him in to move hisopponent on the mat, so that as his opponent begins to attack with the rear stepping throw, he cannocomplete his intended throw. Loading the opponent’s attacking leg can be most successfully appliedwhen the opponent attempts to the:
a) Rear stepping throw or major outer reaping throw,b) Laterally sweeping throw and foot hooks.
When applying his throw, the opponent stands so that he is close to the samboist in a mannerthat permits the samboist to hook his opponent’s leg with his foot. Thus, the foot hook is a reasonablecounter as the opponent begins his throw. For example, tsamboist’s back, and he begins to apply the throw over the hip, so that he turns his back to the samboistwho therefore applies his left foot to hook his opponent’s left shin or calf, or the samboist can use his leftshin from the outside to prevent his opponent from being able to complete the throw over the hip (Figure75).
Exploiting the foot and shin hook occurs most successfully against the:
a) Front sweeping throw by using foot hook to the inside ofb) Throw over the hip by using the inside foot hook to the opponent’s same shin or by hooking
the outside of the opponent’s same side leg,c) Throw by both arms gripping the shoulder with the foot hook being applied as it was wi
throw over the hip.
Defense against the Developing Throw
Stepping over the Attacking Leg
If the opponent attacks to throwover the attacking leg and shift his body weight into his opponent.the rear stepping throw with his right leg set behind the samboist’s right leg, the samboist stepsback with his right leg over his opponent’s attacking right leg to prevent his opponent from throwinghim with the rear stepping throw. Stepping over the attacking leg can best be applied against theopponent when he attempts the:
Foot hook and lateral sweeping throw
Loading the Opponent’s Attacking Leg
In attacking the samboist with his leg, the opponent removes his body weight from his attackingleg, and the samboist can take quick advantage of his to push his opponent. If the push compels hisopponent to shift his weight back onto his attacking leg, then the opponent cannot execute his intendedattack. For example, the opponent attempts to apply a rear stepping throw with his right leg, so as hedraws the leg to attack, the samboist pulls his opponent to the left and away from him in to move hisopponent on the mat, so that as his opponent begins to attack with the rear stepping throw, he cannocomplete his intended throw. Loading the opponent’s attacking leg can be most successfully appliedwhen the opponent attempts to the:
Rear stepping throw or major outer reaping throw,Laterally sweeping throw and foot hooks.
Hooking the Foot and Shin
When applying his throw, the opponent stands so that he is close to the samboist in a mannerthat permits the samboist to hook his opponent’s leg with his foot. Thus, the foot hook is a reasonablecounter as the opponent begins his throw. For example, the opponent keeps his right hand on thesamboist’s back, and he begins to apply the throw over the hip, so that he turns his back to the samboistwho therefore applies his left foot to hook his opponent’s left shin or calf, or the samboist can use his leftshin from the outside to prevent his opponent from being able to complete the throw over the hip (Figure
Figure 75
Exploiting the foot and shin hook occurs most successfully against the:
Front sweeping throw by using foot hook to the inside of the opponent’s opposite side leg,Throw over the hip by using the inside foot hook to the opponent’s same shin or by hookingthe outside of the opponent’s same side leg,Throw by both arms gripping the shoulder with the foot hook being applied as it was wi
Defense against the Developing Throw
Stepping over the Attacking Leg
If the opponent attacks to throw the samboist, and the samboist has time available, he should stepover the attacking leg and shift his body weight into his opponent. For example, the opponentthe rear stepping throw with his right leg set behind the samboist’s right leg, the samboist stepsback with his right leg over his opponent’s attacking right leg to prevent his opponent from throwinghim with the rear stepping throw. Stepping over the attacking leg can best be applied against theopponent when he attempts the:
Loading the Opponent’s Attacking Leg
In attacking the samboist with his leg, the opponent removes his body weight from his attackingleg, and the samboist can take quick advantage of his to push his opponent. If the push compels hisopponent to shift his weight back onto his attacking leg, then the opponent cannot execute his intended
ly a rear stepping throw with his right leg, so as hedraws the leg to attack, the samboist pulls his opponent to the left and away from him in to move hisopponent on the mat, so that as his opponent begins to attack with the rear stepping throw, he cannotcomplete his intended throw. Loading the opponent’s attacking leg can be most successfully applied
When applying his throw, the opponent stands so that he is close to the samboist in a mannerthat permits the samboist to hook his opponent’s leg with his foot. Thus, the foot hook is a reasonable
he opponent keeps his right hand on thesamboist’s back, and he begins to apply the throw over the hip, so that he turns his back to the samboistwho therefore applies his left foot to hook his opponent’s left shin or calf, or the samboist can use his leftshin from the outside to prevent his opponent from being able to complete the throw over the hip (Figure
the opponent’s opposite side leg,Throw over the hip by using the inside foot hook to the opponent’s same shin or by hooking
Throw by both arms gripping the shoulder with the foot hook being applied as it was with the
Defense against the Developing Throw
and the samboist has time available, he should stepFor example, the opponent, applies
the rear stepping throw with his right leg set behind the samboist’s right leg, the samboist stepsback with his right leg over his opponent’s attacking right leg to prevent his opponent from throwinghim with the rear stepping throw. Stepping over the attacking leg can best be applied against the
a) Rear, front, or lateral stepping throws,b) Inside hooking throw,c) Front, lateral, or rear sweeping throws and the inside sweeping throw.
Shifting the Opponent’s Weight over His Supporting Leg
If the opponent in attacking the samboistattacks, often the samboist with relatively little effort can shift his opponent’s weight so that all of hisopponent’s weight is over is supporting leg, and to retain his balance, his opponent will be forced to break offhis attack. For example, the opponent attacks the samboist with a front stepping throwto the samboist and moves his right leg to apply the stepping throw. At this point, the opponent’s body weightis set over his left leg, so if the samboist jerbalance, the opponent cannot complete his attack with the stepping throw.
To defend by shifting the opponent’s weight over his supporting leg, the samboist can be most successfulwhen his opponent attacks with the:
a) Front stepping throw.
b) Inside or outside hooking throw
c) Lifting throws
d) Sweeping hip throw.
Hooking when Lifted from the Mat
If the opponent attacks to throw by lifting the samboist from the mat, the samboist can oftensuccessfully counter by applying a shin or foot hook.
For example, if the opponent grips the samboist to apply the “mill”, as the opponent lifts thesamboist from the ground, the samboist hooks the shin from his free leg to the outside of his opponent’snear leg (Figure 76).
This ploy can be exploited against being lifted from the mat when the opponent applies the:
a) “Mill” where the samboist hooks his free shin to the outside of his opponent’s near leg,
b) Turnover and lifting throws by hooking the foot insid
When the opponent applies a throw, he may unbalance the samboist intending to throw thesamboist onto his back, but as the samboist begins to fall, he may work to land on his side, his stomach,or onto all fours, so that from one of these positions the samboist can regain his feet and continue to
stepping throws,Inside hooking throw,Front, lateral, or rear sweeping throws and the inside sweeping throw.
Shifting the Opponent’s Weight over His Supporting Leg
If the opponent in attacking the samboist, shifts his body weight over one of his legs tattacks, often the samboist with relatively little effort can shift his opponent’s weight so that all of hisopponent’s weight is over is supporting leg, and to retain his balance, his opponent will be forced to break off
he opponent attacks the samboist with a front stepping throwto the samboist and moves his right leg to apply the stepping throw. At this point, the opponent’s body weightis set over his left leg, so if the samboist jerks his opponent to the left and away from him, to maintain hisbalance, the opponent cannot complete his attack with the stepping throw.
To defend by shifting the opponent’s weight over his supporting leg, the samboist can be most successfulent attacks with the:
Inside or outside hooking throw
Hooking when Lifted from the Mat
If the opponent attacks to throw by lifting the samboist from the mat, the samboist can oftencounter by applying a shin or foot hook.
For example, if the opponent grips the samboist to apply the “mill”, as the opponent lifts thesamboist from the ground, the samboist hooks the shin from his free leg to the outside of his opponent’s
Figure 76
This ploy can be exploited against being lifted from the mat when the opponent applies the:
“Mill” where the samboist hooks his free shin to the outside of his opponent’s near leg,
Turnover and lifting throws by hooking the foot inside of his opponent’s opposite side leg.
Subterfuges
When the opponent applies a throw, he may unbalance the samboist intending to throw thesamboist onto his back, but as the samboist begins to fall, he may work to land on his side, his stomach,
ll fours, so that from one of these positions the samboist can regain his feet and continue to
Front, lateral, or rear sweeping throws and the inside sweeping throw.
Shifting the Opponent’s Weight over His Supporting Leg
shifts his body weight over one of his legs to support him as heattacks, often the samboist with relatively little effort can shift his opponent’s weight so that all of hisopponent’s weight is over is supporting leg, and to retain his balance, his opponent will be forced to break off
he opponent attacks the samboist with a front stepping throw, so he turns his backto the samboist and moves his right leg to apply the stepping throw. At this point, the opponent’s body weight
ks his opponent to the left and away from him, to maintain his
To defend by shifting the opponent’s weight over his supporting leg, the samboist can be most successful
If the opponent attacks to throw by lifting the samboist from the mat, the samboist can often
For example, if the opponent grips the samboist to apply the “mill”, as the opponent lifts thesamboist from the ground, the samboist hooks the shin from his free leg to the outside of his opponent’s
This ploy can be exploited against being lifted from the mat when the opponent applies the:
“Mill” where the samboist hooks his free shin to the outside of his opponent’s near leg,
e of his opponent’s opposite side leg.
When the opponent applies a throw, he may unbalance the samboist intending to throw thesamboist onto his back, but as the samboist begins to fall, he may work to land on his side, his stomach,
ll fours, so that from one of these positions the samboist can regain his feet and continue to
wrestle.
In addition, the samboist may apply one of the following subterfuges:
a) By gripping both legs from the side or behind (Figure 77),
b) By gripping one leg to the side of the supporting leg,
c) By using the throw over the head to the side of the attacked leg,
d) By using the inside hook to the side of the leg while being on the ground,
e) By attacking with the “scissors” or the “saddle” from beside th
Reciprocal or Retaliatory Ploys to Respond against Throws
Reciprocal ploys against throws in samboapplies against his opponent in response to a throwing ploy that his opponent applies to tSuch ploys basically are used in various situations that are created by the opponent, and thus, oftenexploit the energy that the opponent used in applying his throw.
Often with reciprocal ploys, the counter ploy is often defined by the throwthe opponent. It is appropriate in that in corresponds to the throw that the opponent applies. Both ploysare connected by the word “against”. Reciprocal ploys can be applied in the beginning of the opponent’sthrow, or somewhat later as the throw develops.
Reciprocal Ploys at the Beginning of a Throw
When applying any throw, the attacker from one second to another will adopt several positions inseveral situations. If the samboist can find time as these positionsjerk or pull that will cause his opponent to fall to the mat. This jerk or pull must be timed to cause hisopponent to lose his balance while allowing the samboist to have his full strength for jerking or pulling. Ifthe opponent attacks the samboist so that one of the attacker’s legs is raised high, he cannot use that legto brace against the mat, so it is relatively easy to induce that opponent into falling. However, if that sameopponent attacks so that both of hisopponent to the side of his attacking leg places him in a disadvantage where the opponent always isslowed in his attack if not stopped completely. In this case, the samboist quickly jeopponent’s supporting leg.
Unbalancing by Gripping the Head against the Throw by Gripping Both
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attempts to apply the throw by gripping bothlegs. In response, the samboist un
In addition, the samboist may apply one of the following subterfuges:
Figure 77
By gripping both legs from the side or behind (Figure 77),
gripping one leg to the side of the supporting leg,
By using the throw over the head to the side of the attacked leg,
By using the inside hook to the side of the leg while being on the ground,
By attacking with the “scissors” or the “saddle” from beside the opponent.
Reciprocal or Retaliatory Ploys to Respond against Throws
Reciprocal ploys against throws in sambo-wrestling are defined as those ploys that a samboistapplies against his opponent in response to a throwing ploy that his opponent applies to tSuch ploys basically are used in various situations that are created by the opponent, and thus, oftenexploit the energy that the opponent used in applying his throw.
Often with reciprocal ploys, the counter ploy is often defined by the throwthe opponent. It is appropriate in that in corresponds to the throw that the opponent applies. Both ploysare connected by the word “against”. Reciprocal ploys can be applied in the beginning of the opponent’s
later as the throw develops.
Reciprocal Ploys at the Beginning of a Throw
Unbalancing
When applying any throw, the attacker from one second to another will adopt several positions inseveral situations. If the samboist can find time as these positions change, he can apply an appropriatejerk or pull that will cause his opponent to fall to the mat. This jerk or pull must be timed to cause hisopponent to lose his balance while allowing the samboist to have his full strength for jerking or pulling. Ifthe opponent attacks the samboist so that one of the attacker’s legs is raised high, he cannot use that legto brace against the mat, so it is relatively easy to induce that opponent into falling. However, if that sameopponent attacks so that both of his feet are close to the ground, if not on the ground, then jerking theopponent to the side of his attacking leg places him in a disadvantage where the opponent always isslowed in his attack if not stopped completely. In this case, the samboist quickly je
Unbalancing by Gripping the Head against the Throw by Gripping BothLegs
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attempts to apply the throw by gripping bothlegs. In response, the samboist unbalances his opponent by gripping his opponent’s head.
By using the inside hook to the side of the leg while being on the ground,
e opponent.
Reciprocal or Retaliatory Ploys to Respond against Throws
wrestling are defined as those ploys that a samboistapplies against his opponent in response to a throwing ploy that his opponent applies to the samboist.Such ploys basically are used in various situations that are created by the opponent, and thus, often
that is first applied bythe opponent. It is appropriate in that in corresponds to the throw that the opponent applies. Both ploysare connected by the word “against”. Reciprocal ploys can be applied in the beginning of the opponent’s
Reciprocal Ploys at the Beginning of a Throw
When applying any throw, the attacker from one second to another will adopt several positions inchange, he can apply an appropriate
jerk or pull that will cause his opponent to fall to the mat. This jerk or pull must be timed to cause hisopponent to lose his balance while allowing the samboist to have his full strength for jerking or pulling. Ifthe opponent attacks the samboist so that one of the attacker’s legs is raised high, he cannot use that legto brace against the mat, so it is relatively easy to induce that opponent into falling. However, if that same
feet are close to the ground, if not on the ground, then jerking theopponent to the side of his attacking leg places him in a disadvantage where the opponent always isslowed in his attack if not stopped completely. In this case, the samboist quickly jerks to the side of his
Unbalancing by Gripping the Head against the Throw by Gripping Both
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attempts to apply the throw by gripping bothbalances his opponent by gripping his opponent’s head.
Rear Stepping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside against the
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attempts a front sweeping throw with his rightleg under the samboist’s left leg or a sweeping hip throw with his right leg under the samboist’s right leg.The samboist’s left hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee crook, so that the samboist canapply the rear stepping throw with his right leg un
Rear Stepping Throw with a Cross Leg Grip against the Rear SteppingThrow or the Major Outer Reaping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attacks the samboist’s right leg with a rearstepping throw or the major outer reaping throw. In the moment when the his right leg moves behind thesamboist’s right leg, the samboist’s right hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook, and thesamboist uses his right leg to apply the rear stepping throw unde
Lateral Sweeping Throw against the Lateral Sweeping Throw
The samboist is in left stance while his opponent is in right stance. The opponent attacks with alateral sweeping throw, so that his right leg is under the samboist’ssweeps the samboist’s left leg, the samboist bends the knee of his attacked leg, and as soon as hisopponent’s right foot contacts his left leg, he moves his left foot to apply a lateral sweeping throw asdetailed earlier in this book.
Rear Stepping Throw at the Heel Against the Front Stepping Throw, theSweeping Hip Throw, the Throw over the Hip, the Throw by Gripping the Arm
under the Armpit, and the Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder
Both wrestlers are in right sor one of the other throws named above. The samboist sets his left leg for the rear stepping throw at theheel (Figure 78) and sits on his left buttock by his right heel to throw histhat his opponent lands on his back.
Rear Stepping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside against theFront Sweeping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attempts a front sweeping throw with his rightthe samboist’s left leg or a sweeping hip throw with his right leg under the samboist’s right leg.
The samboist’s left hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee crook, so that the samboist canapply the rear stepping throw with his right leg under his opponent’s left leg.
Rear Stepping Throw with a Cross Leg Grip against the Rear SteppingThrow or the Major Outer Reaping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attacks the samboist’s right leg with a rearmajor outer reaping throw. In the moment when the his right leg moves behind the
samboist’s right leg, the samboist’s right hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook, and thesamboist uses his right leg to apply the rear stepping throw under his opponent’s left leg.
Lateral Sweeping Throw against the Lateral Sweeping Throw
The samboist is in left stance while his opponent is in right stance. The opponent attacks with alateral sweeping throw, so that his right leg is under the samboist’s left leg. In the moment when hesweeps the samboist’s left leg, the samboist bends the knee of his attacked leg, and as soon as hisopponent’s right foot contacts his left leg, he moves his left foot to apply a lateral sweeping throw as
Rear Stepping Throw at the Heel Against the Front Stepping Throw, theSweeping Hip Throw, the Throw over the Hip, the Throw by Gripping the Arm
under the Armpit, and the Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent applies the front stepping throw with his right legor one of the other throws named above. The samboist sets his left leg for the rear stepping throw at theheel (Figure 78) and sits on his left buttock by his right heel to throw his opponent to the left over him, sothat his opponent lands on his back.
Figure 78
Rear Stepping Throw with the Leg Gripped from the Outside against the
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attempts a front sweeping throw with his rightthe samboist’s left leg or a sweeping hip throw with his right leg under the samboist’s right leg.
The samboist’s left hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right knee crook, so that the samboist can
Rear Stepping Throw with a Cross Leg Grip against the Rear Stepping
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent attacks the samboist’s right leg with a rearmajor outer reaping throw. In the moment when the his right leg moves behind the
samboist’s right leg, the samboist’s right hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right knee crook, and ther his opponent’s left leg.
Lateral Sweeping Throw against the Lateral Sweeping Throw
The samboist is in left stance while his opponent is in right stance. The opponent attacks with aleft leg. In the moment when he
sweeps the samboist’s left leg, the samboist bends the knee of his attacked leg, and as soon as hisopponent’s right foot contacts his left leg, he moves his left foot to apply a lateral sweeping throw as
Rear Stepping Throw at the Heel Against the Front Stepping Throw, theSweeping Hip Throw, the Throw over the Hip, the Throw by Gripping the Arm
under the Armpit, and the Throw by Gripping the Arm on the Shoulder
tance. The opponent applies the front stepping throw with his right legor one of the other throws named above. The samboist sets his left leg for the rear stepping throw at the
opponent to the left over him, so
Reciprocal Ploys as the Throw Develops
Throw by Gripping the Head and Body against the Throw by Gripping Both
Both wrestlers are in right stances. Thgripping the samboist’s legs and driving his right shoulder into the samboist’s stomach. As the samboistfalls, his right hand grips his opponent’s head under his armpit, and his left arm wraps aroundopponent’s body. The samboist places his right leg between his opponent’s legs, and as the samboistrolls onto his right side, he throws his opponent over himself in the direction of his own fall, so that hisopponent lands on his back.
Rear Knee
The samboist is in left stance, and his opponent is in right stance. The opponent applies aninside hooking throw by hooking his right leg to the samboist’s left leg from the inside. The samboistdrives his left hip and thigh into his opponent’s right thigh, so that the samboist can sweep his left legunder his opponent’s left knee crook as the samboist’s arms strongly pull left and downward to throw theopponent’s back onto the mat (Figure 80).
Lifting Throw with a Fall against the Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent applies the rear stepping throw with his right legunder the samboist’s right leg. Falling, the samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weightright leg, and in time with his fall, the samboist applies the lifting throw with a falling motion.
Throw over the Head against the Inside Hooking Throw or the Lateral
In the opponent applies the inside hooking throw with his leftthe samboist falls, his free right leg is set and braced in his opponent’s stomach, so that the samboist canapply the throw over the head.
Diving against the Front Stepping Throw, Throw over the Hip, and theThrow by
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent’s left hand goes under the samboist’s right armto grip the back of the samboist’s belt as the opponent applies the front stepping throw with right legunder the samboist’s right leg and unbalances the samboist so the begins to fall.
Figure 79
Reciprocal Ploys as the Throw Develops
Throw by Gripping the Head and Body against the Throw by Gripping BothLegs
Both wrestlers are in right stances. The opponent applies the throw by gripping both legs bygripping the samboist’s legs and driving his right shoulder into the samboist’s stomach. As the samboistfalls, his right hand grips his opponent’s head under his armpit, and his left arm wraps aroundopponent’s body. The samboist places his right leg between his opponent’s legs, and as the samboistrolls onto his right side, he throws his opponent over himself in the direction of his own fall, so that his
Rear Knee Sweep against the Inside Hooking Throw
The samboist is in left stance, and his opponent is in right stance. The opponent applies aninside hooking throw by hooking his right leg to the samboist’s left leg from the inside. The samboist
hip and thigh into his opponent’s right thigh, so that the samboist can sweep his left legunder his opponent’s left knee crook as the samboist’s arms strongly pull left and downward to throw theopponent’s back onto the mat (Figure 80).
Figure 80
ing Throw with a Fall against the Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent applies the rear stepping throw with his right legunder the samboist’s right leg. Falling, the samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weightright leg, and in time with his fall, the samboist applies the lifting throw with a falling motion.
Throw over the Head against the Inside Hooking Throw or the LateralSweeping Throw
In the opponent applies the inside hooking throw with his left leg on the samboist’s right leg, asthe samboist falls, his free right leg is set and braced in his opponent’s stomach, so that the samboist can
Diving against the Front Stepping Throw, Throw over the Hip, and theThrow by Gripping the Arm under the Armpit
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent’s left hand goes under the samboist’s right armto grip the back of the samboist’s belt as the opponent applies the front stepping throw with right leg
s right leg and unbalances the samboist so the begins to fall.
Reciprocal Ploys as the Throw Develops
Throw by Gripping the Head and Body against the Throw by Gripping Both
e opponent applies the throw by gripping both legs bygripping the samboist’s legs and driving his right shoulder into the samboist’s stomach. As the samboistfalls, his right hand grips his opponent’s head under his armpit, and his left arm wraps around hisopponent’s body. The samboist places his right leg between his opponent’s legs, and as the samboistrolls onto his right side, he throws his opponent over himself in the direction of his own fall, so that his
Sweep against the Inside Hooking Throw
The samboist is in left stance, and his opponent is in right stance. The opponent applies aninside hooking throw by hooking his right leg to the samboist’s left leg from the inside. The samboist
hip and thigh into his opponent’s right thigh, so that the samboist can sweep his left legunder his opponent’s left knee crook as the samboist’s arms strongly pull left and downward to throw the
ing Throw with a Fall against the Rear Stepping Throw
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent applies the rear stepping throw with his right legunder the samboist’s right leg. Falling, the samboist forces his opponent to shift his body weight over hisright leg, and in time with his fall, the samboist applies the lifting throw with a falling motion.
Throw over the Head against the Inside Hooking Throw or the Lateral
leg on the samboist’s right leg, asthe samboist falls, his free right leg is set and braced in his opponent’s stomach, so that the samboist can
Diving against the Front Stepping Throw, Throw over the Hip, and theGripping the Arm under the Armpit
Both wrestlers are in right stance. The opponent’s left hand goes under the samboist’s right armto grip the back of the samboist’s belt as the opponent applies the front stepping throw with right leg
s right leg and unbalances the samboist so the begins to fall.
The samboist tightly clamps his opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s left armpit, so that thesamboist can drive his right leg across his opponent’s right leg, so that his right leg is mopponent’s legs with his toes pointing in the same direction that he is facing. At the same time that thesamboist hops in, he strongly jerks his hands and body as if he is throwing his opponent over his rightshoulder (Figure 81).
Falling to the rear, the samboist pivots strongly to the left and throws his opponent’s back ontothe mat. If the samboist is falling onto his left side as he contacts the mat, then the samboist ensures thathis falling opponent continues fallingthe mat.
The ploys for par terre wrestling include hold downs and escapes from hold downs, turnoversonto the back, and finally, submission ploys.
To be able to see the full volume of material in this part of the book, one must study the followingscheme of the basic par terre ploys in sambo wrestling:
The samboist tightly clamps his opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s left armpit, so that thesamboist can drive his right leg across his opponent’s right leg, so that his right leg is mopponent’s legs with his toes pointing in the same direction that he is facing. At the same time that thesamboist hops in, he strongly jerks his hands and body as if he is throwing his opponent over his right
Figure 81
Falling to the rear, the samboist pivots strongly to the left and throws his opponent’s back ontothe mat. If the samboist is falling onto his left side as he contacts the mat, then the samboist ensures thathis falling opponent continues falling by rotating his body to the left and pressing his opponent’s back into
Ploys for Par Terre Wrestling
wrestling include hold downs and escapes from hold downs, turnoversonto the back, and finally, submission ploys.
To be able to see the full volume of material in this part of the book, one must study the followingploys in sambo wrestling:
The samboist tightly clamps his opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s left armpit, so that thesamboist can drive his right leg across his opponent’s right leg, so that his right leg is midway between hisopponent’s legs with his toes pointing in the same direction that he is facing. At the same time that thesamboist hops in, he strongly jerks his hands and body as if he is throwing his opponent over his right
Falling to the rear, the samboist pivots strongly to the left and throws his opponent’s back ontothe mat. If the samboist is falling onto his left side as he contacts the mat, then the samboist ensures that
by rotating his body to the left and pressing his opponent’s back into
wrestling include hold downs and escapes from hold downs, turnovers
To be able to see the full volume of material in this part of the book, one must study the following
Hold downs in sambo wrestling are defined as those means to keep an opponent on thiand pressed into the mat without applying submission holds.
The opponent lies with his back to the mat. The samboist sits on the mat close to his opponent’sright side and facing his head. His right hand grips his opponentopponent’s armpit and pulls his opponent to the samboist. The samboist strongly leans his head forward,and he sets his left foot on the ground so that his left hip is perpendicular to his opponent’s body. Hisright leg is straightened forward. Both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s jacket at the rightshoulder.
To prevent his opponent from being able to throw the samboist over his body, without releasinghis grip, the samboist sits on the mat close to his oppone
Hold downs
Hold downs in sambo wrestling are defined as those means to keep an opponent on thiand pressed into the mat without applying submission holds.
The Lateral Hold down
The opponent lies with his back to the mat. The samboist sits on the mat close to his opponent’sright side and facing his head. His right hand grips his opponent head, and his left arm grips hisopponent’s armpit and pulls his opponent to the samboist. The samboist strongly leans his head forward,and he sets his left foot on the ground so that his left hip is perpendicular to his opponent’s body. His
straightened forward. Both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s jacket at the right
To prevent his opponent from being able to throw the samboist over his body, without releasinghis grip, the samboist sits on the mat close to his opponent’s far side (Figure 82),
Hold downs in sambo wrestling are defined as those means to keep an opponent on this back
The opponent lies with his back to the mat. The samboist sits on the mat close to his opponent’shead, and his left arm grips his
opponent’s armpit and pulls his opponent to the samboist. The samboist strongly leans his head forward,and he sets his left foot on the ground so that his left hip is perpendicular to his opponent’s body. His
straightened forward. Both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s jacket at the right
To prevent his opponent from being able to throw the samboist over his body, without releasing
Lateral Hold down without the Head Gripped
This ploy is applied the same as the lateral hold down except the right arm does not grip theopponent’s head—just his body.
The opponent lies on his back. The samboist sits close to his opponent’s right side facing hislegs. His right hand grips his opponent’s right armpit, and his left arm wraps around his opponent’s bodyclose to and aligned with his opponent’s chest. The samboist’s riback while his left leg is straightened close to his opponent’s body with his feet directed beside his leg(Figure 83).
The opponent is lying on his back.shoulder is between the samboist’s wide set knees. The samboist’s right armpit clamps down on hisopponent’s right arm, so that he can grip his opponent’s collar, and the samboist’s left hand gripsopponent’s left armpit from under his left shoulder. The samboist presses his chest into his opponent’schest, and the samboist’s right leg is straightened to the rear and to the right for support. The samboistpulls his opponent from the side and cattempts by his opponent to escape (Figure 84).
Hold down beside the Shoulder with the Opposite Arms
This ploy is applied the same as the hold down beside the shoulder, but this time thleft hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the right armpit from under his opponent’s right shoulder, and hisright armpit clamps down on his opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s right hand can grip hisopponent’s collar.
Figure 82
Lateral Hold down without the Head Gripped
This ploy is applied the same as the lateral hold down except the right arm does not grip the
The Reverse Lateral Hold down
lies on his back. The samboist sits close to his opponent’s right side facing hislegs. His right hand grips his opponent’s right armpit, and his left arm wraps around his opponent’s bodyclose to and aligned with his opponent’s chest. The samboist’s right leg is straightened to the right andback while his left leg is straightened close to his opponent’s body with his feet directed beside his leg
Figure 83
Hold down beside the Shoulder
Figure 84
The opponent is lying on his back. The samboist is on his knees so that the opponent’s rightshoulder is between the samboist’s wide set knees. The samboist’s right armpit clamps down on hisopponent’s right arm, so that he can grip his opponent’s collar, and the samboist’s left hand gripsopponent’s left armpit from under his left shoulder. The samboist presses his chest into his opponent’schest, and the samboist’s right leg is straightened to the rear and to the right for support. The samboistpulls his opponent from the side and can use his straightened left leg to adjust his position to parry anyattempts by his opponent to escape (Figure 84).
Hold down beside the Shoulder with the Opposite Arms
This ploy is applied the same as the hold down beside the shoulder, but this time thleft hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the right armpit from under his opponent’s right shoulder, and hisright armpit clamps down on his opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s right hand can grip his
Lateral Hold down without the Head Gripped
This ploy is applied the same as the lateral hold down except the right arm does not grip the
lies on his back. The samboist sits close to his opponent’s right side facing hislegs. His right hand grips his opponent’s right armpit, and his left arm wraps around his opponent’s body
ght leg is straightened to the right andback while his left leg is straightened close to his opponent’s body with his feet directed beside his leg
The samboist is on his knees so that the opponent’s rightshoulder is between the samboist’s wide set knees. The samboist’s right armpit clamps down on hisopponent’s right arm, so that he can grip his opponent’s collar, and the samboist’s left hand grips hisopponent’s left armpit from under his left shoulder. The samboist presses his chest into his opponent’schest, and the samboist’s right leg is straightened to the rear and to the right for support. The samboist
an use his straightened left leg to adjust his position to parry any
Hold down beside the Shoulder with the Opposite Arms
This ploy is applied the same as the hold down beside the shoulder, but this time the samboist’sleft hand grips his opponent’s jacket on the right armpit from under his opponent’s right shoulder, and hisright armpit clamps down on his opponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s right hand can grip his
The opponent is lying on his back. The samboist sets his knees beside both sides of hisopponent’s head. From under his opponent’s shoulders, he presses the shoulder part of his opponent’sarms into his body, and his hands, from uopponent’s belt. Pressing chest to chest with his opponent, the samboist jerks and moves hisstraightened legs to maintain his supporting base (Figure 85).
Hold down beside the Head without G
This ploy is applied the same as the previous ploy, but this time, the samboist’s elbows are setinto his opponent’s armpits, so that his forearms can press into his opponent’s sides.
The opponent lies on his back. The samboist kneels close to his opponent’s right side. He setshis right knee close to his opponent’s belt, and his left knee presses his opponent’s right arm into hisopponent’s head. His left elbow presses his opponent’s head into his opsamboist’s left forearm is clamped under his opponent’s left arm from the outside, so that the samboistcan grip his opponent’s jacket at the left armpit. His right hand is guided under his opponent’s left armfrom the inside to grip his opponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of his left arm. The samboist applieschest to chest pressure, and his straightened right leg is set back and to the right.
Cross Body Hold down with a Grip from under the Head
This ploy is applied the sacase is set under the opponent’s head, and his left hand grips his opponent’s uniform at the left armpit.
The opponent lies on his back. The samboist kneelset wide and facing his opponent. His arms are set under his opponent’s armpits and his grips hisopponent’s collar. He then presses his chest into his opponent’s chest (Figure 87).
Hold down beside the Head
Figure 85
The opponent is lying on his back. The samboist sets his knees beside both sides of hisopponent’s head. From under his opponent’s shoulders, he presses the shoulder part of his opponent’sarms into his body, and his hands, from under his opponent’s arms, grip the right and left sides of hisopponent’s belt. Pressing chest to chest with his opponent, the samboist jerks and moves hisstraightened legs to maintain his supporting base (Figure 85).
Hold down beside the Head without Gripping the Arms
This ploy is applied the same as the previous ploy, but this time, the samboist’s elbows are setinto his opponent’s armpits, so that his forearms can press into his opponent’s sides.
Cross Body Hold down
Figure 86
on his back. The samboist kneels close to his opponent’s right side. He setshis right knee close to his opponent’s belt, and his left knee presses his opponent’s right arm into hisopponent’s head. His left elbow presses his opponent’s head into his opponent’s right arm. Thesamboist’s left forearm is clamped under his opponent’s left arm from the outside, so that the samboistcan grip his opponent’s jacket at the left armpit. His right hand is guided under his opponent’s left arm
rip his opponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of his left arm. The samboist applieschest to chest pressure, and his straightened right leg is set back and to the right.
Cross Body Hold down with a Grip from under the Head
This ploy is applied the same as the cross body hold down, but the samboist’s left forearm in thiscase is set under the opponent’s head, and his left hand grips his opponent’s uniform at the left armpit.
Hold down beside the Legs
The opponent lies on his back. The samboist kneels between his opponent’s legs with his kneesset wide and facing his opponent. His arms are set under his opponent’s armpits and his grips hisopponent’s collar. He then presses his chest into his opponent’s chest (Figure 87).
The opponent is lying on his back. The samboist sets his knees beside both sides of hisopponent’s head. From under his opponent’s shoulders, he presses the shoulder part of his opponent’s
nder his opponent’s arms, grip the right and left sides of hisopponent’s belt. Pressing chest to chest with his opponent, the samboist jerks and moves his
ripping the Arms
This ploy is applied the same as the previous ploy, but this time, the samboist’s elbows are setinto his opponent’s armpits, so that his forearms can press into his opponent’s sides.
on his back. The samboist kneels close to his opponent’s right side. He setshis right knee close to his opponent’s belt, and his left knee presses his opponent’s right arm into his
ponent’s right arm. Thesamboist’s left forearm is clamped under his opponent’s left arm from the outside, so that the samboistcan grip his opponent’s jacket at the left armpit. His right hand is guided under his opponent’s left arm
rip his opponent’s jacket on the shoulder part of his left arm. The samboist applieschest to chest pressure, and his straightened right leg is set back and to the right.
Cross Body Hold down with a Grip from under the Head
me as the cross body hold down, but the samboist’s left forearm in thiscase is set under the opponent’s head, and his left hand grips his opponent’s uniform at the left armpit.
s between his opponent’s legs with his kneesset wide and facing his opponent. His arms are set under his opponent’s armpits and his grips hisopponent’s collar. He then presses his chest into his opponent’s chest (Figure 87).
Hold down bes
This ploy is applied the same as for the hold down beside the legs, but the shoulder parts of thesamboist’s arms press his opponent’s hips into the samboist’s hips, and the samboist’s hands grip thesides of his opponent’s belt.
The opponent lies on his back, and the samboist sits atop him with his knees on the mat.Leaning forward, the samboist presses his chest into his opponent’s chest as he grips the back of
his opponent’s jacket. The samboist’s elbows are wide set (Figure 88).
The opponent grips the samboist in the lateral hold down and is found near the samboist’s rightshoulder.
The samboist wrings his opponent’sdrives into his opponent’s chin as much as possible away from him. He then hooks his left leg on hisopponent’s neck, and wrings his opponent’s head away from him, and thus, moves his opponent awayfrom him (Figure 89).
Turning the opponent over the samboist’s bodyopponent’s belt on the left side, and he draws his opponent as closely as possible into him, so that he canroll his opponent over his left shoulder and across his body using both of his hands to pull strongly as heturns his own body.
Rocking his opponent until the samboist sits upsamboist’s head to his body, the samboist quickly raises his legs upopponent’s chin and energetically sits up and rocks his opponent’s back onto the mat.
Escaping the Cross Body Hold down and the Hold down beside the
The opponent grips the samboist in the hold down beside tdown and if found close to the samboist’s right shoulder.
Turning with the opponent’s head gripped and lifting with the forearmarm grips his opponent’s head in the samboist’s armpit and the sambois
Figure 87
Hold down beside the Legs by Gripping the Belt
This ploy is applied the same as for the hold down beside the legs, but the shoulder parts of thesamboist’s arms press his opponent’s hips into the samboist’s hips, and the samboist’s hands grip the
Hold down from above
Figure 88
The opponent lies on his back, and the samboist sits atop him with his knees on the mat.Leaning forward, the samboist presses his chest into his opponent’s chest as he grips the back of
The samboist’s elbows are wide set (Figure 88).
Escapes from Hold downs
Escaping from the Lateral Hold down
The opponent grips the samboist in the lateral hold down and is found near the samboist’s right
The samboist wrings his opponent’s neck with the samboist’s leg. The samboist’s left palmdrives into his opponent’s chin as much as possible away from him. He then hooks his left leg on hisopponent’s neck, and wrings his opponent’s head away from him, and thus, moves his opponent away
Figure 89
Turning the opponent over the samboist’s body. The samboist’s left hand grips hisopponent’s belt on the left side, and he draws his opponent as closely as possible into him, so that he can
t shoulder and across his body using both of his hands to pull strongly as he
Rocking his opponent until the samboist sits up. If the opponent is high as he holds thesamboist’s head to his body, the samboist quickly raises his legs upward and hooks his left leg under hisopponent’s chin and energetically sits up and rocks his opponent’s back onto the mat.
Escaping the Cross Body Hold down and the Hold down beside theShoulders
The opponent grips the samboist in the hold down beside the shoulders or the cross body holddown and if found close to the samboist’s right shoulder.
Turning with the opponent’s head gripped and lifting with the forearmarm grips his opponent’s head in the samboist’s armpit and the samboist’s right forearm is guided under
ide the Legs by Gripping the Belt
This ploy is applied the same as for the hold down beside the legs, but the shoulder parts of thesamboist’s arms press his opponent’s hips into the samboist’s hips, and the samboist’s hands grip the
The opponent lies on his back, and the samboist sits atop him with his knees on the mat.Leaning forward, the samboist presses his chest into his opponent’s chest as he grips the back of
The opponent grips the samboist in the lateral hold down and is found near the samboist’s right
. The samboist’s left palmdrives into his opponent’s chin as much as possible away from him. He then hooks his left leg on hisopponent’s neck, and wrings his opponent’s head away from him, and thus, moves his opponent away
. The samboist’s left hand grips hisopponent’s belt on the left side, and he draws his opponent as closely as possible into him, so that he can
t shoulder and across his body using both of his hands to pull strongly as he
. If the opponent is high as he holds theward and hooks his left leg under his
opponent’s chin and energetically sits up and rocks his opponent’s back onto the mat.
Escaping the Cross Body Hold down and the Hold down beside the
he shoulders or the cross body hold
Turning with the opponent’s head gripped and lifting with the forearm. The samboist’s leftt’s right forearm is guided under
his opponent’s stomach. The samboist presses his opponent’s head upward and then downward as hisforearm drives his opponent upward to throw his opponent over his body.
Turning the opponent with a belt grip. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s belt atthe stomach as his left hand grips the back of his opponent’s belt, so that the samboist can roll hisopponent over his body.
Escaping the Hold down beside the Head
The rolling twist. The opponent grips the samboist in the hold down beside the head. Thesamboist grips the back of his opponent’s belt and uses his forearm to suppress his opponent’s motion.Then, the samboist strongly arches and uses a rocking motion to one side before sharply rolling hisopponent to the other side to roll his opponent under him.
Throwing the opponent over the samboist’s body. The opponent grips the samboist in thehold down beside the legs without his arms gripping. The samboist straightens his arm on his head andgrips his opponent’s legs close to the knees. With a strong effort by his arms and body, the samboistthrow his opponent over him to land beside the samboist’s legs.
Rolling escape from the hold down beside the head. The opponent grips the samboist in thehold down beside the legs. The samboist’s right palm drives his opponent’s left knee as far as possible inthe direction of his right heel. The samboist sets his right heel on his opponent’s left knee and stronglydrives his opponent away from him. When his opponent’s left leg is nearly straight, the samboist sharplyturns right to roll his opponent under him.
Rolling escape from the hold down from above. The opponent grips the samboist in the holddown from above. Straightening his left leg, the samboist presses that shin into his opponent’s right leg.His left hand then grips his right arm, and the samboist sharply turns left to throw his opponent over him.
The opponent cannot counter the samboist’s roll using his right leg or right arm because they aresuppressed, and thus, he falls onto his right side where the samboist can easily roll him onto his back.
Turnovers onto the Back
Turnovers in sambo-wrestling are defined as the ploys where the opponent is moved from aposition on “all fours” or lying flat on the mat into a position to be rolled or turned into a position on hisback. Turnovers are not considered in sambo-wrestling as scoring techniques but as a means totransition to hold downs or submission ploys.
Turnovers for an Opponent on “All Fours”
Turnover by Gripping the Sleeve
The opponent is on all fours. The samboist kneels close to his opponent’s left side. His left handgrips his opponent’s nape from under his opponent’s right arm, and the samboist guides his right handunder his opponent’s chest to grip his opponent’s right sleeve. The samboist presses his left downwardon his opponent’s nape, so that his opponent’s head is pressed into his opponent’s chest as he stronglydraws his opponent’s sleeve downward with his right hand, and then into himself before changing themotion to upward and into himself. The opponent is then forced to roll forward.
Turnover by Gripping Both Arms
The opponent is on all fours. He is close to his opponent’s left side. His hands grips the outerpart of his opponent’s right shoulder. His arms then hold and press his opponent’s right arm toward thesamboist and upward as the samboist’s chest drives his opponent’s left side forward and somewhattoward his opponent’s head. If the opponent does not immediately fall onto his back or onto his right side,the samboist continues his original motion until his opponent turns onto his back.
The opponent is on all fours, and the samboist is close to his opponent’s right side. The samboistsets his right forearm on his opponent’s nape, and the samboist’s left hand is guided under hisopponent’s chest to lock with the samboist’s right hand, so that the four fingers of one hand are wrappedaround the four fingers of the other hand. The samboineck and he lifts upward with his left forearm to turn his opponent onto his back.
Turnover by Gripping the Arm and Inside Leg
The opponent is on all fours with the samboist close to his left side. The sgoes under his opponent’s left arm to grip the outside of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’sright hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right thigh. The samboist strongly jerks his arms into himselfand upward as he drives his chest into his opponent’s left side to roll his opponent’s back onto the mat.
Turnover by Gripping the Arm and Outside Leg
The opponent is on all fours with the samboist close to his left side. The samboist’s left handgrips the outside (front) of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s right hand grips the outsideof his opponent’s right thigh from behind. The samboist strongly jerks his arms toward himself andupward as he drives his chest into his opponent’s left side to turn hismat.
Turning over an Opponent Lying Flat on the Mat
The opponent is lying with his stomach on the mat with his chin under his arms. The samboist isclose to his opponent’s legs on his opponent’s left side. The samboistopponent’s left shin to lift the shin as high as possible. The samboist guides his left hand under hisopponent’s left thigh to set his palm on the rear upper part of his opponent’s right thigh. He then appliesthe leverage of this hold to turn his opponent onto his back.
If the opponent shows resistance, the samboist releases his grip on his opponent’s shin and hisright hand that is under his opponent’s thigh grips his opponent’s right hip, so that the samboistthe strength of both of his arms and hands to turn his opponent onto his back.
Covering in sambo-wrestling is defined as the basic means for moving an opponent from aposition where he is kneeling, sitting, or lying on one side to a po
Covering, as with turnovers, is not a scoring method in samborealize a hold down or submission hold.
Covering is most often attained by jerking to the side opposite of an opponent’s resistan
Covering an Opponent Who Is on His Knees
Turnover by Gripped Hands
The opponent is on all fours, and the samboist is close to his opponent’s right side. The samboistsets his right forearm on his opponent’s nape, and the samboist’s left hand is guided under hisopponent’s chest to lock with the samboist’s right hand, so that the four fingers of one hand are wrappedaround the four fingers of the other hand. The samboist presses downward on the nape of his opponent’sneck and he lifts upward with his left forearm to turn his opponent onto his back.
Turnover by Gripping the Arm and Inside Leg
The opponent is on all fours with the samboist close to his left side. The sgoes under his opponent’s left arm to grip the outside of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’sright hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right thigh. The samboist strongly jerks his arms into himself
rives his chest into his opponent’s left side to roll his opponent’s back onto the mat.
Turnover by Gripping the Arm and Outside Leg
The opponent is on all fours with the samboist close to his left side. The samboist’s left hand) of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s right hand grips the outside
of his opponent’s right thigh from behind. The samboist strongly jerks his arms toward himself andupward as he drives his chest into his opponent’s left side to turn his opponent until his back is on the
Turning over an Opponent Lying Flat on the Mat
The opponent is lying with his stomach on the mat with his chin under his arms. The samboist isclose to his opponent’s legs on his opponent’s left side. The samboist’s right hand grips the inside of hisopponent’s left shin to lift the shin as high as possible. The samboist guides his left hand under hisopponent’s left thigh to set his palm on the rear upper part of his opponent’s right thigh. He then applies
everage of this hold to turn his opponent onto his back.If the opponent shows resistance, the samboist releases his grip on his opponent’s shin and his
right hand that is under his opponent’s thigh grips his opponent’s right hip, so that the samboistthe strength of both of his arms and hands to turn his opponent onto his back.
Covering
wrestling is defined as the basic means for moving an opponent from aposition where he is kneeling, sitting, or lying on one side to a position with his back on the mat.
Covering, as with turnovers, is not a scoring method in sambo-wrestling, but it is a means torealize a hold down or submission hold.
Covering is most often attained by jerking to the side opposite of an opponent’s resistan
Covering an Opponent Who Is on His Knees
The opponent is on all fours, and the samboist is close to his opponent’s right side. The samboistsets his right forearm on his opponent’s nape, and the samboist’s left hand is guided under hisopponent’s chest to lock with the samboist’s right hand, so that the four fingers of one hand are wrapped
st presses downward on the nape of his opponent’s
Turnover by Gripping the Arm and Inside Leg
The opponent is on all fours with the samboist close to his left side. The samboist’s left handgoes under his opponent’s left arm to grip the outside of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’sright hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right thigh. The samboist strongly jerks his arms into himself
rives his chest into his opponent’s left side to roll his opponent’s back onto the mat.
Turnover by Gripping the Arm and Outside Leg
The opponent is on all fours with the samboist close to his left side. The samboist’s left hand) of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s right hand grips the outside
of his opponent’s right thigh from behind. The samboist strongly jerks his arms toward himself andopponent until his back is on the
Turning over an Opponent Lying Flat on the Mat
The opponent is lying with his stomach on the mat with his chin under his arms. The samboist is’s right hand grips the inside of his
opponent’s left shin to lift the shin as high as possible. The samboist guides his left hand under hisopponent’s left thigh to set his palm on the rear upper part of his opponent’s right thigh. He then applies
If the opponent shows resistance, the samboist releases his grip on his opponent’s shin and hisright hand that is under his opponent’s thigh grips his opponent’s right hip, so that the samboist can apply
wrestling is defined as the basic means for moving an opponent from asition with his back on the mat.
wrestling, but it is a means to
Covering is most often attained by jerking to the side opposite of an opponent’s resistance.
Covering an Opponent Who Is on His Knees
In the opponent is kneeling on both of his knees or one his right knee, the samboist’s left handdraws him to the left and downward as his right leg energetically steps over his opponent to placeopponent between the samboist’s legs and drive his opponent downward onto his back (Figure 90).
If the opponent falls onto his buttocks, and his legs are straightened forward, the samboist’s lefthand draws him left and downward while the samboist energetically steps over his opponent with his rightleg, so that his opponent is driven onto his back as he appears between the samboist’s legs.
Covering the Opponent Lying on One Side
If the samboist has retained a grip on hright side, the samboist strongly draws upward with his left hand that is gripping his opponent’s rightsleeve as the samboist’s right leg steps over his opponent, so that his opponent is driven ohe appears between the samboist’s legs.
Submission ploys in samboopponent’s limbs that place the opponent in a sufficiently dangerous position that hedefeat.
In the best technical cases when attacking the opponent demands that the opponent applydesperate action to preserve his position, these are the moments when his position can be worsenedthrough ploys that cause him pain. However, tsubmission ploy, he must do so without a sharp motion or in a manner to cause instant injury. As soon asthe opponent signals his submission, the samboist has won, and he must instantly release his hold.
Submission ploys in sambosubmission ploys are widely used and applied by samboists who are found on top of an opponent orbelow an opponent.
Submission Ploys Applied to the Upper Part of the
Hyper-extending the elbow joint can be applied to the arm by straightening the elbow joint. If theopponent’s right arm rolls outward, the elbow joint can be straightened upward. For the position of thearm in the elbow hyper-extension, the upper part of the opponent’s body must be pressed downward toapply pressure from on above on the opponent’s elbow joint.
The outward arm lever.opponent’s right side. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s right wrist from the inside andraises his opponent’s trapped right arm upward as the samboist’s left armpit grips his opponent’s rightshoulder. The samboist’s left armpit firmly tucks the tr
Figure 90
In the opponent is kneeling on both of his knees or one his right knee, the samboist’s left handdraws him to the left and downward as his right leg energetically steps over his opponent to placeopponent between the samboist’s legs and drive his opponent downward onto his back (Figure 90).
Covering the Sitting Opponent
If the opponent falls onto his buttocks, and his legs are straightened forward, the samboist’s leftdownward while the samboist energetically steps over his opponent with his right
leg, so that his opponent is driven onto his back as he appears between the samboist’s legs.
Covering the Opponent Lying on One Side
If the samboist has retained a grip on his opponent’s sleeve after his opponent has fallen onto hisright side, the samboist strongly draws upward with his left hand that is gripping his opponent’s rightsleeve as the samboist’s right leg steps over his opponent, so that his opponent is driven ohe appears between the samboist’s legs.
Submission Ploys
Submission ploys in sambo-wrestling are defined as those ploys that influence the joints of anopponent’s limbs that place the opponent in a sufficiently dangerous position that he
In the best technical cases when attacking the opponent demands that the opponent applydesperate action to preserve his position, these are the moments when his position can be worsenedthrough ploys that cause him pain. However, the rules demand that for the samboist to apply asubmission ploy, he must do so without a sharp motion or in a manner to cause instant injury. As soon asthe opponent signals his submission, the samboist has won, and he must instantly release his hold.
Submission ploys in sambo-wrestling are only applied in par terre wrestling. That said,submission ploys are widely used and applied by samboists who are found on top of an opponent or
Submission Ploys Applied to the Upper Part of the
Hyper-extending the Elbow Joint
Figure 91
extending the elbow joint can be applied to the arm by straightening the elbow joint. If theopponent’s right arm rolls outward, the elbow joint can be straightened upward. For the position of the
extension, the upper part of the opponent’s body must be pressed downward toapply pressure from on above on the opponent’s elbow joint.
The outward arm lever. The opponent is on all fours. The samboist kneels close to his’s right side. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s right wrist from the inside and
raises his opponent’s trapped right arm upward as the samboist’s left armpit grips his opponent’s rightshoulder. The samboist’s left armpit firmly tucks the trapped arm into the samboist’s body. The samboist
In the opponent is kneeling on both of his knees or one his right knee, the samboist’s left handdraws him to the left and downward as his right leg energetically steps over his opponent to place hisopponent between the samboist’s legs and drive his opponent downward onto his back (Figure 90).
If the opponent falls onto his buttocks, and his legs are straightened forward, the samboist’s leftdownward while the samboist energetically steps over his opponent with his right
leg, so that his opponent is driven onto his back as he appears between the samboist’s legs.
Covering the Opponent Lying on One Side
is opponent’s sleeve after his opponent has fallen onto hisright side, the samboist strongly draws upward with his left hand that is gripping his opponent’s rightsleeve as the samboist’s right leg steps over his opponent, so that his opponent is driven onto his back as
wrestling are defined as those ploys that influence the joints of anopponent’s limbs that place the opponent in a sufficiently dangerous position that he must signal his
In the best technical cases when attacking the opponent demands that the opponent applydesperate action to preserve his position, these are the moments when his position can be worsened
he rules demand that for the samboist to apply asubmission ploy, he must do so without a sharp motion or in a manner to cause instant injury. As soon asthe opponent signals his submission, the samboist has won, and he must instantly release his hold.
wrestling. That said,submission ploys are widely used and applied by samboists who are found on top of an opponent or
Submission Ploys Applied to the Upper Part of the Body
extending the elbow joint can be applied to the arm by straightening the elbow joint. If theopponent’s right arm rolls outward, the elbow joint can be straightened upward. For the position of the
extension, the upper part of the opponent’s body must be pressed downward to
The opponent is on all fours. The samboist kneels close to his’s right side. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s right wrist from the inside and
raises his opponent’s trapped right arm upward as the samboist’s left armpit grips his opponent’s rightapped arm into the samboist’s body. The samboist
turns the trapped arm outward as far as possible and allows his left hand to grip his opponent’s rightforearm to apply the hyper-extending pressure against the natural bend of his opponent’s elbow joint.
At the same time that he is gripping his opponent’s right arm, the samboist’s left shin movesforward, so that the samboist can sit on the mat. The samboist moves his right leg to the right and backto increase his stability (Figure 91).
The outward arm lever assisted by a leg on top.located by his left side. The samboist braces his left hand on the mat as his right hand grips hisopponent’s left wrist. At the same time, he slides his leftthat the samboist’s left foot meets his opponent’s right forearm. Then, the samboist reclines on his leftside using his left hand to grip his opponent’s left wrist from the inside as he hooks his right leg oveopponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s right foot is under his opponent’s neck.
Using the strength of both of his arms, the samboist rotates the trapped arm outward and hyperextends the trapped elbow against its natural bend. Simultaneously, habove using his right leg (Figure 92).
The elbow lever with the assistance of a leg on top can be applied in diverse positions andsituations; however, there is one particularly useful variant.
The opponent is lying with his back on the mat. The samboist kneels facing his opponent’s head,so that his body is found between the samboist’s legs. The opponent does not want to give up the holddown, so he clamps his arms onto his chest. The samboist grips the outshis opposite side hand and falls to the left and onto his left side. Simultaneously with falling, thesamboist’s right leg hooks over his opponent’s left arm, and the samboist’s left hand grips the inside of hisopponent’s left wrist. The samboist pulls the trapped arm toward him and turns outward, so that his rightleg can drive his opponent’s head away from him. As in the previous variant, the correct motion forhyper-extending the elbow joint is against the elbow’s natur
This variant can be applied opponent from sitting atop him. It must be exploited in the momentwhen the opponent is trapped under the sitting samboist and the opponent begins to straighten his bodyunder the samboist’s body.
If the opponent falls with the samboist to the left, the samboist still must insert his right leg overhis opponent’s left arm. If the opponent and samboist fall to the right, then the samboist must insert hisleft leg over his opponent’s right arm.
Elbow lever applied with tThe samboist kneels close to his opponent’s left side. To fight a hold down attempt, his opponent hasbraced his arms on his chest. Both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s left wrthe trapped arm, the samboist turns his opponent’s body and continues this motion forward until hisopponent can turn no further onto the right side of his stomach on the mat. The samboist turns hisopponent’s trapped arm outward, so tpressure of his own body, the samboist lifts the trapped arm upward to hyperelbow against its natural bend (Figure 93).
turns the trapped arm outward as far as possible and allows his left hand to grip his opponent’s rightextending pressure against the natural bend of his opponent’s elbow joint.
t the same time that he is gripping his opponent’s right arm, the samboist’s left shin movesforward, so that the samboist can sit on the mat. The samboist moves his right leg to the right and backto increase his stability (Figure 91).
The outward arm lever assisted by a leg on top. The opponent is on all fours with the samboistlocated by his left side. The samboist braces his left hand on the mat as his right hand grips hisopponent’s left wrist. At the same time, he slides his left leg between his opponent’s legs and arms, sothat the samboist’s left foot meets his opponent’s right forearm. Then, the samboist reclines on his leftside using his left hand to grip his opponent’s left wrist from the inside as he hooks his right leg oveopponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s right foot is under his opponent’s neck.
Using the strength of both of his arms, the samboist rotates the trapped arm outward and hyperextends the trapped elbow against its natural bend. Simultaneously, he presses on the elbow joint fromabove using his right leg (Figure 92).
Figure92
The elbow lever with the assistance of a leg on top can be applied in diverse positions andsituations; however, there is one particularly useful variant.
lying with his back on the mat. The samboist kneels facing his opponent’s head,so that his body is found between the samboist’s legs. The opponent does not want to give up the holddown, so he clamps his arms onto his chest. The samboist grips the outside of his opponent’s wrist onhis opposite side hand and falls to the left and onto his left side. Simultaneously with falling, thesamboist’s right leg hooks over his opponent’s left arm, and the samboist’s left hand grips the inside of his
eft wrist. The samboist pulls the trapped arm toward him and turns outward, so that his rightleg can drive his opponent’s head away from him. As in the previous variant, the correct motion for
extending the elbow joint is against the elbow’s natural bend.This variant can be applied opponent from sitting atop him. It must be exploited in the moment
when the opponent is trapped under the sitting samboist and the opponent begins to straighten his body
with the samboist to the left, the samboist still must insert his right leg overhis opponent’s left arm. If the opponent and samboist fall to the right, then the samboist must insert hisleft leg over his opponent’s right arm.
Elbow lever applied with the assistance of the body on top. The opponent lies on his back.The samboist kneels close to his opponent’s left side. To fight a hold down attempt, his opponent hasbraced his arms on his chest. Both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s left wrthe trapped arm, the samboist turns his opponent’s body and continues this motion forward until hisopponent can turn no further onto the right side of his stomach on the mat. The samboist turns hisopponent’s trapped arm outward, so that his opponent’s elbow faces upward. Using the downwardpressure of his own body, the samboist lifts the trapped arm upward to hyper-extend his opponent’selbow against its natural bend (Figure 93).
Figure 93
turns the trapped arm outward as far as possible and allows his left hand to grip his opponent’s rightextending pressure against the natural bend of his opponent’s elbow joint.
t the same time that he is gripping his opponent’s right arm, the samboist’s left shin movesforward, so that the samboist can sit on the mat. The samboist moves his right leg to the right and back
The opponent is on all fours with the samboistlocated by his left side. The samboist braces his left hand on the mat as his right hand grips his
leg between his opponent’s legs and arms, sothat the samboist’s left foot meets his opponent’s right forearm. Then, the samboist reclines on his leftside using his left hand to grip his opponent’s left wrist from the inside as he hooks his right leg over hisopponent’s left arm, so that the samboist’s right foot is under his opponent’s neck.
Using the strength of both of his arms, the samboist rotates the trapped arm outward and hyper-e presses on the elbow joint from
The elbow lever with the assistance of a leg on top can be applied in diverse positions and
lying with his back on the mat. The samboist kneels facing his opponent’s head,so that his body is found between the samboist’s legs. The opponent does not want to give up the hold
ide of his opponent’s wrist onhis opposite side hand and falls to the left and onto his left side. Simultaneously with falling, thesamboist’s right leg hooks over his opponent’s left arm, and the samboist’s left hand grips the inside of his
eft wrist. The samboist pulls the trapped arm toward him and turns outward, so that his rightleg can drive his opponent’s head away from him. As in the previous variant, the correct motion for
This variant can be applied opponent from sitting atop him. It must be exploited in the momentwhen the opponent is trapped under the sitting samboist and the opponent begins to straighten his body
with the samboist to the left, the samboist still must insert his right leg overhis opponent’s left arm. If the opponent and samboist fall to the right, then the samboist must insert his
The opponent lies on his back.The samboist kneels close to his opponent’s left side. To fight a hold down attempt, his opponent hasbraced his arms on his chest. Both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s left wrist. Firmly holdingthe trapped arm, the samboist turns his opponent’s body and continues this motion forward until hisopponent can turn no further onto the right side of his stomach on the mat. The samboist turns his
hat his opponent’s elbow faces upward. Using the downwardextend his opponent’s
Elbow lever over the thigh.his opponent’s head with his right arm. His left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and presses thetrapped elbow into the samboist’s right thigh. The samboist applies the correct mhis opponent’s elbow against its natural bend. When hyperopponent’s arm must be kept in such a position that his opponent’s little finger faces the mat (Figure 94).If the samboist’s left arm is not strong enough on its own to apply the lever over the thigh, the samboistcan position his left knee on his opponent’s right forearm and apply pressure from above to assist his leftarm in applying the ploy.
Elbow lever over the forearbut while they are close, he is not pressing his body into his opponent. Wishing to free himself, theopponent braces against the samboist’s chest with both hands to drive the samboist awaysamboist grips his opponent’s right forearm under the samboist’s left armpit, so that the outside of hisopponent’s trapped elbow is over the samboist’s left forearm. The samboist braces his right palm on thebase of his opponent’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s left hand grips the samboist’s right forearm.
The samboist lifts his opponent’s trapped elbow by moving the samboist’s left forearm upward ashis left armpit presses his opponent’s trapped wrist downward to apply the hypernatural bend of his opponent’s elbow joint (Figure 95).
Another variant of this ploy is applied from the hold down beside the head. In this case, thesamboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and he sets his left elbow on theopponent’s right side, so that he can position his opponent’s right forearm close to his body. Thesamboist applies the outer edge of his right forearm under his opponent’s right elbow, so that his righthand can grip his left forearm.
The samboist presses his left hand downward onto his opponent’s right wrist as the samboist’sright forearm lifts his opponent’s elbow upward to hyperbend.
Elbow lever over the forearm with the shoulder gripped ihis opponent in the lateral hold down so that the samboist’s right arm grips his opponent’s head. Thesamboist’s left hand grips the opponent’s right wrist from the inside. Releasing his opponent’s head, thesamboist quickly grips the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s right armpit. Hethen applies his right forearm under the outside of his opponent’s right elbow, and his right hand grips hisleft forearm.
Figure 94
Elbow lever over the thigh. The samboist grips his opponent in the lateral hold down by holdinghis opponent’s head with his right arm. His left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and presses thetrapped elbow into the samboist’s right thigh. The samboist applies the correct mhis opponent’s elbow against its natural bend. When hyper-extending his opponent’s right arm, hisopponent’s arm must be kept in such a position that his opponent’s little finger faces the mat (Figure 94).
is not strong enough on its own to apply the lever over the thigh, the samboistcan position his left knee on his opponent’s right forearm and apply pressure from above to assist his left
Figure 95
Elbow lever over the forearm. The samboist holds his opponent in the hold down from above,but while they are close, he is not pressing his body into his opponent. Wishing to free himself, theopponent braces against the samboist’s chest with both hands to drive the samboist awaysamboist grips his opponent’s right forearm under the samboist’s left armpit, so that the outside of hisopponent’s trapped elbow is over the samboist’s left forearm. The samboist braces his right palm on the
oulder, and the samboist’s left hand grips the samboist’s right forearm.The samboist lifts his opponent’s trapped elbow by moving the samboist’s left forearm upward as
his left armpit presses his opponent’s trapped wrist downward to apply the hyper-natural bend of his opponent’s elbow joint (Figure 95).
Another variant of this ploy is applied from the hold down beside the head. In this case, thesamboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and he sets his left elbow on theopponent’s right side, so that he can position his opponent’s right forearm close to his body. Thesamboist applies the outer edge of his right forearm under his opponent’s right elbow, so that his right
amboist presses his left hand downward onto his opponent’s right wrist as the samboist’sright forearm lifts his opponent’s elbow upward to hyper-extend his opponent’s elbow against its natural
Elbow lever over the forearm with the shoulder gripped in the armpit.his opponent in the lateral hold down so that the samboist’s right arm grips his opponent’s head. Thesamboist’s left hand grips the opponent’s right wrist from the inside. Releasing his opponent’s head, the
kly grips the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s right armpit. Hethen applies his right forearm under the outside of his opponent’s right elbow, and his right hand grips his
The samboist grips his opponent in the lateral hold down by holdinghis opponent’s head with his right arm. His left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and presses thetrapped elbow into the samboist’s right thigh. The samboist applies the correct motion to hyper-extend
extending his opponent’s right arm, hisopponent’s arm must be kept in such a position that his opponent’s little finger faces the mat (Figure 94).
is not strong enough on its own to apply the lever over the thigh, the samboistcan position his left knee on his opponent’s right forearm and apply pressure from above to assist his left
The samboist holds his opponent in the hold down from above,but while they are close, he is not pressing his body into his opponent. Wishing to free himself, theopponent braces against the samboist’s chest with both hands to drive the samboist away from him. Thesamboist grips his opponent’s right forearm under the samboist’s left armpit, so that the outside of hisopponent’s trapped elbow is over the samboist’s left forearm. The samboist braces his right palm on the
oulder, and the samboist’s left hand grips the samboist’s right forearm.The samboist lifts his opponent’s trapped elbow by moving the samboist’s left forearm upward as
-extension against the
Another variant of this ploy is applied from the hold down beside the head. In this case, thesamboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and he sets his left elbow on the mat near hisopponent’s right side, so that he can position his opponent’s right forearm close to his body. Thesamboist applies the outer edge of his right forearm under his opponent’s right elbow, so that his right
amboist presses his left hand downward onto his opponent’s right wrist as the samboist’sextend his opponent’s elbow against its natural
n the armpit. The samboist gripshis opponent in the lateral hold down so that the samboist’s right arm grips his opponent’s head. Thesamboist’s left hand grips the opponent’s right wrist from the inside. Releasing his opponent’s head, the
kly grips the shoulder part of his opponent’s right arm under the samboist’s right armpit. Hethen applies his right forearm under the outside of his opponent’s right elbow, and his right hand grips his
The samboist presses hisforearm lifts up to hyper-extend his opponent’s right elbow against its natural bend (Figure 96).
Somersaulting the opponent to set the elbow lever over the forearm.fours. The samboist is by his opponent’s left shoulder. He then wraps his left shin around the outside ofhis opponent’s left shoulder and rolls his opponent forward over that shoulder to allow his right hand togrip the inside of his opponent’s right wrist. Following the roll over the opponent’s right shoulder, thesamboist, while his opponent is rolling, uses his left shin to grip his opponent’s left arm from inside.Rolling onto his back, he throws his legs over his opponent, so tbetween the samboist’s arms, so that the samboist’s left arm is closer to the legs. The opponent’sshoulder must be trapped in the samboist’s legs.
The samboist’s arms draw the opponent’s right wrist to the samboitrapped arm. The samboist’s left forearm is applied under the opponent’s trapped elbow and his left handgrips his own right forearm. His right hand presses on his opponent’s right wrist from above, so that whenthe samboist raises his left forearm, he is hyper(Figure 97).
Clamping the arms with the thighs and hyperarm.
The sambist grips his opponent in the hold downshoulders back and away from his opponent, and from there, the samboist quickly hops with his kneesforward, so that his knees are on his opponent’s shoulders where the samboist strongly clamps his thighsagainst the shoulder part of his opponent’s arms with his opponent’s arms crossed. His right hand thengrips his opponent’s right wrist, and the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s left wrist.
The samboist then hyperThe opponent may also submit when his arms are crossed as the samboist’s thighs clamp his arms intohis body.
Hyper-extending the elbow by turning the shoulder outward.straight as he lies with his back on the mat so that his elbow joint is facing downward, the samboistshould position himself to hyper-section of the samboist’s body. If the opponent is lying on his stomach, the samopponent’s elbow to face upward. In this case, is pressure is applied in an upward direction.
Elbow lever by gripping the arm between the legs.samboist near to his right side. The samboist’s le
Figure 96
The samboist presses his left hand down on his opponent’s right wrist while the samboist’s rightextend his opponent’s right elbow against its natural bend (Figure 96).
Figure 97
Somersaulting the opponent to set the elbow lever over the forearm.fours. The samboist is by his opponent’s left shoulder. He then wraps his left shin around the outside ofhis opponent’s left shoulder and rolls his opponent forward over that shoulder to allow his right hand to
opponent’s right wrist. Following the roll over the opponent’s right shoulder, thesamboist, while his opponent is rolling, uses his left shin to grip his opponent’s left arm from inside.Rolling onto his back, he throws his legs over his opponent, so that his opponent’s right arm is trappedbetween the samboist’s arms, so that the samboist’s left arm is closer to the legs. The opponent’sshoulder must be trapped in the samboist’s legs.
The samboist’s arms draw the opponent’s right wrist to the samboist’s head to straighten thetrapped arm. The samboist’s left forearm is applied under the opponent’s trapped elbow and his left handgrips his own right forearm. His right hand presses on his opponent’s right wrist from above, so that when
aises his left forearm, he is hyper-extending his opponent’s elbow against its natural bend
Clamping the arms with the thighs and hyper-extending the opponent’s elbow over his
Figure 98
The sambist grips his opponent in the hold down from above with the samboist holding hisshoulders back and away from his opponent, and from there, the samboist quickly hops with his kneesforward, so that his knees are on his opponent’s shoulders where the samboist strongly clamps his thighs
he shoulder part of his opponent’s arms with his opponent’s arms crossed. His right hand thengrips his opponent’s right wrist, and the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s left wrist.
The samboist then hyper-extends his opponent’s left elbow over his opponent’s right arm or body.The opponent may also submit when his arms are crossed as the samboist’s thighs clamp his arms into
extending the elbow by turning the shoulder outward. If the opponent’s arms areis back on the mat so that his elbow joint is facing downward, the samboist
-extend his opponent’s elbow joint by guiding the elbow under somesection of the samboist’s body. If the opponent is lying on his stomach, the samboist must turn hisopponent’s elbow to face upward. In this case, is pressure is applied in an upward direction.
Elbow lever by gripping the arm between the legs. The opponent lies on his back with thesamboist near to his right side. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, and his right
left hand down on his opponent’s right wrist while the samboist’s rightextend his opponent’s right elbow against its natural bend (Figure 96).
Somersaulting the opponent to set the elbow lever over the forearm. The opponent is on allfours. The samboist is by his opponent’s left shoulder. He then wraps his left shin around the outside ofhis opponent’s left shoulder and rolls his opponent forward over that shoulder to allow his right hand to
opponent’s right wrist. Following the roll over the opponent’s right shoulder, thesamboist, while his opponent is rolling, uses his left shin to grip his opponent’s left arm from inside.
hat his opponent’s right arm is trappedbetween the samboist’s arms, so that the samboist’s left arm is closer to the legs. The opponent’s
st’s head to straighten thetrapped arm. The samboist’s left forearm is applied under the opponent’s trapped elbow and his left handgrips his own right forearm. His right hand presses on his opponent’s right wrist from above, so that when
extending his opponent’s elbow against its natural bend
extending the opponent’s elbow over his
from above with the samboist holding hisshoulders back and away from his opponent, and from there, the samboist quickly hops with his kneesforward, so that his knees are on his opponent’s shoulders where the samboist strongly clamps his thighs
he shoulder part of his opponent’s arms with his opponent’s arms crossed. His right hand thengrips his opponent’s right wrist, and the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s left wrist.
s opponent’s right arm or body.The opponent may also submit when his arms are crossed as the samboist’s thighs clamp his arms into
If the opponent’s arms areis back on the mat so that his elbow joint is facing downward, the samboist
extend his opponent’s elbow joint by guiding the elbow under someboist must turn his
opponent’s elbow to face upward. In this case, is pressure is applied in an upward direction.The opponent lies on his back with the
ft hand grips his opponent’s right sleeve, and his right
hand grips his opponent’s right wrist from the inside. Simultaneously with this, the samboist sets his rightfoot close to his opponent’s right armpit. Then the samboist’s left hand grips his opponnear to his right hand simultaneously, his straightened left leg positions its thigh over his opponent’s neck.The samboist sits his left buttock on the mat as he strongly draws his opponent’s right arm toward himand upward. The samboist frees his right leg from under his opponent’s body and sets it atop hisopponent’s chest so that the samboist’s Achilles tendon on his right leg lightly contacts his left shin.
The samboist straightens his legs as his thighs clamps together around his oat its shoulder. The samboist turns his opponent’s right palm in the direction of his opponent’s head tohyper-extend his opponent’s elbow against its natural bend over the samboist’s right leg (Figure 99).
Somersaulting the opponent into the elbow lever between the legs.fours, and the samboist is close to his left side. The samboist steps his right leg over his opponent’s andsets his foot close to his opponent’s right armpit as he simultaneouslyopponent’s right arm. Then, the samboist’s left leg is set to bisect the angle between his opponent’s rightshoulder and head. The samboist’s right hand grips behind his opponent’s right elbow, and the samboistsomersaults forward and across his right shoulder and uses a strong leg motion to move his opponent leftand away from him. During the somersault, the samboist’s arms grip the inside of his opponent’s wrist toapply the elbow lever by gripping the arm between t
Upsetting or over turning the opponent and applying the elbow lever with the arm grippedbetween the legs. If the opponent when the somersaulting elbow lever with the arm gripped betweenthe legs (see above) is applied to him sploy to the other side by quickly moving his body directly to the rear with his opponent’s trapped armfirmly gripped. From this position, he slowly and smoothly falls to the rear and onto hopponent’s straightened right arm firmly gripped between his legs. To complete the ploy, the samboistapplies the elbow lever with the arm gripped between the legs.
The elbow lever gripping the arm between the legs from the hold down besiThe samboist grips his opponent in the hold down beside the head without gripping the arm. He thenfirmly grips his opponent’s right arm under his right armpit and sets his left palm on his opponent’s leftshoulder as he moves his knees to this opponent’s neck while gripping his opponent’s free right forearm with both of his hands. The samboistthen draws strongly upward and toward him on the trapped arm. Simultaneouslyright leg on his opponent’s chest and concluses this ploy by applying the elbow lever with the arm grippedbetween the legs.
The elbow lever gripping the arm between the legs by lying on the stomach.is on all fours. The samboist is on his left knee close to his opponent’s left side. Both of the samboist’shands grip his opponent’s right arm just before the samboist throws his right leg over his opponent’s headas the samboist reclines onto his stomach with his crossedarm.
The samboist then turns his opponent’s trapped arm with its palm toward his head to hyperextend his opponent’s elbow joint by pressing down on the joint with his stomach.
Twisting the Opponent’s Shoulder Joi
Twisting the opponent’s shoulder joint can be applied as a supplement to the lever in the casewhere an attack on the opponent’s forearm and shoulder if foiled by the opponent bending his elbow. Ifthe opponent’s forearm is facing his head,
Cross body arm knot.his right knee is near his opponent’s right side, and his left knee presses his opponent’s right arm into theopponent’s head. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s left wrist from the inside, so that the
hand grips his opponent’s right wrist from the inside. Simultaneously with this, the samboist sets his rightfoot close to his opponent’s right armpit. Then the samboist’s left hand grips his opponnear to his right hand simultaneously, his straightened left leg positions its thigh over his opponent’s neck.The samboist sits his left buttock on the mat as he strongly draws his opponent’s right arm toward him
frees his right leg from under his opponent’s body and sets it atop hisopponent’s chest so that the samboist’s Achilles tendon on his right leg lightly contacts his left shin.
The samboist straightens his legs as his thighs clamps together around his oat its shoulder. The samboist turns his opponent’s right palm in the direction of his opponent’s head to
extend his opponent’s elbow against its natural bend over the samboist’s right leg (Figure 99).
Figure 99
he opponent into the elbow lever between the legs.fours, and the samboist is close to his left side. The samboist steps his right leg over his opponent’s andsets his foot close to his opponent’s right armpit as he simultaneously uses his left elbow crook to grip hisopponent’s right arm. Then, the samboist’s left leg is set to bisect the angle between his opponent’s rightshoulder and head. The samboist’s right hand grips behind his opponent’s right elbow, and the samboist
aults forward and across his right shoulder and uses a strong leg motion to move his opponent leftand away from him. During the somersault, the samboist’s arms grip the inside of his opponent’s wrist toapply the elbow lever by gripping the arm between the legs as described above.
Upsetting or over turning the opponent and applying the elbow lever with the arm grippedIf the opponent when the somersaulting elbow lever with the arm gripped between
the legs (see above) is applied to him shows strong resistance to this motion, the samboist can take hisploy to the other side by quickly moving his body directly to the rear with his opponent’s trapped armfirmly gripped. From this position, he slowly and smoothly falls to the rear and onto hopponent’s straightened right arm firmly gripped between his legs. To complete the ploy, the samboistapplies the elbow lever with the arm gripped between the legs.
The elbow lever gripping the arm between the legs from the hold down besiThe samboist grips his opponent in the hold down beside the head without gripping the arm. He thenfirmly grips his opponent’s right arm under his right armpit and sets his left palm on his opponent’s leftshoulder as he moves his knees to the right. As soon as the samboist is able, he throws his left leg overhis opponent’s neck while gripping his opponent’s free right forearm with both of his hands. The samboistthen draws strongly upward and toward him on the trapped arm. Simultaneously with this, he sets hisright leg on his opponent’s chest and concluses this ploy by applying the elbow lever with the arm gripped
The elbow lever gripping the arm between the legs by lying on the stomach.he samboist is on his left knee close to his opponent’s left side. Both of the samboist’s
hands grip his opponent’s right arm just before the samboist throws his right leg over his opponent’s headas the samboist reclines onto his stomach with his crossed legs wrapped around his opponent’s right
The samboist then turns his opponent’s trapped arm with its palm toward his head to hyperextend his opponent’s elbow joint by pressing down on the joint with his stomach.
Twisting the Opponent’s Shoulder Joint Outward
Twisting the opponent’s shoulder joint can be applied as a supplement to the lever in the casewhere an attack on the opponent’s forearm and shoulder if foiled by the opponent bending his elbow. Ifthe opponent’s forearm is facing his head, the shoulder joint can be twisted outward.
Cross body arm knot. The samboist holds his opponent in the cross body hold down, so thathis right knee is near his opponent’s right side, and his left knee presses his opponent’s right arm into the
ead. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s left wrist from the inside, so that the
hand grips his opponent’s right wrist from the inside. Simultaneously with this, the samboist sets his rightfoot close to his opponent’s right armpit. Then the samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s right armnear to his right hand simultaneously, his straightened left leg positions its thigh over his opponent’s neck.The samboist sits his left buttock on the mat as he strongly draws his opponent’s right arm toward him
frees his right leg from under his opponent’s body and sets it atop hisopponent’s chest so that the samboist’s Achilles tendon on his right leg lightly contacts his left shin.
The samboist straightens his legs as his thighs clamps together around his opponent’s right armat its shoulder. The samboist turns his opponent’s right palm in the direction of his opponent’s head to
extend his opponent’s elbow against its natural bend over the samboist’s right leg (Figure 99).
he opponent into the elbow lever between the legs. The opponent is on allfours, and the samboist is close to his left side. The samboist steps his right leg over his opponent’s and
uses his left elbow crook to grip hisopponent’s right arm. Then, the samboist’s left leg is set to bisect the angle between his opponent’s rightshoulder and head. The samboist’s right hand grips behind his opponent’s right elbow, and the samboist
aults forward and across his right shoulder and uses a strong leg motion to move his opponent leftand away from him. During the somersault, the samboist’s arms grip the inside of his opponent’s wrist to
Upsetting or over turning the opponent and applying the elbow lever with the arm grippedIf the opponent when the somersaulting elbow lever with the arm gripped between
hows strong resistance to this motion, the samboist can take hisploy to the other side by quickly moving his body directly to the rear with his opponent’s trapped armfirmly gripped. From this position, he slowly and smoothly falls to the rear and onto his back with hisopponent’s straightened right arm firmly gripped between his legs. To complete the ploy, the samboist
The elbow lever gripping the arm between the legs from the hold down beside the head.The samboist grips his opponent in the hold down beside the head without gripping the arm. He thenfirmly grips his opponent’s right arm under his right armpit and sets his left palm on his opponent’s left
he right. As soon as the samboist is able, he throws his left leg overhis opponent’s neck while gripping his opponent’s free right forearm with both of his hands. The samboist
with this, he sets hisright leg on his opponent’s chest and concluses this ploy by applying the elbow lever with the arm gripped
The elbow lever gripping the arm between the legs by lying on the stomach. The opponenthe samboist is on his left knee close to his opponent’s left side. Both of the samboist’s
hands grip his opponent’s right arm just before the samboist throws his right leg over his opponent’s headlegs wrapped around his opponent’s right
The samboist then turns his opponent’s trapped arm with its palm toward his head to hyper-extend his opponent’s elbow joint by pressing down on the joint with his stomach.
nt Outward
Twisting the opponent’s shoulder joint can be applied as a supplement to the lever in the casewhere an attack on the opponent’s forearm and shoulder if foiled by the opponent bending his elbow. If
the shoulder joint can be twisted outward.The samboist holds his opponent in the cross body hold down, so that
his right knee is near his opponent’s right side, and his left knee presses his opponent’s right arm into theead. The samboist’s left hand grips his opponent’s left wrist from the inside, so that the
samboist can set his left elbow close to his opponent’s left ear. The samboist guides his right forearmunder his opponent’s left shoulder, so that his right hand
He pulls his opponent’s left elbow into his opponent’s side.Lifting his right forearm, he lifts his opponent’s shoulder upward as his left hand presses his
opponent’s left wrist downward.To complete twisting his oppo
close to the samboist’s body (Figure 100).
Arm knot by gripping the forearm in the armpit.samboist is on his knees close to his right side. The opponent, in attempting to avoid the hold down, usesboth of his arms to drive the samboist away from his chest.
The samboist then grips his opponent’s right fforearm to the outside of his opponent’s right elbow to grip his right hand with his left hand. Then, thesamboist steps his right leg over his opponent’s body to set his foot close to his opponent’s lsamboist lifts his opponent’s right elbow upward toward his head as his left armpit presses downward onhis opponent’s right wrist (Figure 101).
Leg knot. The samboist grips his opponent in the lateral hold down, so that thearm holds his opponent’s head. His left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and the shoulder part of hisright arm is set on the samboist’s right thigh. The opponent in an attempt to avoid the elbow lever overthe thigh bends his right elbow.
Driving his opponent’s right wrist forward and downward, the samboist hooks it under his rightshin close to the knee. Sliding his right heel under his left leg, the samboist also drives forward andupward with his right hip to twist his opponent’
Leg knot from reclining under the opponent.above. When the samboist grips his opponent’s right wrist and positions his right thigh at his opponent’sright shoulder, he moves close to his opponent and leans slightly to the right. The opponent unbalancesthe samboist and rolls him over his body. In the moment that he is being rolled, the samboist slightlyraises his left hand to draw his opponent’s trapped arm under the sambois
samboist can set his left elbow close to his opponent’s left ear. The samboist guides his right forearmunder his opponent’s left shoulder, so that his right hand can grip his left forearm from above.
He pulls his opponent’s left elbow into his opponent’s side.Lifting his right forearm, he lifts his opponent’s shoulder upward as his left hand presses his
To complete twisting his opponent’s shoulder joint, the opponent’s body must be on the groundclose to the samboist’s body (Figure 100).
Figure 100
Figure 101
Arm knot by gripping the forearm in the armpit. The opponent lies on his back while thesamboist is on his knees close to his right side. The opponent, in attempting to avoid the hold down, usesboth of his arms to drive the samboist away from his chest.
The samboist then grips his opponent’s right forearm under his left armpit, and he applies his leftforearm to the outside of his opponent’s right elbow to grip his right hand with his left hand. Then, thesamboist steps his right leg over his opponent’s body to set his foot close to his opponent’s lsamboist lifts his opponent’s right elbow upward toward his head as his left armpit presses downward onhis opponent’s right wrist (Figure 101).
Figure 102
The samboist grips his opponent in the lateral hold down, so that thearm holds his opponent’s head. His left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and the shoulder part of hisright arm is set on the samboist’s right thigh. The opponent in an attempt to avoid the elbow lever over
Driving his opponent’s right wrist forward and downward, the samboist hooks it under his rightshin close to the knee. Sliding his right heel under his left leg, the samboist also drives forward andupward with his right hip to twist his opponent’s shoulder joint (Figure 102).
Leg knot from reclining under the opponent. The samboist applies the leg knot as describedabove. When the samboist grips his opponent’s right wrist and positions his right thigh at his opponent’s
lose to his opponent and leans slightly to the right. The opponent unbalancesthe samboist and rolls him over his body. In the moment that he is being rolled, the samboist slightlyraises his left hand to draw his opponent’s trapped arm under the samboist’s right shin.
samboist can set his left elbow close to his opponent’s left ear. The samboist guides his right forearmcan grip his left forearm from above.
Lifting his right forearm, he lifts his opponent’s shoulder upward as his left hand presses his
nent’s shoulder joint, the opponent’s body must be on the ground
The opponent lies on his back while thesamboist is on his knees close to his right side. The opponent, in attempting to avoid the hold down, uses
orearm under his left armpit, and he applies his leftforearm to the outside of his opponent’s right elbow to grip his right hand with his left hand. Then, thesamboist steps his right leg over his opponent’s body to set his foot close to his opponent’s left side. Thesamboist lifts his opponent’s right elbow upward toward his head as his left armpit presses downward on
The samboist grips his opponent in the lateral hold down, so that the samboist’s rightarm holds his opponent’s head. His left hand grips his opponent’s right wrist and the shoulder part of hisright arm is set on the samboist’s right thigh. The opponent in an attempt to avoid the elbow lever over
Driving his opponent’s right wrist forward and downward, the samboist hooks it under his rightshin close to the knee. Sliding his right heel under his left leg, the samboist also drives forward and
The samboist applies the leg knot as describedabove. When the samboist grips his opponent’s right wrist and positions his right thigh at his opponent’s
lose to his opponent and leans slightly to the right. The opponent unbalancesthe samboist and rolls him over his body. In the moment that he is being rolled, the samboist slightly
t’s right shin.
Driving his body weight into his opponent’s left arm, the samboist uses this motion to drive hisright shin away from him to twist his opponent’s shoulder joint from a position of being under theopponent.
Twisting the Opponent’s Shoulder
Twisting the opponent’s shoulder joint inward can be applied much the same as twisting hisshoulder outward as a supplement to the elbow lever. The lever is applied until the opponent blocks thelever by bending his elbow, but the forearm intoward his legs.
Knot with the forearm directed downward.cross body hold down. His right hand grips his opponent’s left wrist beside his opponent’s fodrives the trapped wrist into the mat. The samboist sets his right elbow close to his opponent’s left side,and he guides his left forearm under his opponent’s left shoulder beside his opponent’s head, so that thesamboist’s left hand can grip his right forearm.
The samboist raises his left forearm to lift his opponent’s left elbow upward as the samboist’sright hand drags his opponent’s away from the samboist and downward. Simultaneously, the samboistturns his right hand to rotate his opponen
Twisting the shoulder by raising the elbow.hold down so that the samboist’s right arm is holding his opponent’s head. The opponent to avoid thesubmission hold to his arm locks his hands behind the samboist’s back.
The samboist clamps his opponent’s right wrist under his left armpit and locks to his hands to beable to use both arms to lift his opponent’s right elbow upward (Figure 103).
Achilles Tendon Crush Executed to the Opponent’s Straightened Leg
Achilles tendon crush from the hold down beside the legs.in the hold down beside the legs. The samboist raises his body, so that his right arm can driveopponent’s left knee away from him to the right, and his right shin can turn its heel to the left. Then thesamboist energetically throws his left leg over his opponent’s chest as the samboist grips his opponent’sright foot under his left armpit.
The samboist guides the outer edge of his left forearm under the Achilles tendon of the grippedleg (close to the opponent’s heel). The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left wrist. The left palmis turned toward the samboist. The samboist then rto retract his attacked leg, so that the samboist’s left arm radial bone presses upward into his opponent’sAchilles tendon. The samboist arches toward his opponent’s toes while keeping the trappedarmpit (Figure 104).
Driving his body weight into his opponent’s left arm, the samboist uses this motion to drive hisright shin away from him to twist his opponent’s shoulder joint from a position of being under the
Twisting the Opponent’s Shoulder Joint Inward
Twisting the opponent’s shoulder joint inward can be applied much the same as twisting hisshoulder outward as a supplement to the elbow lever. The lever is applied until the opponent blocks thelever by bending his elbow, but the forearm in this case is directed not toward the opponent’s head but
Knot with the forearm directed downward. The samboist has secured his opponent in thecross body hold down. His right hand grips his opponent’s left wrist beside his opponent’s fodrives the trapped wrist into the mat. The samboist sets his right elbow close to his opponent’s left side,and he guides his left forearm under his opponent’s left shoulder beside his opponent’s head, so that the
his right forearm.The samboist raises his left forearm to lift his opponent’s left elbow upward as the samboist’s
right hand drags his opponent’s away from the samboist and downward. Simultaneously, the samboistturns his right hand to rotate his opponent’s left wrist inward to execute the ploy.
Figure 103
Twisting the shoulder by raising the elbow. The samboist grips his opponent in the lateralhold down so that the samboist’s right arm is holding his opponent’s head. The opponent to avoid the
mission hold to his arm locks his hands behind the samboist’s back.The samboist clamps his opponent’s right wrist under his left armpit and locks to his hands to be
able to use both arms to lift his opponent’s right elbow upward (Figure 103).
ndon Crush Executed to the Opponent’s Straightened Leg
Figure 104
Achilles tendon crush from the hold down beside the legs. The samboist grips his opponentin the hold down beside the legs. The samboist raises his body, so that his right arm can driveopponent’s left knee away from him to the right, and his right shin can turn its heel to the left. Then thesamboist energetically throws his left leg over his opponent’s chest as the samboist grips his opponent’s
e samboist guides the outer edge of his left forearm under the Achilles tendon of the grippedleg (close to the opponent’s heel). The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left wrist. The left palmis turned toward the samboist. The samboist then reclines onto his left side without allowing his opponentto retract his attacked leg, so that the samboist’s left arm radial bone presses upward into his opponent’sAchilles tendon. The samboist arches toward his opponent’s toes while keeping the trapped
Driving his body weight into his opponent’s left arm, the samboist uses this motion to drive hisright shin away from him to twist his opponent’s shoulder joint from a position of being under the
Joint Inward
Twisting the opponent’s shoulder joint inward can be applied much the same as twisting hisshoulder outward as a supplement to the elbow lever. The lever is applied until the opponent blocks the
this case is directed not toward the opponent’s head but
The samboist has secured his opponent in thecross body hold down. His right hand grips his opponent’s left wrist beside his opponent’s forehead anddrives the trapped wrist into the mat. The samboist sets his right elbow close to his opponent’s left side,and he guides his left forearm under his opponent’s left shoulder beside his opponent’s head, so that the
The samboist raises his left forearm to lift his opponent’s left elbow upward as the samboist’sright hand drags his opponent’s away from the samboist and downward. Simultaneously, the samboist
The samboist grips his opponent in the lateralhold down so that the samboist’s right arm is holding his opponent’s head. The opponent to avoid the
The samboist clamps his opponent’s right wrist under his left armpit and locks to his hands to be
ndon Crush Executed to the Opponent’s Straightened Leg
The samboist grips his opponentin the hold down beside the legs. The samboist raises his body, so that his right arm can drive hisopponent’s left knee away from him to the right, and his right shin can turn its heel to the left. Then thesamboist energetically throws his left leg over his opponent’s chest as the samboist grips his opponent’s
e samboist guides the outer edge of his left forearm under the Achilles tendon of the grippedleg (close to the opponent’s heel). The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s left wrist. The left palm
eclines onto his left side without allowing his opponentto retract his attacked leg, so that the samboist’s left arm radial bone presses upward into his opponent’sAchilles tendon. The samboist arches toward his opponent’s toes while keeping the trapped leg under his
Achilles tendon crush when the opponent lies on his stomach.stomach with his chin tucked in under his arms, and his legs are straightened. The samboist kneels byhis opponent’s left leg. The samboist leans forward so that his right hand can grip his opponent’s rightshin and calf under his right armpit (Figure 105). The samboist throws his left leg over his opponent, andthen the samboist’s entire body follows withtransition, the samboist wraps both of his legs around his opponent’s trapped leg to apply the Achillestendon crush as described above (Figure 106).
Achilles tendon crush with the opponentsamboist approaches his opponent from behind, so that his right hand can grip the back of his opponent’sbelt. Setting his left hand on the mat, the samboist slides his straightened left leg between his oplegs, and as he releases his grip on his opponent’s belt, he throws his right leg on top, so that he canclamp his legs around his opponent’s left leg as he rolls onto his back. During this roll, the samboist’sright armpit grips his opponent’s labove.
Achilles Tendon Crushes when the Opponent’s Leg Is Bent
Achilles tendon crush by sitting on the opponent.hold down beside the legs. Straightening his body, the samboist uses his left hand to drive hisopponent’s right knee left and downward. He then grips his opponent’s left shin and calf area under hisright armpit (Figure 107).
Then using a strong motion the samboist throws his right leg over his opponent and turns hisopponent onto his stomach. The samboist stands on his right foot forward as far as possible as he sits onhis opponent’s buttocks. From there, the samboist guidesso that the samboist can grip can use his left hand to grip his own right wrist. Arching his back, thesamboist applies upward pressure with his right radial bone to his opponent’s Achilles tendon (Figure108).
Figure 105
Figure 106
Achilles tendon crush when the opponent lies on his stomach. The opponent lies on hisstomach with his chin tucked in under his arms, and his legs are straightened. The samboist kneels by
s opponent’s left leg. The samboist leans forward so that his right hand can grip his opponent’s rightshin and calf under his right armpit (Figure 105). The samboist throws his left leg over his opponent, andthen the samboist’s entire body follows with the attacked leg firmly clamped under his right armpit. In thistransition, the samboist wraps both of his legs around his opponent’s trapped leg to apply the Achillestendon crush as described above (Figure 106).
Achilles tendon crush with the opponent on all fours. The opponent is on all fours. Thesamboist approaches his opponent from behind, so that his right hand can grip the back of his opponent’sbelt. Setting his left hand on the mat, the samboist slides his straightened left leg between his oplegs, and as he releases his grip on his opponent’s belt, he throws his right leg on top, so that he canclamp his legs around his opponent’s left leg as he rolls onto his back. During this roll, the samboist’sright armpit grips his opponent’s left calf, so that he can apply the Achilles tendon crush as described
Achilles Tendon Crushes when the Opponent’s Leg Is Bent
Achilles tendon crush by sitting on the opponent. The samboist grips his opponent in theaightening his body, the samboist uses his left hand to drive his
opponent’s right knee left and downward. He then grips his opponent’s left shin and calf area under his
Figure 107
Then using a strong motion the samboist throws his right leg over his opponent and turns hisopponent onto his stomach. The samboist stands on his right foot forward as far as possible as he sits onhis opponent’s buttocks. From there, the samboist guides his right forearm under his opponent’s left leg,so that the samboist can grip can use his left hand to grip his own right wrist. Arching his back, thesamboist applies upward pressure with his right radial bone to his opponent’s Achilles tendon (Figure
The opponent lies on hisstomach with his chin tucked in under his arms, and his legs are straightened. The samboist kneels by
s opponent’s left leg. The samboist leans forward so that his right hand can grip his opponent’s rightshin and calf under his right armpit (Figure 105). The samboist throws his left leg over his opponent, and
the attacked leg firmly clamped under his right armpit. In thistransition, the samboist wraps both of his legs around his opponent’s trapped leg to apply the Achilles
The opponent is on all fours. Thesamboist approaches his opponent from behind, so that his right hand can grip the back of his opponent’sbelt. Setting his left hand on the mat, the samboist slides his straightened left leg between his opponent’slegs, and as he releases his grip on his opponent’s belt, he throws his right leg on top, so that he canclamp his legs around his opponent’s left leg as he rolls onto his back. During this roll, the samboist’s
eft calf, so that he can apply the Achilles tendon crush as described
Achilles Tendon Crushes when the Opponent’s Leg Is Bent
The samboist grips his opponent in theaightening his body, the samboist uses his left hand to drive his
opponent’s right knee left and downward. He then grips his opponent’s left shin and calf area under his
Then using a strong motion the samboist throws his right leg over his opponent and turns hisopponent onto his stomach. The samboist stands on his right foot forward as far as possible as he sits on
his right forearm under his opponent’s left leg,so that the samboist can grip can use his left hand to grip his own right wrist. Arching his back, thesamboist applies upward pressure with his right radial bone to his opponent’s Achilles tendon (Figure
Achilles tendon crush when lying on the opponent.avoid a hold down, he has pulled his knees to his chest. The samboist is close to his opponent’s rightside.
The samboist grips his opponent’s right foot under his right armpit. Simultaneously, his left handstrongly presses into the outside of his opponent’s right knee, and using both hands and his body, thesamboist rolls his opponent onto his stomach.
Without releasing his hold on his opponent’s right foot, the samboist lays his chest on hisopponent’s buttocks, and guides his right radial bone under his opponent’s Achilles tendon, so his lefthand can grip his right wrist. He uses this hold to lift upward. At the same tdownward on his opponent’s right foot.
Knee lever by gripping the calf to the shoulder.down beside the legs. Straightening his body,the left, so that it is only lightly on the mat. The samboist’s left knee is on the mat behind his opponent’sright thigh, so that the samboist can use his left shin to suppress the motion of his
He sets his opponent’s left calf on the samboist’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s right radialbone presses on the tendons in his opponent’s quadriceps muscles close to the knee joint. To increasehis pressure, the samboist’s left ha
Using the strength of both arms and the rising motion of his body, the samboist hyperopponent’s knee joint against its natural bend (Figure 110).
Knee lever and knot assisted by a leg on top.down beside the legs. Straightening his body, the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s left shin and calfarea. Moving his body back, the samboist sits on the mat with his left foot braced in his opponent’s rightknee crook. Simultaneously, the samboist’s right leg is thrown is thrown over his opponent’s left leg, sothat the toes of the samboist’s right foot can hook behind his opponent’s left knee crook.
Using both hands, the samboist lifts his opponent’s left foot as the samboistdownward on his opponent’s trapped knee (Figure 111).
Figure 108
Achilles tendon crush when lying on the opponent. The opponent is lying on his back, and toavoid a hold down, he has pulled his knees to his chest. The samboist is close to his opponent’s right
Figure 109
grips his opponent’s right foot under his right armpit. Simultaneously, his left handstrongly presses into the outside of his opponent’s right knee, and using both hands and his body, thesamboist rolls his opponent onto his stomach.
s hold on his opponent’s right foot, the samboist lays his chest on hisopponent’s buttocks, and guides his right radial bone under his opponent’s Achilles tendon, so his lefthand can grip his right wrist. He uses this hold to lift upward. At the same time, his right armpit pressesdownward on his opponent’s right foot.
Hyper-extending the Knee Joint
Figure 110
Knee lever by gripping the calf to the shoulder. The samboist holds his opponent in the holddown beside the legs. Straightening his body, the samboist’s left arm moves his opponent’s right knee tothe left, so that it is only lightly on the mat. The samboist’s left knee is on the mat behind his opponent’sright thigh, so that the samboist can use his left shin to suppress the motion of his
He sets his opponent’s left calf on the samboist’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s right radialbone presses on the tendons in his opponent’s quadriceps muscles close to the knee joint. To increasehis pressure, the samboist’s left hand grips his right wrist.
Using the strength of both arms and the rising motion of his body, the samboist hyperopponent’s knee joint against its natural bend (Figure 110).
Knee lever and knot assisted by a leg on top. The samboist grips his odown beside the legs. Straightening his body, the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s left shin and calfarea. Moving his body back, the samboist sits on the mat with his left foot braced in his opponent’s right
eously, the samboist’s right leg is thrown is thrown over his opponent’s left leg, sothat the toes of the samboist’s right foot can hook behind his opponent’s left knee crook.
Using both hands, the samboist lifts his opponent’s left foot as the samboistdownward on his opponent’s trapped knee (Figure 111).
The opponent is lying on his back, and toavoid a hold down, he has pulled his knees to his chest. The samboist is close to his opponent’s right
grips his opponent’s right foot under his right armpit. Simultaneously, his left handstrongly presses into the outside of his opponent’s right knee, and using both hands and his body, the
s hold on his opponent’s right foot, the samboist lays his chest on hisopponent’s buttocks, and guides his right radial bone under his opponent’s Achilles tendon, so his left
ime, his right armpit presses
The samboist holds his opponent in the holdthe samboist’s left arm moves his opponent’s right knee to
the left, so that it is only lightly on the mat. The samboist’s left knee is on the mat behind his opponent’sright thigh, so that the samboist can use his left shin to suppress the motion of his opponent’s thigh.
He sets his opponent’s left calf on the samboist’s right shoulder, and the samboist’s right radialbone presses on the tendons in his opponent’s quadriceps muscles close to the knee joint. To increase
Using the strength of both arms and the rising motion of his body, the samboist hyper-extends his
The samboist grips his opponent in the holddown beside the legs. Straightening his body, the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s left shin and calfarea. Moving his body back, the samboist sits on the mat with his left foot braced in his opponent’s right
eously, the samboist’s right leg is thrown is thrown over his opponent’s left leg, sothat the toes of the samboist’s right foot can hook behind his opponent’s left knee crook.
Using both hands, the samboist lifts his opponent’s left foot as the samboist’s right calf presses
Figure 111
Twisting and Hyper-extending the Hip Joint
Figure 112
The leg knot. The opponent reclines on his stomach. The samboist sits to the left side of hisopponent facing his legs. The samboist’s left arm is wrapped around his opponent’s body, and his left legis set close to his opponent’s left leg.
His right heel moves inside to drag his opponent’s left shin toward him, so that his opponent’s leftknee must bend. The samboist’s right hand grips his opponent’s shin calf area to assist in bending theopponent’s knee (the samboist’s left hand can assist as well). The samboist slightly lifts his opponent’sleft thigh as the samboist’s right leg applies downward pressure on his opponent’s left foot.Simultaneously, the samboist’s right arm drives his opponent’s bent right leg away from him and to theleft (Figure 112).
Figure 113
The lever on both thighs. The samboist grips his opponent in the hold down beside the legs.Straightening his body, the samboist’s right hand and arm move his opponent’s left knee to the right, sothat is lightly rests on the mat. His right knee moves across his opponent’s left thigh, and his right shinpresses his opponent’s thigh into the mat. The samboist’s left hand sets his opponent’s right calf to thesamboist’s left shoulder. The samboist’s left shoulder drives his opponent’s right leg away from thesamboist in a forward and to the left direction Figure 113).
Thigh lever with the shin gripped and a foot braced in the knee crook. The samboist gripshis opponent in the hold down beside the legs. Extending his body, the samboist’s left arm drives hisopponent’s right knee away from him and to the left. The samboist braces his left foot in his opponent’sright knee crook as the samboist simultaneously sits back to grip his opponent’s left calf under thesamboist’s right armpit.
Figure 114
Using a strong body motion, the samboist drives his opponent’s left leg away from him to theright, and the samboist’s left leg drive his opponent’s right leg away from him to the left (Figure 114).
Submission Ploys on the Top Wrestler
When wrestling in par terre, the samboist who is wrestling from underneath his opponent canescape from under his opponent to attack with any of the ploys described above. However, he can alsodirectly apply submission ploys from the position that he is already in when he is found beneath hisopponent.
Often, the submission ploys applied to the wrestler on top are a direct response to some ploy oraction applied by the top wrestler.
In the naming of such ploys, the accepted practice is to place the ploy to be used infront of the ploy to be countered, and to separate the two ploys with the word “against”. Thatis, in summary, the top samboist is considered to be in a position of advantage, but thebottom wrestler can exploit some advantages of his own to successfully apply several ploys .
Elbow lever with the leg assisting from above against the hold down beside the legs. Theopponent attempts to grip the samboist in the hold down beside the legs. The samboist braces his rightfoot in the opponent’s left knee and drives his opponent’s left leg as far as possible away from thesamboist. At the same time that he does so, both of his hands grip his opponent’s right arm, and hestrongly turns the trapped arm outward. As soon as his opponent leans to the right and away from thesamboist, the samboist clamps his leg over his opponent’s left arm to apply the elbow lever with theassistance of a leg on top as described earlier in this book.
Elbow lever over the forearm with the opposite side armpit gripping against the lateralhold down or the hold down beside the shoulder. The opponent attempts to grip the samboist inthe lateral hold down by gripping the samboist’s head with his right arm or he attempts to applythe hold down beside the shoulder by kneeling close to the samboist on the samboist’s rightshoulder. The samboist braces his right arm into his opponent’s right shoulder joint area to drivehis opponent away from him as far as possible. At the same time, the samboist grips hisopponent’s right wrist under the samboist’s left armpit. He then guides his left forearm aroundthe outside and under his opponent’s right elbow, and the samboist’s left hand grips his ownright forearm. The samboist throws his left calf over his opponent’s neck, so that the samboistcan drive his opponent’s head away from him.
The samboist applies downward pressure on his opponent’s trapped elbow with his left forearm tohyper-extend the elbow against its natural bend.
Elbow lever over the forearm with the opposite side armpit gripping against the hold downfrom above. The opponent sits atop the samboist and attempts to apply the hold down from above. Thesamboist grips his opponent’s right wrist under the samboist’s left armpit. The samboist braces hisright arm into his opponent’s right shoulder joint area to drive his opponent away from him asfar as possible. He then guides his left forearm around the outside and under his opponent’sright elbow, and the samboist’s left hand grips his own right forearm. The samboist braces hisright thigh on his opponent’s left shin, and the samboist’s left thigh is braced against hisopponent’s right shin.
The samboist applies downward pressure on his opponent’s trapped elbow with his left forearm tohyper-extend the elbow against its natural bend.
Elbow lever with the arm gripped between the legs against the hold down beside the legs.The opponent grips the samboist in the hold down beside the legs. The samboist’s right hand grips theinside of his opponent’s right wrist, and his left hand grips the outside of his opponent’s right shoulder.The samboist’s left hand presses his opponent’s trapped arm to the right, and the samboist’s right handperforms the same action toward the left. There is a variant to this ploy when the opponent leans towardhis right arm where the samboist clamps his left leg over his opponent’s neck to drive him onto his backand to the left away from the samboist. As the opponent falls onto his back, the samboist throws his rightleg over his opponent’s chest, and both of the samboist’s hands grip his opponent’s right arm, so that thesamboist can pull the trapped arm toward him and upward, so that his opponent’s elbow is over thesamboist’s right thigh.
From there, the samboist applies the elbow lever with the arm gripped between the legs asdescribed above.
Figure 115
Leg knot from below against the cross body hold down. The opponent attempts to grip thesamboist in the cross body hold down, and he is near the samboist’s right side.
The samboist’s right arm grips his opponent’s head and pulls it toward the samboist’s chest.Then, the samboist’s left hand grips the inside of his opponent’s right wrist. Strongly bending his rightthigh, the samboist presses his thigh to the shoulder area of his opponent’s right arm. From there, thesamboist drives his opponent’s bent right forearm away from himself to hook the limb with his right calf toapply the leg knot from below (Figure 115).
The Achilles tendon crush against the hold down from above. The opponent attempts toapply the hold down from above on the samboist, but the samboist uses his left thigh to press hisopponent’s right shin into the mat, and he wraps his left wrist around his opponent’s right hand. Thesamboist presses the palm of his right hand into his opponent’s left elbow against its natural bend forcinghis opponent to fall to the left and away from the samboist. As this occurs, the samboist applies theAchilles tendon crush as described above.
Defenses from Submission Ploys
Defensive ploys against submission ploys must:
a) Must deprive the opponent of his stability causing him to lose his balance in a manner thatdeprives him of the strength required to execute a submission ploy,
b) Free the samboist of his opponent’s hold in a manner that prevents his opponent fromgaining the control required to attack the samboist’s limbs further,
c) Counter the opponent’s efforts to bend, straighten, or twist. The attacked limb should beturned inward or outward.
If the opponent attempts to apply the:
a) Outside lever,b) Elbow lever with the assistance of a leg on top,c) Downward forearm knot:
The samboist turns his attacked limb inward (suppination).If the opponent attempts to apply the:
a) Elbow lever with the arm gripped between the legs,b) Cross body arm knot,c) Leg knot:
The samboist defends by turning his attacked limb outward (pronation).If the opponent applies the Achilles tendon crush, or attempts to hyper-extend the samboist’s
knee by straightening his trapped leg, the samboist should defend by bending both his leg and toes andattempt to draw the attacked limb toward him. If the opponent attempts to apply the Achilles tendon crushto the samboist’s bent leg or he attempts using one of his legs to apply a knot to the samboist’s leg, thesamboist defends by applying his entire strength in straightening his attacked leg.
Transitions from Standing Wrestler to Par Terre and the Reverse
Wrestling tactics demand that the samboist be prepared to fight an opponent who is sometimesstanding and sometimes in par terre, and the samboist must be equally prepared to wrestle both when heis standing and when he is on the mat. This relationship to his opponent’s positions accounts forsituations that are both beneficial and contrary to the samboist’s intended offense and defense.Therefore, the samboist, in his desire to wrestle from the most beneficial positions for himself, must beprepared with ploys to wrestle both from standing and par terre and with ploys to transition to and fromboth of these situations.
Transitions from Standing Wrestling to Par Terre
1. When the opponent is thrown onto his knees or buttocks, there are several transitions tocovering the opponent including when the opponent is found reclining between thesamboist’s legs whereby the samboist can then transition to the elbow lever with the armgripped between the legs.
2. When the opponent is thrown onto all fours there may be turnovers to transition the opponentinto a position that the samboist can use to apply a hold down, or if the opponent and thesamboist are both on all fours, the samboist can proceed directly to the following submissionploys:
a) Outward lever,b) Elbow lever with the assistance of a leg on top,c) Elbow lever over the forearm,d) Somersaulting the opponent into the elbow lever with the arm gripped between the legs,e) Achilles tendon crush on an opponent on all fours.
3. When the opponent is thrown onto one side or his back but is using his legs or knees to blockthe samboist from further offense, so that the samboist must apply the appropriatepreparations to transition to par terre to continue his offense.
If the opponent falls on his side by the samboist’s legs, the samboist should apply the elbow leverwith the arm gripped between the legs, the lateral hold down, or the cross body hold down.
If the opponent falls so that his head is by the samboist’s feet, the samboist should apply the holddown beside the head.
If the opponent falls with his legs by the samboist’s feet (the samboist may be standing betweenhis opponent’s legs), the samboist should apply the Achilles tendon crush or the hold down beside thelegs.
4. When the opponent is thrown onto his back or side, and the samboist follows his opponent infalling, so that the samboist lands close to his opponent’s side to transition into applying thelateral hold down.
5. When throwing the opponent over the head, the samboist rolls behind his opponent’ssomersault to sit atop his opponent to transition into the hold down from above.
6. When throwing the opponent with the arm gripped under the armpit, the samboist transitionsto the elbow lever with the arm gripped under the armpit.
7. When covering the opponent:
a. If the opponent attempts to apply the throw over the head, and the samboistssuccessfully moves the attacking leg from his stomach, the samboist can transition to theAchilles tendon crush or the lateral hold down.
b. If the opponent attempts to apply the “saddle”, and the samboist is able to move one ofhis legs to the rear, he can transition to the hold down beside the legs for the Achillestendon crush.
Transitions from Par Terre Wrestling to Standing Wrestling
If the samboist attempts to apply some throw, but his opponent “covers” him, then thesamboist must be in one of two positions:
1) The opponent successfully uses his body to cover the samboist.
2) The opponent is found in some other relationship to the samboist.
If the opponent attempts to grip the samboist’s body in a hold down, the samboist uses hisarms and legs to drive his opponent away from him and rocks his body to one side and turns ontohis back or his stomach or from one side to another. As he does so, he pulls his legs under him torise to standing.
If the opponent knocks the samboist down onto his stomach, there are several means thatthe samboist can use to rise up onto all fours, and from the all fours position, there are severalways that the samboist can attack:
a) Turning the opponent over,
b) Applying submission ploys to the opponent.
If the opponent attempts to turn the samboist over without providing the samboist anopportunity to rise to standing, the samboist must take back the initiative from his opponent by firstrolling to his back, then all fours, and then standing.
If the opponent attacks the samboist with a submission ploy, the samboist must grip one ofhis opponent’s legs and rise back into standing wrestling to lift his opponent off of the mat.
If the opponent grips the samboist leg for the Achilles tendon crush, the samboist must pullthe attacked leg to his chest, and grip the chest area of his opponent’s jacket to draw himself intohis opponent before rising to standing.
If the opponent applies the elbow lever with the assistance of a leg on top, the samboistmust attempt to rotate the attacked arm inward and attempt to rise back up to standing.
As he rises, the samboist’s free arm should grip his opponent’s leg that his found higherthan the samboist’s leg and draw the trapped leg into a convenient position for retaining his holdon that leg.
Chapter IIIThe Tactics of Sambo-wrestling
In a sport style of wrestling such as sambo-wrestling, no one technique or physical qualitycan guarantee success in competition. Tactics are all of the variety of plays in each individualmatch, but in the overall complex of what happens in an entire competition, they play a huge role.Therefore, in sambo-wrestling we study the many rational means for victory over the opponentthat are most important toward that end. Thus, is should be obvious that the mastery of tacticsmust be worked on by every samboist at every opportunity.
Studying the Most on One’s Own
For victory over the opponent, it is necessary that the samboist measure his strength.Therefore, it should follow that to measure strength, the samboist must study strength.
First of all, the samboist must study all of the qualities for this given attribute and the opportunitiestherein.
Growth. The samboist must define his growth in relation to the growth of his opponent’s in a givenweight class.
The average growth of wrestlers in a weight class is defined by the limiting number ofkilograms in weight for a specific weight class. This limit also means that most likely, anopponent will within a certain height range in centimeters, so a combined height and weight figurecan express the samboist’s growth in relation to his opponents. For example, the limiting weight of72 kilgograms (CM) could be stated as 72 kg + 100 cm = 172 см. This average growth for that givenweight class can be measured against the samboist’s own height and weight.
If the samboist’s growth for a given weight class is below the average for that weight class,then he should pay greater attention studying ploys from mid and closer ranges because atthese ranges he is more likely to meet with greater success.
If the samboist’s growth for a given weight class is above the average, then he should pay greaterattention to ploys at the longer ranges.
Weight. About his weight, the samboist must carefully study. He must weigh himself before andafter every training session. After each training session, he must note his exact weight andcompare that to what his recommended weight for competition is. If he is 1-2 kg below hisplanned weight category, he should consider going to a lighter category or working less hard in practiceto preserve his strength. For this purpose, each he must work to either lose the weight for the requiredfor his weight class, or he must work to not lose too much weight for his weight class by watching hisfoods and liquids. Non-sport experimentation indicates that great weight in sambo-wrestlingdoes not necessarily correlate with success, but it certainly is unhealthy.
First, there must be a “diet” based upon medical advice for attaining the samboist’s desiredweight any time the samboist is considering losing 3 or more kilograms.
Strength. Average strength for the samboist is expressed by the number of times, and theamount that the samobist can lift on a horizontal bar 8 to 10 times successively, lifting a kilogrambarbell a certain number of time, and half-squatting on one leg 3 to 5 times successively.
If the samboist cannot meet these specifications, he must increase his training for his strength andwrestle only in matches where he does not hope for his strength to win for him, and he must actively work toexploit his opponent’s own strength against him.
If the samboist meets or exceeds these specifications, then it follows that the samboist shouldconcentrate his attention on those ploys such as the “mill”, turnovers, lifting throws, and submission ployswhen in par terre wrestling.
Endurance. The samboist’s endurance depends first of all on his training. It is not innate but acquired as aresult of systematic training.
The samboist must apply his endurance in matches run at a high tempo. Such matches must last4-5 minutes to define good endurance, and matches of 8 to 10 minutes to define excellent endurance.
If the samboist only possesses good endurance, it is favourable to offer his opponent quick tempomatches, and if he does not possess sufficient endurance then the contrary is true.
Mood and feelings. Close attention is required to feelings and moods. The samboist must
analyze these aspects be aware of their impacts on his ability to wrestle or train. He must always strive forthe best of moods and attitude to feel good about his training and to make the most of his opportunities.
Steady, vigorous, optimistic feelings bode well. This mood must be regularized and maintainedin training so that the samboist does not lead himself to decline or error.
This given distinction is courage and a thirst for victory while at the same time overconfidence, a lack of respect, and injury. These feelings must be must controlled not only duringsambo-wrestling training, but also in every day life.
Negative feelings — fear, confusion and nervousness detract from the samboist’s strength.These feelings are important because in their presence, the samboist only concentrates his attention onone or two aspects of the opponent without noticing any of his opponent’s deficiencies. It is recommendedthat the samboist keep his hands ready and study fully his opponent, with his feelings properly controlled,so that the samboist can exploit the appropriate tactics that will lead him to victory.
A bad mood (negative feelings) also occurs in situations where the samboist hasinsufficient or deficient training. If his training is inadequate, the samboist will perform poorlyin competition. If his training is correct, then his opportunities to medal are increaseddramatically.
Studying the Opponent
If the opponent is tall, then he will most likely prefer that the match be kept at longer ranges,so the samboist must avoid being held in his opponent’s preferred ranges and grips. Thesamboist should consider that the holds of a taller opponent usually are poorly extended, andthat it is dangerous for his opponent to be in closer ranges.
Sometimes, a beginning samboist is absolutely and vainly frightened of a talleropponent.
The taller opponent is often less dexterous and quick in comparison with a samboist of averageheight.
Shorter wrestlers in the various weight classes are almost always very strong, but asexperience demonstrates, they possess lesser coordination and mobility. Thus, these wrestlers, forexample, are often vulnerable to well done sweeping throws.
The opponent of average height is by definition well proportioned to his body, so he is best suitedto the given task of wrestling with a natural means toward those actions.
Further, the wrestler’s body that is longer with shorter limbs will be strong, and thus, he can bedangerous at shorter ranges and in par terre.
The shorter body on a wrestler with longer limbs will be strong for working with light and mid weightswithout varying his ploys for their sizes. Under other conditions, it is possible that he can work to takeadvantate of his greater endurance. In the end though, to be varied in his approach, the samboist mustcarefully calculated.
Scouting in Matches
As it is well to study a given opponent, in truth, to truly study a given opponent can onlytake place within a match.
The samboist may try right at the beginning of his match to scout his opponent by noting from whatstance his opponent likes to work from the most. It is necessary for this purpose for the samboist to payattention to his opponent’s stance and how his opponent’s stance reacts to this or that motion by thesamboist. Usually, in the moment that an opponent adopts a stance, it is a reflection of some planthat the opponent wishes to carry out. This stance is intended to support his opponent’s plannedmotion, and therefore, the stance becomes a reflection of his plans—just as the samboist’s ownstance, grips, reflect the samboist’s own intentions. If the stance is not convenient for theopponent’s plans, it is more difficult for him to act on his plans.
Learning about the opponent, as in observing his stance, leads to greater confidence for thesamboist. As soon as the opponent adopts a new stance, he creates several strengths that must beexplored by the samboist jerking him in various directions to see if his opponent can be unbalanced.
If a given stance that is adopted by the opponent is well executed in training, then he can work from
130
this stance with greater confidence. The opposite is true as well, if a given stance adopted by theopponent is unfamiliar and seldom used, he will replace that stance with a more familiar one at hisearliest opportunity.
Evaluating an opponent’s weaknesses and strengths in his stances:
To attack the opponent, the samboist should strive to make his move when his opponent’sstance is at its weakest position.
A strong opponent is difficult to deal with, but in any case, if the opponent is well supported in the nearrange, he is working from an even stronger position.
An opponent with quick reactions can be uncovered by attempting to grip his leg. By noting how quicklythe opponent is able to withdraw the attacked limb, the samboist can measure his opponent’s speed forreacting.
An opponent who is stronger than the samboist must be dealt with using combinations thatare based on throws in one direction, and when in par terre wrestling, by attacking one of theopponent’s limbs using both hands.
The opponent who has quicker reactions must be dealt with from standing using a mobilestance with combinations made from throws in diverse directions.
To Prevent Being Trapped
If in a match, the samboist is swept into such a position by the opponent that is obviouslyprofitable for applying one of the ploys from our diverse arsenal, he should not rush. The samboistshould prepare deal with is opponent’s intended trap, and if possible, convert the situation to his ownbenefit.
In this case, the samboist can avail himself of several stances, diverse grips, and directions ofmotion with his attention focused on, as is his opponent’s attention, on exploiting these alterations of theirsituations.
If in a given situation, the samboist understands that he is being trapped, he can alter hissituation—whether it is his offense or his defense, to resume his offense.
Tactics against Diverse Opponents
If the samboist’s opponent is strong with good technique, but lacks endurance, then the samboistshould select the tactics of “wearing down the opponent”. The samboist may elect to move to par terrewrestling in an attempt to work on his opponent by being on top of him to force his opponent to carry thesamboist’s weight. Over two to three minutes of standing wrestling, the samboist conducts a quick timematch to develop a dangerous situation for his opponent. As his opponent wears down, the opponent willhave more difficult rising up from the mat and moving on the mat as his heart works harder and harder.As this occurs, his wrestling style will transition to a defensive style allowing the samboist to be moreaggressive in his offense.
If the opponent’s endurance is superior to the samboist’s, then it is more likely that the samboistwould be worn down dangerously by applying the above tactics.
With such an opponent, it is better if the samboist begins his match as he does with most matches byusing resolute attack to develop success with motions that move toward victory.
If his opponent is very energetic and assertive with uninterrupted attacks, the samboist closelyobserves his opponent’s movement until the samboist determines that there is a monotonous pattern that freesthe samboist to push his opponent around on the mat. If this is the case, then each of the opponent’s attacks (once theopponent is committed to that attack) allows the samboist to transition to a ploy of his own.
After 4-5 minutes of the opponent’s energetic offense, his offense will begin to run down causinghim to generate more defense and less offense until he finally transitions to virtually all defense. As thistransition occurs, the samboist applies greater pressure on his opponent.
If the opponent’s actions are very cautious, then the samboist indicates a kind of behavior that is intended tofrighten his opponent to increase his timidity and to discourage his opponent’s offense. The opponent may eventuallycalm himself, so the samboist would be well advised to immediately adjust his offensive tactics to transition to thenext ploy that will lead to his victory over his opponent. If he provides his opponent with “breathing room”, as the
match continues, his opponent will continue to maintain a stronger defensive posture that will be very difficult tobreach.
To counter a samboist who persistently wins his matches, the samboist must use the tactics of “ensnaring ortrapping”. The most common traps are forcing the opponent to cross his legs or various grips designed to set up theopponent for a throw. Traps must be made well and somewhat flexible, so that they are dangerous over widerapplications.
Тactics against Opponent in Various Stances
An opponent in an erect stance in gripping range demands that the samboist be alert with a vigilantreadiness to apply appropriate gripping with the simultaneous launching of a throw.
Against such a stance, the samboist can expect to apply favorably the throw by gripping the legsand wrapping his arms around his opponent’s body.
An opponent in an erect stance can be gripped on his jacket sleeves and the front part of hisbody which can allow the samboist to attack the side of his opponent’s body to unbalance him, tosweep his opponent, or to sweep his opponent by hooking him with his shin or foot.
Against his stance, the samboist may well apply every possible action that uses his legs againsthis opponent’s legs and to attack his opponent’s legs by gripping them with his own legs.
An opponent in a low stance in gripping range is a threat to the samboist’s legs and the lowerpart of his body. Against this stance, the samboist can favorably apply the throw by gripping the arm underthe armpit, knock his opponent down onto all fours, or grip the back of his opponent’s belt to throw with thethrow over the head or body.
The opponent in a low stance may grip the samboist’s sleeves or the front part of thesamboist’s body.. This is basically a passive stance with the opponent intending to attack thesamboist’s legs. Nevertheless, it follows that he can be countered with the throw over the head, and he can apply thesame to the samboist. When n opponent applies such a stance, the samboist may favorably apply the throwby gripping the arm under the armpit, using various take downs, and gripping the back of the opponent’sjacket to apply the throw over the shoulder.
If the opponent in a low stance grips the samboist’s belt or the back of his jacket, this indicates his intentionto move toward one side of the samboist to apply the throw over the hip or the shoulder. Against such an opponent,the samboist act with resolve and take the initiative by applying the throw by gripping one leg, or ducking under hisopponent to throw, or otherwise take the attack to his opponent.
Adopting the Resolve and Offense
This concept consists of having an offensive plan with special attention given completing the intended ploy.The more clearly that the samboist can manage his wrestling to come to the final portion of his ploy, the greater hischances of success.
Avoiding any attempt to attack cannot lead to success. This path is not only fruitless but more perilous tothe samboist than pressing his offense.
When the samboist scouts out and plans for a given opponent in the course of a match, he mustdo so without diverting his attention from the course of the match. He does not have the luxury of time in consideringhis options—he must be economical in his time to support resolute action.
Nothing of value can be discovered without preparation to attack.Before there can an attack, there must be suppression of all of the opponent’s offensive facets. Then, there
must be the appropriate adjustment of the samboist’s planned targets for his intended ploys. A passionate desire towin must be joined with strong action to realize the samboist’s plan. In the attacke, the ploy must be applied with thesamboist’s full power and committment.
If the samboist does correctly choose his moment to attack, then he may meet successful resistance fromhis opponent.
The opponent happens to be more vulnerable during such moments as when he crosses his feet, forgets tobreath, or any other actions that take away from his wrestling ability.
Having chosen his instant, the samboist secures his grip and resolutely applies his intended ploy with all ofhis might. In carrying out that ploy, it is necessary to deem the action as “life and death” and be convinced that theploy is vital and will succeed. All thoughts are set aside except for those directly required to finish the ploy.
Chapter IV
The Techniques and Methods for Studying SamboWrestling
The technique for studying sambo-wrestling considers the questions of the sequence for trainingas well as training in ploys and tactics for this wrestling style.
In order to correct ly to carry out this training process, i t is necessary f irst of al l todevelop an annual work plan for the sambo-wrest ling sect ion.
In this case, the work in the plan must address:
I) Study of practical and theoretical sambo-wrestling material;
2) Preparation for the trainees to be delivered to meet the required GTO standards and complexes;3) Training for competition;4) Organizing and running competitions;5) Propagandizing the sport and making it available to larger audiences;6) Participation in mass actions conducted by the DSO and the local committee on affairs for
physical culture and sports.
Then, one must develop the program for the sports section. In this program, all teaching material isdivided into sections based upon its degree of difficulty in mastering and arranged into lesson plans. Thematerial from the general physical preparation is collected and planned from the GTO documentation, soit is stated in the GTO complexes publications and manuals.
Safety training and self-protection against injuries must be learned to the extent that is stated in thispresent manual.
Study of the ploys for par terre and standing wrestling is conducted in parallel. Proceeding from thepreparatory group of trainees, the conditions are modified for training based up a systematic methodologyfor the ploys.
Preparing the opponent to be thrown is aimed at studying these ploys separately from the throws,so that each preparation can be exploited for applying several throws. Then, as a measure of passage tothrowing an opponent, so that the processes are linked into one ploy applied as a whole.
To study combination of ploys, the samboist must start by learning the var ious ploys that can beappl ied in combinat ions with other ploys.
Defensive and retaliatory ploys are not studied until the second year of training. However, once this isset up, the intent is that the ploys are studied in parallel with their use against the appropriate ploys in longer matcheswhere ploys to be countered are often executed incorrectly or incompletely.
Planning for general physical preparation and the GTO standards as well as planning for thestudy material for the first and second training years is stated in detail in the “Program for the Sport of Sambo-wrestling in the Section for the Complex for Physical Culture” [Published by Physical Culture and Sports 1948].
The subsequent study of applying throws follows from the following tasks:
a) An ordered arrangement to develop the throws that must be acquired and improve the previous throwswith the assistance of material acquired in subsequent events;b) Transitioning to throws and subsequent material and combined, so that each period of study for the samboist contains thematerial for his practical study of throwing in longer matches.
The first task moves in two directions.The first, is for the novice samboist must overcome the difficulty for developing the correct technique for
throwing while he is still learning the basic skills for throwing, and these skills cannot be fully learned until the youngsamboist has mastered the material and techniques for falling correctly onto the mat.
This compels the samboist to apply throws from various groups depending upon the size of hisfalling partner’s body weight, so that his partner is able to correctly slap the mat to mitigate the impact of thefall, and thus, it follows therefore, that the self-protection for falling must be developed to a higher degree.
In the second task, the throws are accomplished based upon their degree of difficulty depending
upon the level of coordinated motion required for the wrestler to throw his partner. Note that theperformance of different throws demands the application of different levels of force. Also, thiscannot come into being without an established sequence of learning that transitions to the actualthrow to be applied.
This second task consists of those actions needed for each period for studying the required throws and todevelop throws in various directions. The correct method for this task is to give the students an opportunity to applythrows in one direction to develop the skills and ability to complete the required throws on an opponent before movingon to apply the required throws in several directions.
Toward that end, it is recommended to follow the plan that is outlined in the chart below.
Throws by Direction
TrainingPeriod
Falling Throwing theOpponent to the Rear
Throwing the Opponentto the Side
Throwing the OpponentForward
FirstPeriod
HalfSomersaulton the Mat
1. Rear SteppingThrow
2. Inside Hook
1. Lateral Sweep
Aerial HalfSomersault
1. Unbalancing byGripping the Backof the Belt
Somersaulton the Mat
1. Unbalancing from theKnees
2. Throw over the head3. Throw Gripping the Arm
in the ArmpitAerial
Somersault1. Front Stepping Throw2. Throw over the Hip3. Reverse Mill
SecondPeriod
HalfSomersaulton the Mat
1. Rear Sweep 1. Foot Hook2. Lateral
Sweep3. Inside
EntwiningAerial HalfSomersault
1. Major Outer Reap2. Throw by
Gripping BothLegs
3. Gripping VariousLegs
1. Lifting Throw2. Inside Lift3. Turnover
Somersaulton the Mat
1.Throw over the Headwith a Foot in theStomach2. Inside Foot Lift3. Front Stepping Throwat the Heel
AerialSomersault
1. Front Sweep2. Entwining Lift3. Sweeping Hip Throw
ThirdPeriod
HalfSomersaulton the Mat
1. Rear SteppingThrow at the Heel
2. Inside SweepingThrow
3. Scissors
1. Rear OuterSitting Throw
1. Throw with ReverseGrip under theArmpit
Aerial HalfSomersault
1. Reverse Throwby Gripping BothLegs
2. Alignment Throw3. Saddle
Somersaulton the Mat
1. TimedLateralSweep
2. RearTurnover
Inside KneeSweep
AerialSomersault
1. Front Knee Sweep2. Reverse Hip Throw3. Mill4. Front Turnover
Similarly, a scheme should be used for the par terre wrestling ploys: the wrestlers begin by learning the holddowns, then progress to the turnovers and methods for covering an opponent (these ploys are learned according totheir degree of difficulty) as set forth in this book.
Once all of this is accomplished, the students begin to learn the submission holds.
The degree of difficulty for the submission holds stems the samboists’ positions during these events whichare constantly changing. When wrestling in par terre, the samboist found on top may apply his ploys with relative
ease because his mobility is greater than that of his opponent on bottom, and the top wrestler can exploit his bodyweight in covering his opponent and applying submission holds.
However, the position of the top wrestler is dependent upon the position of the other wrestler, and somesubmission ploys are actually easier to apply when a wrestler is on his back. Overall though, it is more difficult for thebottom wrestler to gain control over the top wrestler’s limbs unless the top wrestler is bracing his limbs on the mat.
Samboists who are on all fours, or lying on their stomachs are vulnerable to submission ploys as well.
As in all cases, the wrestlers can tasked to in each training period to perform longer matches where thesubmission ploys for each period can be applied in diverse situations. The study period for submission ploys can bedesigned to satisfy certain body positions.
In the first period of studying submission ploys, the training is done without altering the body positions.
In the second period of training, altered body positions for the samboist are used.
In the third training period, altered body positions for the opponent are used.
In the fourth training period, altered body positions and variants of the ploys are used.
It is recommended to follow this training scheme in the plan below:
Study Guide for Par Terre Wrestling Training for Submission Ploys
The Basic Positions for the Samboists and the Submission Ploys
TrainingPeriod
BodyPositions
Upper Body Lower Body
Chest to Chest Chest to Back Chest to Chest
FirstPeriod
No positionchange
1. Elbow Lever over theThigh
2. Leg Knot
3. Cross Body Arm Knot
4. Knee Lever Grippingthe Shin on theShoulder
5. Lever on Both Thighs
1. Outside Lever
2. Leg Knot withthe Leg
1. Elbow Leverover theForearm
2. Leg Knotfrom below
SecondPeriod
Samboist’spositionchanges
1. Cross Body Arm Knotfrom the Lateral Holddown
2. Achilles Tendon Crushfrom the hold downbeside the Legs
3. Knee Lever Knot withAssistance from theLeg above from thehold down beside theLegs
Elbow Lever with the Legon Top
Elbow Lever with theLeg on Top against theHold down beside theLegs
ThirdPeriod
Theopponent’s
positionchanges
Achilles Tendon crush from Lyingon the Opponent
Elbow Lever Grippingthe Arm between theLegs against the Holddown beside the Legs
FourthPeriod
Positions forboth change
Elbow Lever with the Body above 1. Achilles TendonCrush with theOpponent on theStomach
2. Achilles TendonCrush with theOpponent on allFours
Achilles Tendon Crushagainst the Hold downfrom above
Programming and Providing Lessons in Sambo Wrestling
The lessons indicated in the basic format for sambo wrestling are provided to the students in theform of reference material and training tasks.The practical lessons consist of four parts: opening, preparation, basic lesson, and conclusion.
First Part. Opening (3 to 7 minutes).Task: focus the group’s attention, and begin the process of preparing their bodies for the day’s
lesson.Means: checking attendance, drills and exercises including accelerated walking, slow
running, gymnastics with weight.Second Part. Preparat ion (10-30 minutes).Tasks: ready the bodies for the lesson work load .Means: exercises for flexibility, endurance, quickness, dexterity, strength, balance, coordinate
motion along the full spectrum of joint motion. In this part of the lesson, it is recommended to apply theGTO forms and complexes.
Third Part. The basic lesson (50-70 minutes).Tasks: The outlined and consolidated physical and moral qualities that are to be studied are
included with the training in the techniques of sambo-wrestling in various complicated conditions.Means: Study safety mitigation and self-protection for falling. Ploys for sambo-wrestling, (throws,
hold downs, submission ploys, etc.) are studied through all training methods and styles. The wrestlersengage in longer training matches.
Fourth Part. Conclusion (5 – 10 minutes).Tasks: In this part of the training session, the trainer conducts the cool down and reviews the
lessons from the day.Means: Slow walking and exercises to flex and relax the body.Those training in sambo-wrestling should be 15 years of age and older who have been given a
clean bill of health by a doctor.
The number of students engaged should not exceed 16 to 20 people in one training group. Forpractical reasons, it is best to organize the participants according to their weight categories. Thedifference between all partners must not exceed 4 kilograms.
Partners paired to study ploys should only be paired within their weight divisions, and if possible, theyshould be roughly the same height. This arrangement best facilitates their mastering the prescribedploys.
Every year the training for the basic work is divided into preparatory and transitional periods.In the transitional period physical training in lesson form must be decreased to not exceed the
level in the beginning of the basic period. In this period, it is necessary to enter additional kinds of taskingthat are basically light but athletic with flexibility requirements (see the Program for Sambo Wrestling).
In the basic period, the work load is more excessive mainly because of the one-sided exercisesfor ploys or the ploys meeting resistance as well as from training in retaliatory ploys. Also, the trainingmatches are longer.
Tasking in the transitional period is characterized by lighter work required as the students engage invaried and sundry other training modes including light athletics, rules training, and the sports exercises from theGTO complex.
In the conclusion and preparatory portions of the lesson, the basic methods are gymnastics, butthis can include games. With the various ploys in the basic part of the lesson, it is recommended to usethe method of individualized training and work load.
In the basic part of each lesson, apply the study techniques for learning how to fall, and then, progress tothrows, then complicate that work by placing primary attention on form before progressing to par terre wrestling ploys.The wrestlers should be given a 6 x 6 meter area to practice in. The trainees have four corners around a commoncenter. They are then tasked to apply their throws, but before doing so, they must be told exactly in what directionthat the throw must be applied. The format can be set up as a competitive game.
In the longer matches, only those who have previously been well prepared physically can do well. Similarly,they must possess decent falling skills as well as the basic techniques for sambo wrestling. All the other studentsshould continue to further develop their competitive and technical skills.
During the longer matches, the the teacher should provide the indicated training not only in relation totechniques and tactics, but also in relation to developing the samboist’s work ethics.
Any display of any sort of tactless acts in relation to the student’s comrades SHOULD be stoppedimmediately and the corresponding explanations and instructions applied.
For training with one-sided resistance and training in retaliatory ploys on the mat, there must besimultaneous execution of the ploys by the training pairs who will have their roles defined for each member of thepair. For the longer matches, the entire mat is devoted to each pair. Before the beginning of the longer matches, thestudents are tasked with tactical problems that each student must work on during his match. After the match, the teacherwill provide a detailed analysis with remedial actions for all observed mistakes.
Theoretical training is applied via a series of lectures that end with questions from the teacher that are usedto determine how well the students understand the material.
In the practical portion of the lesson, it is recommended to apply 3 – 5 minutes discussions followed byquestions from the teacher on the training, the basic techniques, self-protection, tactics, etc.
The trainer when delivering the lesson must relate his material to all of his pupils, so that theyreceive equal training, and he must observe strict professional distance.
In conducting lessons, it is necessary to remember constantly that training insambo-wrest ling is not an end in itself, but that it serves to prepare the students for bothself-defense and overcoming diff icult ies in life. This training is necessary not only for wrestling,but also to develop our youth and adults on behalf of the Patriots of our Native land, and the legends in thisbusiness: Lenin and Stalin.
For expanding the popular work in the section for sambo-wrestling, it is necessary to prepare, toraise the students that we have, and to attract new students to provide with this socialized training.
This socialized training must in every possible way support the plan and program for every lesson, andprovide the given methods and techniques for applying the training as well as contributing to raising the students’qualif icat ions and gaining authority in the endeavor.
All popular actions should be noted in the news agency as this is necessary to document and popularize thegood efforts toward this socialized training work.
The section’s good work, in many respects, depends upon a correct accounting of what the section asactually accomplished. Checking and revisiting the previously passed material must be accomplished in each lesson.Time must be taken to ensure the health of the students to include doctor’s examinations as well as supervising theindividualized plans and diaries and applying the corresponding records in the journal for the section’s work.
Methods for Training in Ploys
Before transitioning to the next group of this or that set of ploys, it must be noted that just withtransitioning to longer and longer matches, the techniques are not mastered until they can be accomplished,correctly, precisely, and quickly.
Then, each ploy and technique is shown in full detail to include a demonstration of the ploy as awhole. If the ploy is very complicated, or the group is not prepared sufficiently to learn the ploy, it isrecommended that the ploy be broken down into elements, and that the elements be mastered as parts before beingassembled into the whole ploy.
When the tasks are assigned, and the pairs begin to practice the ploys, the trainer passes byeach group to ensure that each pair is correctly executing the ploys with the appropriate level of study.
The trainer’s main attention should be focused on ensuring the that partners are working together correctly tomaster the tasks and not to resist each other, and that when a throw is correctly applied, that the partner is fallingcorrectly.
Before studying the throws, the instructor must ensure that all of the students have learned the group ofploys for self-protection—falling correctly. The students execute every ploy successively three times before switchingroles.
It is necessary for the students to review and correct their actions after each applied ploy, toinclude analyzing their motions intelligently, so that they are not performing mechanical drills withoutimprovement.
To study a ploy means repeating the execution of that ploy over and over to include various offensive anddefensive situations—for example, examining the technical side of carrying out of a ploy is, of couse, theeasiest to observe. After that, the students can become accustomed to other possible variants andpositions as both the attacker and as the defender using both hands and feet. This ensures that thestudents can apply their ploys within the ever changing situations in the longer wrestling matches.
For example, when the rear stepping throw is applied, the attacker’s knee crook isapplied under the opponent’s knee crook on the same side leg—this is a great posit ion for theattacker.
But in the rear stepping throw, there is an opportunity to apply the throw only the attacker’s shinor calf is set behind the opponent’s calf. This is the start of a new variant to the rear steppingthrow. The rear stepping throw will disappear as a throw if the opponent forces his leg too far, so thathis buttocks can resist by bracing against the attacker’s thigh or buttocks.
So it is necessary to sort every ploy and assign it with every opportune variant or situation for use inthe longer matches, so that the samboist can understand the risks in every situation and select the correctploy (or defense) in relation to what is occurring within the match.
Training to Overcome Resistance in Wrestling
The extreme difficulty and complexity in wrestling as a sport includes the fact that as the wrestlersmust continuously overcome resistance, and the resistance not only static, but also constantly shifting,and not strictly predictable (as for example, when drawing a bow). The situation and positionsin all conditions are constantly altering. They are set for one moment, then some degree of strengthchanges, and then that new resistance must also be overcome.
Resistance in its basic definition is the natural act of a wrestler to draw upon his ownmeans and methods to overcome his opponent.
In wrestling, this is accomplished by:
a) Strength of the opponent’s body weight (strength of center of gravity) in relation to the ground;b) Strength of the samboist’s centrifugal force;c) Strength of the opponent’s opposing force.
In the beginning, it follows that the practical means to overcome an opponent’s centrifugalforce comes before attempting to begin to overcome an opponent’s opposing force.
1. The practice for overcoming an opponent’s weight includes the following exercises where thetasked participants do not resist.
a) Raising an opponent to wrap him around the samboist’s hips level, so that his partner’s chestcontacts the samboist’s belt.
b) Lifting a partner who is on all fours.c) Lifting a partner who is lying on his back.d) Lifting a partner and shifting his position, so that he is on the samboist’s shoulders, then his
back, then his hips, and finally in his arms in front of the samboist.e) Squatting with a partner on the samboist’s shoulders.f) Leaning the body in various directions with an opponent on the shoulders.
These exercises are designed to provide the samboist with the skills to manage his opponent’sbody weight and to overcome his strength.
2. Studying to overcome the opponent’s centrifugal force uses various ploys and means.It follows to consider that all wrestling is conducted in a straight line. The larger share of wrestling motions
are circular or arcs of varying degrees. Therefore, centrifugal force or some other form of this energy is found inevery ploy—especially, in the throws. Thus, the students should be paired and given the following tasks:
a) Spinning the partner using one hand to hold his belt;b) Spinning with the partner and drawing him off the ground with a hand on his shoulder or on his belt orhip.
When these motions are mastered, the students should master quickly stopping these same motions arestarting them.
3. Studying how to exploit the opponent’s strength.After studying how to calculate motion and the described exercises, the students are placed in pairs with the
first rank commanded to move. The second rank must keep with his opponent’s motion and in the samedirection and move where the opponent moves.
The same condition is applied without a command with an opponent following his own initiative. This
first preparatory exercise is to instill the basic skills in exploiting the opponent’s strength.
Then the students transition to more advanced means for exploiting the opponent’s strength.The first rank are then given the task to use individualized motion on the second rank, and to move in
directions with the opponent where they must try to successfully follow an opponent and be able to quickly push orpull the opponent to disrupt his motion.
Included in the first rank’s efforts making unexpected jerks and pushes on the opponent whileretaining a grip on his sleeves. The second rank develops motions that the first rank must respond toforcing them to push and pull in order to suppress successfully their opponent’s motion.
4. Studying how to overcome an opponent’s strength.Attention must be paid to acquainting the students with overcoming strength, via metered resistance in the
form of known gymnastic exercises in resistance.Then the training transitions to an emphasis on wrestling style that is enhanced by additional exercises
applied to address this role.“Catch ing the major i ty of the f ingers. The bent four fingers of the samboist’s right hand grip his
opponent’s fingers on his opponent’s right hand. The samboist attempts to press his f ingers into hisopponent’s f ingers, so that his opponent cannot use that hand effectively.
It is forbidden to grip and twist the opponent’s four fingers.“Head of Cabbage”. The samboist bends his elbow so that his forearm is parallel to the
ground, and his palm is rotated upward. The opponent places his palm atop the samboist’s palm. Thesamboist in any instant can strike with his palm into the back of his opponent’s fingers.
The opponent just as quickly can strike at the samboist’s hand. Once this is mastered, the partners canchange roles.
“ A r m W r e s t l i n g ” . This exercise requires lying on the stomach on the mat in a head to head position withthe partner. Each partner’s right hand grips the partner’s right hand, so that thumb is wrapped around thumb, and thefour fingers of each hand are around the back part of the opponent’s hand. The right elbow is set on the mat, andthe left arm is bracing it.
The task is to respond to the opponent’s forearm, so that his opponent’s hand is forced to contact the mat.The opponent resists the attempt to force his hand to the mat and attempts to force the samboist’s hand into the mat.
“ P u s h i n g p a l m t o p a l m ” . T h e s a m b o is t c o m e s b e f o r e h i s o p p o n e n t t o s e t h i m s e l fb e f o r e h i s o p p o n e n t . H i s t o e s a n d h e e l a r e s e t i n p la c e . T h e o p p o n e n t m u s t s e th i m s e l f t h e s a m e w a y . Each contender places his palms to his opponent’s palms and attempts to unbalancehis adversary by forcing him to move from his place on the mat. Feinting is permitted but palm to palm contactmust be maintained. The first to fall or move from his spot is the one who is defeated.
“Unba lanc ing f rom a l ine ” . The samboist and his partner set themselves against each other on a onemeter line. The right foot is set forward with the left foot set behind it, so that the left toes are close to the right heel.All four of the contender’s feet must remain aligned on the one meter line. Both partners must keep their left armsbehind their backs.
The task is to clap the right palm into the opponent’s right palm in an attempt to force him to moveone of his feet from the line. Feinting is permitted, but both partners must maintain contact with the upperpart of their opponent’s body with the right palm.
“Gypsy Wrestling”. The samboist lies down on the mat with his right side to his opponent’s rightside, but his head is on a different side with the desired effect being that their right arms are easily inreach of each other. Each raises his right arm upward. The task consists of hooking the right shin to theopponent’s right shin and attempting to use this hold to roll the opponent over his head.
“ T i p p i n g t h e b a l a n c e w i t h a n a r m k e p t b a c k ” . The samboists stand in the centerof the mat facing each other so that the intended affect is that their right arms contact and grip at the inside oftheir wrists. At a signal, each attempts to draw his opponent to the edge of the mat that is designated foreach wrestler. The winner is the samboist that first moves his opponent to his designated side of the mat.
“Petrushkin Boxing Punches”. Each wrestler stands on only his right leg with his arms crossed overhis chest. Hopping on the right leg, each wrestler attempts to use his shoulders to push against hisopponent in an attempt to force his opponent to set his left leg onto the mat. The first opponent to set hisleft leg on the mat loses.
“Coming on to the Legs”. The samboists stand close to each other. Each is set to stand on the rear part oftheir feet, and each is forbidden to use his hands to contact his opponent. The first who does so loses.
This same sort of wrestling can be applied with a grip on the sleeves, but that is much more difficult andcomplex in skills.
“Taking the Ball”. Each takes in hand the same basketball. At a signal, each wrestler attempts totake the ball away from his opponent.
“Taking the Stick”. Each wrestler wraps his right hand around a stick with his left hand set nearthe bottom. On a signal, each wrestler attempts to take the stick from his opponent.
“Lifting”. Any means to lift the opponent from the ground may be used while also preventing the
opponent from doing the same to the samboist. He that first lifts his opponent is the victor.
In this view of this wrestling style, we have covered the tactics and techniques of sambo wrestling.If in “gaining this sense” we must only focus training for quickness, then our view is distorted and showsbut scant aspects of sambo-wrestling.
For this given style of wrestling, it follows that there are transitions in sambo wrestling for in suchconditions as when covering the opponent or moving from one or another situation to another.
Such exercises indicate:
Covering or smothering the opponent when he is resisting from various positions and situations:lying on one side, sitting, on the knee, on one knee, in a half squat, standing on wide set legs, or standingwith feet crossed. If when covering a sitting opponent only slightly, this effort would, of course, be nomore difficult than smothering an opponent whose legs are crossed.
Turning over the opponent who is on all fours or lying below the samboist can meet resistance.The opponent may secure grips of his own and begin to resist.
Freeing oneself from an opponent’s hold down, or in holding down the opponent, the samboistwill meet resistance.
Obtaining the hold down grip may meet no resistance from the opponent, and therefore,studying the ploys using one-sided resistance by the opponent is possible.
In all of the exercises, the first rank of each pair first studies the ploys against an unresistingopponent who does not attack or apply retaliatory ploys.
After studying the ploys with one-sided resistance, the students can apply exercises thatare varied or have varying conditions, and then, the training in sambo wrestling moves on tofocus on the different sections for this wrestling style, and of course, for training in longermatches.
Chapter 5The Methods and Means for Training the Samboist
The trainer’s tasks in sambo wrestling are:
1) Rear and develop the wrestler in all of the techniques and psychological qualities that are requiredin wrestling;
2) Improve wrestling techniques with their practical application and influence on a freely movingopponent;
3) Develop all-round basic tactics for wrestling in diverse competitive conditions against diverseopponents.
Adding the work load to the training/rearing. Success is a goal that completely depends on thework of the trainer and his proper addition of the methodical training facets to each student which in turndepends upon the individual talents and abilities for each student and the means for augmenting andimproving on them. The general basis and principles and methodologies must be well studied byeach trainer. We address this in a chapter specifically answering the requirements and methodologiesfor training the samboist.
One of the basic situations: It is necessary to try to apply lessons, so that the students withoutcomments from anywhere or additional instruction complete their initial training.
The main task for this is all-around physical preparation for the samboist and some concernsrelating to his stress and health under these conditions. The trainer must start the group’s training withoutan opponent’s resistance in learning all of the basic ploys for sambo-wrestling, and chose for eachstudent individualized ploys suited to that student, and to train the student in those ploys, so that he caneventually participate in longer matches.
For each student, from the entire mass of sambo-wrestling ploys, it follows that masteringsuch ploys that are suited to that samboist’s disposition and physique will be more effective (seethe chapter on tactics) in taking advantage of the samboist’s degree of power, agility, etc.However, these individualized complexes of ploys for the students must not be one-sided or onedimensional. Modest, for the novice, in quantity, the ploys must respond to the basic situationsthat correspond to what occurs in a sambo-wrestling match. Therefore, when constructing thetraining plan, the trainer must attempt to grasp that only two to three standing ploys will beapplied by an opponent, and conversely, the samboist may only be able to apply two or threeploys of his own against his opponent from standing.
Many of these ploys may be based upon pulling an opponent into the samboist, andthus, it makes sense that a novice samboist must learn such ploys based upon gripping theopponent’s jacket from both the right and left sides. From there, the samboist can master, as abeginner, his first set of two or three ploys, and in practice, and in longer matches, to masterhis first set of two or three hold downs. As he develops, he will then learn how to free himselffrom such holds or how to simply avoid them. His learning progresses and he learns more fromstanding, more hold downs, and he progresses to submission holds to his opponent’s arms,and from there, two or three submission holds to his opponent’s legs.
Each overall complex of ploys must consist of 8 to 10 ploys. It is recommended that forthese complexes, the trainer should use the follow methodologies:
1) Repeated repetit ions of ploys that begin with slow execution that graduallyaccelerates, so that in the end, the execution of these ploys is both rapid and automatic.
2) Training students in the ploys from a complex that are applied against one sideresistance by the opponent where the attacking samboist begins with 5--6 ploys in the complexby addressing 1- 2 ploys in each training session. In this method is included practicing the offensiveploys on a partner who is always prepared for the ploys to be applied and works to complicate hispartner’s offensive requirements.
3). Gradually transitioning from one sided training to training against a resistingopponent. In this case, the tasking for the partner is to defend and prevent the samboist from
securing his grip, so that the samboist cannot throw easily.4) Further training based upon the tactics of evasion, fleeing the mat, and parrying attacks.5)Training in retaliatory ploys where one of the students is directed to apply basic offensive ploys,
and the other must respond with the appropriate retaliatory ploy.The goal of this given training can be as follows:
a) Training in basic ploys where the attention is applied to offense using all of the ploys in a givencomplex, and toward measuring the improvement of these ploys as the ploys are studied in groups of 1 to 2ploys in a given training task;
b) Training in retaliatory ploys which in this case means beginning by attacking with one ploy and measuringthe improvement in how that ploy is applied and its results in applying increasing numbers of ploys in anincreasing number of offensive methods.
6) Training in offensive combinations to include ploys from these complexes:
a) Offensive ploys that follow one direction;
b) Offensive ploys that follow multiple directions.
7) Applied training in longer matches using the given ploy complexes from the par terre positions such as beingunder the opponent or atop the opponent.
8) Applied training in the given ploys complexes in longer matches in standing wrestling.
9) Applied training in longer matches using only the ploys from a given complex of 2 – 3 ploys.
A dedicated and detailed fussy training methodology is the first step for further work. Further training effortsmust be planned and derived from the wrestler’s basic ploys. From there, the wrestler can begin to master thespecialized retaliatory ploys that address the basic ploys that his opponent may apply, and the wrestler can then betasked to develop such qualities as muscular memory and sensation by means of specialized trainings. For example,the wrestler may be blind folded as part of this training.
When planning and conducting training, the tasks must support the transition to studying newmaterial, but it cannot do so if the training is insufficiently qualitative and not properly acquired in relation to theprevious materials and the required skills to proceed. Achieving a sufficient base of ploys and all of theirvariants is the goal. The trainer must never shy away from the dif f icult topics.
The work must be true to its task: while this may be slow, it is better than aspiring tolearn more quickly by jumping into matches where the samboist may learn a lot withoutmastering any of the work or its principles.
In addition to the training in individualized ploys, every samboist should carefullydevelop himself to possess the diversified psychophysical qualities without which the wrestlercannot master his trade. For this purpose, the samboist and his trainer must use more than justsambo-wrestling—they must uses other sports. Thus, sports develop quick reactions, hand-eyecoordination, and greater dexterity. Boxing, pole vaulting and like sports foster courage anddetermination.
For developing dexterity, it follows that training should be in sport games and acrobatics, for endurance, wemust look to cross-country running, skiing, and orienteering. Inside, we might turn to such diverse exercises aswalking and full squats or running and skipping rope.
Sambo-wrestling demands the utmost all-round physical development from the wrestler. Developing one ortwo qualities well can only take the wrestler so far, and that does not compensate completely for other missingqualities. Therefore, we repeat, that the way to the needed skills in sambo-wrestling lie not only on the basis sambo’stechnical complex, but primarily on a high degree of the wrestler’s well rounded psychophysical development. Thus, inconstructing a training plan, the trainer’s task is to assume that his training must be methodical to carry out theplanned direction of the tasks.
Let's specify most applicable and effective exercises for targeting the samboist’s goals.
EXERCISES IN DEXTERITY AND STRENGTHENING THE JOINTS
1. Running on the outside edges of the feet.2. Sitting with the legs lifted with the feet gradually being moved away from the body by
straightening the knees. The arms are held beside the body.3. Sitting with the raised feet locked together then with the feet moved to the sides. Then, the heels
are gripped by the hands, and the body leans forward until the head touches the toes.4. Sitting with the raised arms in an attempt move the gripped shins over the head.5. Turning to the right and left with the body both erect and leaning from standing,
sitt ing, and reclining.
6. Bridging. Training for the bridging position bridge should begin with exercises: stand with theback to a wall with the hands set on the wall overhead and gradually to fall to the rear anddownward using the hands to guide the action by moving down the wall. Further: from theprone position on the back, arch and curve into the bridge with the support of the palmsbracing into the mat. From a kneeling position, place the forehead on the mat and rock thebody to the rear. Later in the training, specialized exercises are included with rocking forwardand back motions, left to right motions, etc. from the full bridge as defined as forward and backbridges, and from these same positions driving the head forward and back by driving with thelegs.
7. From a stand ing pos it ion on stra ightened legs, using the same side hand to l i f t thesame side leg toward the student by gr ipping the foot f rom the ins ide .
8. From the standing position moving one leg back by gripping the instep with same side hand.
9. Kneeling on with the straightened arms out front with fingers locked. Sit on the mat to the left ofthe left shin and the arms move to the right and to the left.
10. Standing with the hands raised and locked at the fingers. They hands are turned so that thepalms are facing upward. From there the samboist leans his body into various positions to theright and to the left.
11. Straightened arms are locked at the fingers and held in front of the body. The legs areset at shoulder width, and the student rotates his body to the right and the left.
12. The feet are set parallel at a distance of 1.5 to 2 foot lengths from each other, and thehands are held behind the head. The samboist rotates his pelvis girdle in variousdirections without moving his feet from their spot on the mat, and without leaning theupper part of his body.
EXERCISES IN BALANCE
These exercises are initially applied slowly and then increased gradually until finally the full working load isachieved.
1. Standing on one leg while lunging the other leg forward, to the sides, and to the rear.2. With the feet close together, lean the body front to back, right to left, and then in circles.3. With the feet set close together move the pelvis girdle forward, back, and right and left, and
finally, move the pelvis girdle in circles.4. Standing on one leg, lean the body and move the pelvis girdle in all directions.5. Standing on one leg, circle and twist the body and circle and twist the pelvis girdle.6. Hop on one leg first in a straight line, and then, in various angles to the front, back, left and
right.7. Preserve balance when landing after hopping both on one leg and on both legs:
а) When jumping upward,b) When jumping upward and turning 90°, 180°, 270°, and 360°,c) When jumping forward, right, left, back, and with turns of 90° and 180°,
8. Preserving balance when landing on one leg after jumping off on one pushing leg,
a) From the right leg onto the right, and the left onto the left leg,b) From the right leg to the left leg and the left leg onto the right leg.
EXERCISES FOR STRENGTH
1. Squeezing the fingers into various sized balls.2. Take a stick with a cord attached to a weight and roll it up and down;3. Reclining on bent arms and supported on the hands with the legs on a bench, then supported by
only one arm;4. Lunging squats on both legs and on one leg;5. Exercises with dumbbells;6. Exercises with weights;7. Climbing a rope with and without the help of the legs;8. Exercises on the gymnastic rings;9. Exercises with a staff, jerking and pulling with both hands and arms, leaning the body with the staff
on the shoulders; and squatting with the staff on the shoulders on or the chest.
EXERCISES FOR QUICKNESS
1. Additional Speed
If the desire is to attain quicker motion, then the student must develop his motion in one directionby using several parts of his body.
For example, if the wrestler must jerk or pull quickly, he must simultaneously apply: turning hisbody, bending his forearms and straightening his shoulders (to move his elbows back). As weslowly perform each motion in the draw separately, we lock into place our memory of these actionsbefore performing them simultaneously, so that their combined motion provides a quicker motion.
That desire for quicker-coordinated motion in one direction, or quickness can be increased byaccelerated movement.
For example, we use the right hand to pull to the right in a plan to draw the opponent’sbody weight outside of his supporting area. However, if at the same time that we do so, wechoose to move to the right the supporting point of the opponent’s center of gravity, then theopponent’s balance is quickly eliminated. We then have the basis for a sweeping throw, the throwover the hip, and diverse other throws.
2. Exercises for Training in Quickness
The training in quicker-coordinated motion with the goal of increasing quickness requires trainingto develop quickness as a quality, and for this, we must apply the appropriate exercises:
a) Throwing a small rubber or other light weight ball at each other, catching the ball, throwingthe ball upward, and onto and from steps with the ball.
b) Sweeping a falling ball and kicking it in various directions,c) Catching a falling object with one hand or two hands and sweeping the dropped object.d) Short sprints.e) Starting from a position of lying with the legs or head facing an object (on the stomach, the back, or on one
side) and quickly rise to standing. Starting from a sitting or kneeling position to the same.f) High or low lightly athletic spurts of activity.
CALCULATING NEW SPORTQUALIFICATION
To develop tasking and training with the given opportunities to develop, there must be thefoundational and systematic course that can be supervised to attain the desired achievements. Thetrainer and his students must conduct a precise tally of their sports results. It is possible to conduct thistraining with lists for beginners and experienced (each category conducted separately) samboists, andsuch lists would roughly resemble this:
List of Novice Sambo-wrestling Sport Athletes
No. Last Name, First Wt. BirthYear
Wins over Novices Wins over Third Level
1 Ivanov, Ivan Ivanovich 55 kg 1928 25 Jun 49: Petrov, N.N, 21 Feb 49: Karnov, S.S.
2 Petrov, Nikolai Niklovich 21 Feb 49: Karnov, S.S.
In each grade, there must be 5 victories to advance.
Everyone transitioning to the next category must prevail over novice wrestlers in the new category andcontinue to prevail over opponents from the old novice group.
Annually in the defining the novice, it is necessary to re-sort the categories based upon their victories thatoccurred in that year and those that occurred in past years, so that the novices can be appropriately placed in theircorrect categories:
These novices move to new areas for tasking based upon their placement inin matches in competition.The goals for these novices are to place in these competitions:
Group Championship – the local school or club, Organizational Championship, Championship of the USSR — within the organization or without, etc.
Chapter VITHE RULES OF SAMBO-WRESTLING
The accepted rules of sambo-wrestling are now developed on the basis of the experience of ournational sport wrestling styles, and moreover, on our experience in conducting sambo-wrestlingcompetitions. In developing rules for sambo-wrestling as a sport, one goal was followed—that isconstruct sambo-wrestling as a sport is safe whose principles and methods may be applied in oragainst most wrestling styles.
Below follows a brief analysis of the foundations that best support the study of the rules forsambo-wrestling.
VICTORY AND DEFEAT
When defining the results of matches‚ usually one wrestler must win and the other lose.However, in some several wrestling styles the match time is set and strictly adhered to, sothat some matches may end in a “draw”.
In such wrestling conditions where a “draw” can occur", to significantly measure who is trulywrestling in the match to his utmost ability and who is being sluggish can difficult.
The wrestler, who has the initiative in the beginning of the match may continually attack withoutresults and wrestle to a draw, yet be working completely toward victory, and another wrestler can stall orotherwise be passive to the same result. This reduces and takes away from the sport and emptiesthe value of the match as the two wrestlers face each other.
In such cases, the wrestler who is passive does not lose to the industrious wrestler, so thattheir wrestling really is not about a match with victory and defeat.That is why samboist’s do not consider it possible to legitimize stall ing and passivity. It becomescustomary that in the case that both wrestlers have not managed to realize every opportunity for taking his match tovictory that the wrestler is following the path toward defeat. This compels the wrestler to actively wrestle and desire towin and not to avoid a match by staalling.
In sport wrestling winning can occur through many means. In one match, there is a clear victor, and inothers the victor is not so certain because neither wrestler has decidedly resolved all of the tasks toward a clearvictory. Therefore, victories must be determined through point awards that correspond to match eventsconsidered of value toward victory.
It is necessary to consider the fact that otherwise attempting not to lose by passivity can become an end initself for the wrestler in all of his matches where the samboist is reduced solely to defensive tactics that avoid all risk,so that his concentration is on defense, and not about wrestling well against a strong opponent. Therefore inwrestling, it is logical to evaluate any defeat equally. This has educational value as in the long term thiswoud come with all of the disadvantages of a defeat with two or three styles for determining victorywithout trapping each other: wrestlers with greater scores that are one sided will achieve a victoryand continue wrestling. The victory should receive the highest score, and an equally high score shouldbe awarded for refusal of the opponent to continue wrestling or when the opponent is found to beconstantly out of the wrestling area or adopting passive positions.
For example, the wrestler throws his opponent on the ground while remaining standing. Thethrow onto the opponent’s back is better than a throw onto the opponent’s stomach because theopponent then almost always lands on all fours, and hence, has a greater abililty to continue thematch with better mobility. From here, it is logical in preserving the value of the wrestling to awardthe higher score for a throw onto the back, and mid-range score for a throw onto one side, and allother throws therefore should be scored lower than these two posit ions.
Proceeding from such points, in the rules for sambo-wrestling it is accepted, that:
1. Matches contain victory for one wrestler and defeat for the other.2. The wrestler, achieving the most effective victories, receives a pure victory, and for thateffort earns the highest score. Clean victories are awarded for:
a) Throwing an opponent completely onto his back while the samboistexecuting the throw remains standing on both feet ;
b) When the opponent is unable to continue wrestling due to the influence of a
submission ploy;
4. The Victory which cannot be defined as “pure” victories, so therefore, victory must e defined basedupon the scored points by each wrestler with the higher scoring wrestler being the victor. A matchproceeds as following:
1. Before beginning matches, the wrestlers approach opposing diagonal corners of the mat, thereferee blows his whistle for the wrestlers to approach to the middle of the mat and shake hands witheach other. After that, they move forward onto their edge of the wrestling area by pivoting around theirleft shoulder to face each other to begin wrestling.
2. All matches begin in this manner.3. Matches continue without interruption.4. The duration of the match is limited to 10 minutes, but the bout ends earlier in the case of a cleanvictory.At the end of a match, the wrestlers stand at the same corner of the mat from which thethey began the
match. After the announcement of the results, the wrestlers shake hands in friendship and depart thematt.
PERMITTED PLOYS
The opportunity to use in wrestling a great quantity of ploys promotes the need forweight categories and training for complex situations which requires and permits students totrain for greater speed of reaction. Ingenuity, among other qualities, is a valuable psychologicalquality. Proceeding from there, the sambo-wrestling permits the following:
I. Throws in which gripping the legs with the hands are permitted for every possible leg actionagainst the opponent, and,
2. Holding and suppressing the opponent on the ground.3. Every possible varying position of the opponents when in par terre wrestling;,4. Submission ploys.
In our present time, the complex of ploys for sambo-wrestling represents an extensive system. It ispossible to state safely that in the quantity and quality of the ploys used in sambo-wrestling, this wrestlingstyle stands in first place in the world. It is impossible not to find the required ploys within system that wasentirely born, developed, and improved and by us in what was originally called the Soviet system ofwrestling.
SAMBO-WRSTLING — REMOVING THE DANGEROUS
In every wrestling style that are ploys that are defined as forbidden or illegal because such ploysare reckoned to be dangerous to apply in the sense that they lead to injury of the practitioners.Sometimes, prohibited ploys occur without being noticed as ploys because they developed from “legal”ploys because the action in creating the ploys deviates into the prohibited range.
In sambo-wrestling, the following ploys have been noted as the most dangerous for the wrestlers:bracing into the groin area, throwing the opponent on his head, ploys that threaten to displace the cervicaldiscs or break the cartilages, and all strangle holds, ploys with falling on the opponent with full bodyweight, throws using lever grips to the hand, arms, or legs. Also it is dangerous to press elbows or kneesinto any part of the body when atop the opponent, and twisting holds on the fingers and toes.
In our national wrestling style, practitioners compete in weight categories from the lightestweights up to the heaviest weights. Victory in our national wrestling style for the most part is onlyby the people who by nature possess the same wrestler’s body type or weight.
Soviet physical culture organizations desire to attract to wrestling the broad masses of workers(who basically consist of people of light, light-middleweight and average weights), and in the national andinternational wrestling styles, weight categories have been long established.
To prevent excessive strain on the wrestlers, competitions limit the number of matches for each
wrestler in one day of competition.Specialized soft footwear allows sambo-wrestling to apply any actions to an opponent’s legs or
against the actions of an opponent’s legs, and wrestling mats with soft filling permit the safe applicationof sambo-wrestling ploys in competitions.
For these purposes, the rules of sambo-wrestling established:
1.The participants om competitions are divided into the following weight categories:
1. Lightest weight — up to 56 kg2. Lighter weight-- up to 60 kg.3. Half light weight-- up to 64 kg.4. Light weight-- up to 68 kg.5. Half mid weight-- up to 72 kg.6. Middle weight-- up to 79 kg.7. Half heavy weight- up to 87 kg.8. Heavy weight- 87 kg. and above.
2. Competitions in sambo-wrestling are only conducted on wrestling mats in response to the damandsof the sport. See the later sectionon the area for the competitions.
3. Obviously the uniform for sambo-wrestling must meet the specialized demands for the sport.See the later section on the uniform.
4. In competitions for sambo-wrestling is forbidden to:
a) Throw the opponent and land upon him with full body weight;b) Strike the opponent,c) Throw the opponent to land on his head or to twist his head or press the head with his arms or legs,d) Throw the opponent using an arm lever grip,e) Attack the opponent’s legs with strikes or punishing holds from standing,f) Grip the jacket below the belt,g) Apply ploys that may damage the spine or neck,h) Apply submission ploys ballistically,i) Brace an arm or leg in the opponent’s face,j) Press the elbow or knee into any part of the opponent’s body when atop the opponent,k) Twist or hold the opponent’s toes,l) Grip or twist the opponent’s fingers,m) Apply the arm bent behind the back ploy to the opponent,n) Apply strangle holds to the opponent,o) Apply submission ploys from standing wrestling,p) Throw the opponent to the side without gripping an arm (except for competitions for samboists of thefirst grade and masters).
5. In sambo-wrestling competitions, it is forbidden to wrestle in more than four matches in one day.6. For all parts of sambo-wrestling competitions, the samboists must submit to the requirements specialsanitary and hygiene requirements. This is obligatory. In addition, to this tasking during competitions,samboists adhere to a well and carefully developed system of safety mitigation and self-protection usingspecialized ploys.
All of this together renders the sport of sambo-wrestling extremely safe.
DEFINING THE COMPETITION
1. The points that are estimated as the results of the competitions are estimated as follows:
Earned points for a pure victory—0 points. Victory by points with a clear advantage—1 point. Victory by points with a slight advantage (lessthanonepoint) — 2 points.
For any other loss -- 3 points.
2. The wrestler receiving the least points from the results of all matches in the competition is considered the winner in anygiven weight class.
З. The place for each team is defined for the championship by the summation of individual results of each teammember. Individual match results for defining the team championship are estimated as follows:
Firstplace—1point;Second place — 2 points;Third place — 3 points, andso forth.
The teamstandings includeall points scored points tocalculate theultimatechampions.
THE UNIFORM
Participants in the competitions in our national wrestling style wrestle ina uniform that permits various grips andholds. InTadjik, Khivan, and Bukharskywrestling theparticipants wear robes that permit gripping sleeves, collars, and belts,so that all of their basic wrestling ploys can beused ina wrestlingmatch.
InRussian wrestling, theparticipants wear kaftans andarmyukiwith traditional cloth belts. In theGeorgian wrestlingstyle, it is required to wear a heavyshirt (choka) with abelt; however, the shirt is sleeveless.
Adzjerbyjani wrestlers participant ina style wrestling that uses close bodycontact, and thus, wrestle naked;however, even with this closecontact, therearea surprisingnumber of clever holds—particularly for gripping the legs.
Uzbeki, Fergana, Turkmen, Tatar, and Bagtskirskan wrestling, gripping is only permitted on the belt. This severely limitsthe circle of ploys and tends toward one dimensional matches.
When wrestlers wrestle without a uniform, their basic efforts and times are devoted to realizing grips and holds. Inaddition, wrestling in abare body has a relatively smaller number of effective grips and holds that permit avery limitednumber of ploys.
The rulesforsambo-wrestlingprovideforaspecializeduniformthatprovidesthewrestlerswiththeopportunitiestoconvenientlyandefficientlygriptheiropponentsandapplyingdiverseploys.
In sports competition, there are the risks of injury and infection, and experience dictates that requirements for hygieneand safe conditions must be set. These considerations, we obsere, do not apply solely to sports activities, but they also playan important propagandistic role. Therefore, the structure for these considerations must be addressed in advance andprecisely long before such situations can be encountered. Purely, the cultural aspect of the organization of the competitionshould be in the same proportion as the contents of the sports training.
These should be in equal measure, and apply equally to competitions in sambo-wrestling sections as well as anysports club or physical culture club that includes sambo-wrestling. In the cultural venue, competitons are included to developself-esteem through sports.
Below, we specify the core preparatory and purely technical activities that are connected with competition.
For every competition, there should be a written plan, or “position paper” of what is approved, so that this can bebrought to all participants’ attention in advance of the competition.
In this “position paper”, the following must be indicated:
Theresponsibility fororganizing the competition in duetimedictatesaneedtoarrangeperfectly the mat forwrestlingwithmattedsafetyareas, andno less than twoclean matcovers for eachcompetitionmat withattendingphysicans. In theplaceof thecompetitions, theremust be preciselycalibratedandverifiedscalingforweighinginthepartiicipants.
If theopeningofthecompetitionsisintheevening,thedailycompetitionforthatdaywillbeless,sothenextmorningmustbescheduledtohandletheremainingmatches.Thus,onlythefirstroundmightbeconductedontheeveningofthefirstdaywiththesecondandsubsequentroundsfollowingthenextday..
A suggestedscheduleoftheday,withmorningwrestlingfollowedbyeveningwrestling isas follows:
800 - 900: weigh-ins,1100–1500: competition,1500 – 1900: first dinner,1900—2300: competition.
Most of theparticipants in the eveningcan pair up tostretchor practice25 to 30minutes onone mat most of thetime.
It isbest tofollowthisgivenschedule forthecompetitionswhenworkingwithasmanyas75 –80wrestlersusingtheregular intervalsdefinedforeachweightcategory.
The considerations here will be thus:Each weightcategoryonaveragehas1б participants.If it followsthat thematchesintheroundsbasedonthissystemmustbe
ineachweightcategory,9roundswith45matcheseach. If eachcategoryisdividedinto5subgroupswith5ormorewrestlterseach,thenthereareonly7roundsforatotalof27matches.
45matchesover8rounds= 360matches: 360matchessover4days=90matchesperday.Onmostanyscale,that isalotofmatches!Now,27matchestimes8rounds=216matches;216matchesover4days=54matchesperday.Consideringthat inthefirstthreedays, it isnecessarytoconducttheofficialopeningceremoniesforthecompetitionwiththe
paradeofathletes,etc.,andonthelastdayof thetournament,aparadeofathletes, theawardsceremonies,andtheremainderof the216matches, this isaverybusytimeframe.
56kg 60kg 64kg 68kg 72kg 79kg 87kg +89kgDay1 Mornning I I I I I I I --
Evening II II II II II II -- IDay2 Mornning III III III III III -- II II
Evening IV IV IV IV -- III III IIIDay3 Mornning V V V -- IV IV IV IV
Evening VI VI -- V V V V VDay4 Mornning -- -- VI VI VI VI VI VI
Evening VII VII VII VII VII VII VII VII
In the competition process, usually several participants are forced out of the competition. Therefore, thesystem of rounds moves the wrestlers who remain in the competition to the second round. The survivors of thesecond round move to a new subgroup for the third round where they will face the other survivors of the othersubgroups.
In the finals, the samboists wrestle for the first four places in each weight category.In the preceding day’s competition, when forming the subgroups, it is necessary for all pairs to wrestle to
determine 5 – 10th places, so that the evening is reserved only for finals matches.In the evening, there must be a ready list of finals matches, and this must be based on a timely and accurate
accounting of everyone’s place in each weight category and their status for wrestling.As soon as a wrestler’s place is determined, it is necessary to fill out his certificate.As the closing parade of participants is constructed, all of the prizes and certificates should be prepared and
set out on the judges’ table.The announcement of the results should be conducted in the wrestling area among the spectators.
Remember that for each participant that the tournament is an important event and will be remembered for the rest ofhis life. No later than the day after the tournament, the results should be posted publicly, and the most noteworthywrestlers should be called out.
Chapter VIIITHE WRESTLING PLACE
For a sambo-wrestling competition, it is mandatory to have a wrestling mat or multiple wrestlingmats. The proper mat should be no less than 6 X 6 meters and no more than 8 X 8 meters withthickness no less than 5 centimeters and no more than 15 centimeters.
The mats should be set up away from walls or other obstructions with a clearance of at least 150centimeters. If the mats must be arranged with nearby walls, the walls should be padded with protectivemats to a height of at least 150 centimeters.
Around each mat, there should be a padded safety area of three meters with a mat thickness ofno less than 3 centimeters.
The usual 6 X 6 meter mat will be composed of as many as 24 separate pieces each of which is100 X 150 centimeters, and an 8 X 8 meter mat will consist of 32 separate pieces each of which is 100 X200 centimeters.
These individual mat sections are composed of felt or wool. Each section will be well sewn withwell defined edges that will fit together closely and appear to be of one height. The sections may be heldtogether in a wooden frame that is slightly shorter than the height of the mats. The mat surface shouldbe even with the individual mat pieces all being covered by a single canvas mat cover to present a singlesurface such as used by the Turkmen in their wrestling. The wooden frame is padded, and the paddingmay old tires cut to cover the frame. All seams sewn for the mat, the mat cover, etc. will be smooth toprevent rough seams that may injure the participants.
On each mat, at a minimum, there must be two mat covers, so that one may be in use while thesecond is being cleaned.
The mat cover itself should differ in color from the surrounding protective mats.The mat as described above is an example not on for training, but also for competitions. While,
due to practical reasons, the mat for training and for competing may be different, the training mat shouldto the greatest extent possible match the competition mat, so that the mat itself becomes a constant intraining.
The place for the sambo-wrestling training might be outdoors in the summer, but in most cases,the place should be indoors since most competitions are indoors. An outside area may be preparedhaving a 8 X 8 meter hole dug to a depth of 30 centimeters and filled with saw dust, straw until level, andthen covered by a mat cover.
In the winter, there is always a requirement for the specialized training space for the sambosection. The matted area can be built to the same size as the summer area using boards that will be 20centimeters in height. The tops of these edges must be upholstered with very soft cloth to preventinjuries such as bruises and broken bones. Again, the area is padded until level, and then, covered witha mat cover.
As a last resort, in the summer, sambo training can be conducted in soft grass, and in the winter(at least until the temperature drops below 8 degrees centigrade) in soft snow. The only additionalequipment being needed would be the sambo-wrestling jacket. In both cases, a mat cover may be laidon the ground to mark the training area.
Before beginning any training session, we begin with a premise that it is necessary to task theclass to allow fresh air into the space, and that the space be dusted, and the floors and mats be cleaned.
In the summer after finishing a training session in the outdoors, the area must be returned to itsoriginal condition, and all equipment and garbage must be removed. Before each training session, thepadding in the hole must be turned over and loosened to ensure that it is safe to train on. This will alsoallow any dampness to evaporate more quickly. Any holes in the padding must be attended to byinserting more sawdust or other padding. The frame must be checked and repaired as needed. If doneproperly, the training site may remain in operation for the entire summer, but it every year, the trainingsite must be disassembled and completely rebuilt.
When conducting a lesson in snow or sand, the area must be raked, inspected, and possibly re-raked to ensure that the surface is both safe and level. The same may be true when training on grasswhere the effort may expand toward scanning the area for hard objects such as stones that may haveaccumulated in the area.
Whatever the surface, the sambo-wrestling shoes should only be worn in the training area. Theyshould be forbidden to be worn in most general areas, and especially into the lavoratory. A special areafor the sambo-wrestling shoes should be set up near the training area where they will be handy to theparticipants and have the opportunity to dry and air between sessions.
AChapter IXINVENTORY
The Sambo-wrestling Kurtka
A specialized jacket that is used in sambo-wrestling competitions is much like that worn by amodern city dweller in that it is a modern jacket designed to cover the body in fabric above the belt. Theprototypes for this sambo-wrestling jacket are the Georgian wrestling jacket called a “chokha”, the centralAsia robe, the Russian kaftan, and the native clothing of Latvia.
The sambo-wrestling jacket is sewn from canvas or other heavy fabric—best of all, from tentcanvas or thin shoe fabric.
Any color fabric may be used.The jacket is sewn as a simple single breasted jacket with lapels that face each other. The collar
must be of the kind that is shawl like and reach the lower part of the lapels. He shoulder cuffs on bothsleeves must from above extend over the sleeves by 3 centimeters, and from the armpit, 1 centimeter.The cuff consists of one piece running from the front to the back o the uniform. The jacket is held closedby a fabric belt 5 centimeters in width and of a length suitable to serve its function. The belt is routedthrough two slits on each side of the jacket. Each pair of slits is sewn into its half of the jacket’s waist inline with the shoulder corresponding cuff edges. Thus, the left shoulder cuff is set 10 centimeters fromthe edge, and this leaves a window for the right half of the belt to exit from the inside. The belt isfastened over the stomach with a bow.
The sambo-wrestling jacket may be custom made or mass produced for sale. In the latter case,it is recommended to produce the jackets in 4 size groups:
#3: for a height of 164 cm: sizes 46 and 48#4: for a height of 170 cm: sizes 48, 50, and 52#5: for a height of 176 cm: sizes 48, 50, 52, and 54#6: for a height of 182 cm: sizes 48, 50, 54, and 56.
The sizes are defined by half the circumference of the chest size.Each jacket must be the same color over all; however, the jacket may be ornamented with with
embroidery that corresponds to the republic that the samboist represents. The embroidery by necessityshould not be placed on those areas of the jacket where the jacket is most likely to be gripped, and theedges of the embroidery should match the jacket color. The collar and belt may be of the same color.
For short term training, the training may be conducted using the soldier’s blouse with its buttonsremoved. The belt may then be constructed from an suitable cloth.
Wrestling Boots
The boots in sambo-wrestling must be prepared in a form without heels where the toes and soleare on the same level. They must be sewn of very soft leather or other such suitable material. The solemust be constructed of the same material as the upper part of the shoe. For safety, the outside of theshoe must not have exposed stitching or eyelets, and seams must be turned inward. To protect theankles, that part of the wrestling shoe is padded, and the section around the toes is padded inside withwool.
These wrestling shoes or boots may be produced in custom sizes or mass produced. In thelatter case, the sizes for the boot length should range from 37 up to 45 spread over 4 or 5 sizes thatcorrespond to a size range of 186 to 202 millimeters with 2 millimeter graduations in the sizes.
During training, the boots are usually used kept clean and only for use in the training area.Wrestlers enter the mat in one area by stepping onto a cotton towel with cleanser to wipe the boots onbefore entering the mat area.
Stick or Pole for Studying Falling
A stick made of bamboo or birch is required to practice falling, and it should be 275 – 300centimeters long with a diameter of about 5 centimeteters, but not more than 6. The stick can be madeof smooth tubular metal providing that it retains the required diameter.
Training Bags
Training bags are constructed from canvas in three sizes based on weight: length of 140centimeters with a width of 100 centimeters and a weight of 30 kg, a length of 150 centimeters with awidth of 110 centimeters with a weight of 40 kg, and one with a length of 160 centimeters with a width of115 centimeters and a weight of 50 kg.
The bags must be constructed in a cylindrical form. It is constructed from combed cotton orcanvas and may end up somewhat cone shaped. The corresponding sizes are weighted by filling thebags with the designated quantity of sand.
The outside of the bag should have sewn to it several belts that are 3 centimeters in width, andtwo such belts are sewn on the outer edge at distance of 10 centimeters from the first end sewn onto thebag with the second belt sewn on 15 centimeters from the second side of the first belt. Then a secondset of belts is sewn on so that there are four hand holds at regular intervals around the bag.
Thetrainingplaceor lockerroomshouldhaveamedicalscaleforweighingthewrestlers. Itcanalsobeveryhelpful if thetraininghallcanhavealargemirror.
FirstAidEquipment
Firstaidequipmentshouldbeavailableintheevent that it isneededtotreat injuriesandpossibleeventopreventdeath.Thefirstaidkitshouldcontainamongotherthingshydrogenperoxide,andelasticbandagesorbandagestreatedinturpentine forstrainsandsprains,aswellasbandagesofcotton,wool,cardboardsplints(orsuchmadefromplywoodorwire),andcontainerstoholdiceandhotwater.
Chapter10FIRST AID FOR INJURIES
Even correctly applied techniques in sambo-wrestling can lead to injuries, and there are alwaysaccidents, and when such injuries happen, the trainer should be able to render first aid.First aid to be provided for injuries to a limb include resting the damaged joint and having the wrestlerremove his weight from the joint. Thus, for an injured leg, he should lie down. At the side of a bruise, anelastic bandage may be applied with ice or as a simple compress with cold water.
First aid for strains and sprains. Provide rest. At the site of the injury, apply cold compress. In theprocess of relieving pain at night, wrap in injured area in woolen cloth to maintain heat.
Dislocations are seldom met in sambo-wrestling; however, their first aid constitutes full rest for the victimwhile the doctor must be called immediately. If necessary, a splint made from plywood or other may be placed underthe injury; however, only a doctor should attempt to reset the joint. At the dislocation site, ice or cold compressesmay be applied before the doctor arrives.
If bruises and sprains are painful for the victim, the injured limb must be bandaged to a healthy limb.When the injury is to the joint and its bones, it may be impossible to bandage the joint, and the only thing that can beaccomplished is to cover the injury with fabric.
If the trainee has a fever and his head or stomach is ill, these are attributes of an other disease, and the trainershould immediately release the pupil from training and forward him to an administrator to see a doctor and to go home.
Chapter XI
ADVICE TO NEW SAMBOISTS
1. After eating, training must wait for 1.5 to 2 hours.
2. Hands should be kept clean. Finger nails should be cut short to prevent scratching and injuringtraining partners.
3. Although sometimes it is not practical, one should be able to drink during training.
4. The uniform should always be clean and neat. The shorts should always be freshly laundered whilethe jacket should be carefully dried after every training session. At least monthly, the jacket should belaundered. The socks worn during training should not be the same socks that are worn before andafter training.
5. Sleep is important and without proper rest, the value of training can be undone. Sleep should beabout 8 hours—not more, and not less. Insomnia causes lose of appetite. If this persists seek out thetrainer who may send you to the doctor.
6. Follow all advice from your trainer.
7. When studying ploys, try to apply them repeatedly using the minimum strength required. By doingso, you should feel the precision and beauty in each ploy. Once that is mastered, then gradually add inspeed and power until you can apply the ploy correctly with full speed and power.
8. Do not begin to study a new ploy until you have properly mastered the ploys leading up to it. To dootherwise, leads to disappointment in the new ploys that you will attempt to learn and use.
9. Poor sports results can be corrected by carefully analyzing all mistakes and applying remedialtraining. Improved execution may help in the shorter term.
10. Sports conditions are not truly combat. If you wish to overcome a comrade in a match, do so in thesport section under the rules with comradery. To apply the same ploys as a means of self-defense ispossible, but only in the case of true necessity. This training should never be used to assert your will toget your way over someone else.
11. Accidents happen in training. Own up to them and accept responsibility. Being defensive orbehaving cowardly will not help the injured party, and it will not improve your place among yourcomrades if you behave poorly. To the contrary, if you behave well, you will raise your stock andauthority with your group.
12. Never hesitate to ask anything about sambo-wrestling. Even the most skilled samboist often mustask questions to improve his understanding of the sport. When dealing with novices, do not forget thatyou too were once a beginner, so patiently answer their questions too.
13. Everyone is afraid of something at some time. By necessity, you must learn to overcome fear, andeach time that you do so, it becomes easier and easier to do so. Eventually, your fears may disappearall together.
13. Once you begin training in sambo-wrestling, do not try to get ahead of your specifications for yourlevel. The training material for your level is intended to temper you and to promote your education, sothat you can proceed to the next level safely and correctly.
14. Never forget that physical training is the key to achieving high results in sambo-wrestling. By crosstraining, you will not only learn sambo-wreslting ploys but other important life skills such as skiing,
swimming, etc.
15. Respect your comrades and do not boast. It is always better to be praised by others than yourself.
16. If you experience sports success, do not change your attitude to your comrades.
17. It is seldom necessary to change to another club from the one that you started with. If you do well,it bodes well for your club. If you note deficiencies in your club, then do your part to eliminate thosedeficiencies. The task before each member of a sports club is to help make that club the best club inthe USSR.
18. Training in sambo-wrestling should does not remove the samboist from the duty to execute yourofficial duties. Work with the trainer to build a good personal schedule that includes work, training, andproper rest.
19. Training in sambo-wrestling should serve in truth to prepare a healthy youth who can serve Lenin’sconcepts of devotion to the Party while meeting Stalin’s requirement to overcome adversity and todefend our great native land. Therefore, it is important that those training in sambo-wrestling do theirpart and set before themselves the task of training in their sambo section no less than three times perweek.
